Renesas H8S/2604 16-bit single-chip microcomputer h8s family/h8s/2600 sery Datasheet

REJ09B0426-0100
16
H8S/2604 Group
Hardware Manual
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8S Family/H8S/2600 Series
H8S/2604
H8S/2603
Rev.1.00
Revision Date: Jan. 24, 2008
HD64F2604
HD6432604
HD6432603
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page ii of xxxvi
Notes regarding these materials
1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate
Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the
accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any
intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in
this document.
2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising
out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts,
programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples.
3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military
applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military
use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export
control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations.
4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and
application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is
subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this
document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular
and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed
through our website. (http://www.renesas.com )
5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas
assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information
included in this document.
6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in
light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application.
Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any
particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the
information in this document or Renesas products.
7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas
products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or
malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require
especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and
traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication
transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas
sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above.
8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below:
(1) artificial life support devices or systems
(2) surgical implantations
(3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.)
(4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life
Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who
elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas
Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all
damages arising out of such applications.
9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect
to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation
characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or
damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges.
10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific
characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use
conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and
injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for
hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention,
appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the
evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or
system manufactured by you.
11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas
products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very
high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your
products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment.
12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written
approval from Renesas.
13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this
document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page iii of xxxvi
General Precautions on Handling of Product
1. Treatment of NC Pins
Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins.
The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are
used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the
operation of the LSI is not guaranteed.
2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins
Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level.
Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins
are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur.
3. Processing before Initialization
Note: When power is first supplied, the product's state is undefined.
The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the
chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are
undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design
your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this
undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately
after the power supply has been turned on.
4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses
Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited.
The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers
may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system's
operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page iv of xxxvi
Configuration of This Manual
This manual comprises the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General Precautions on Handling of Product
Configuration of This Manual
Preface
Contents
Overview
Description of Functional Modules
• CPU and System-Control Modules
• On-Chip Peripheral Modules
The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the
module. However, the generic style includes the following items:
i) Feature
ii) Input/Output Pin
iii) Register Description
iv) Operation
v) Usage Note
When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section
includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the
final part of each section.
7. List of Registers
8. Electrical Characteristics
9. Appendix
10. Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition (only for revised versions)
The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions.
This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this
manual.
11. Index
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page v of xxxvi
Preface
The H8S/2604 Group single-chip microcomputer is made up of the high-speed H8S/2600 CPU as
its core, and the peripheral functions required configuring a system. The H8S/2600 CPU has an
instruction set that is compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs.
Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8S/2604 Group in the
design of application systems. Target users are expected to understand the
fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers.
Objective:
This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical
characteristics of the H8S/2604 Group to the target users.
Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual for a detailed
description of the instruction set.
Notes on reading this manual:
• In order to understand the overall functions of the chip
Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts
on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions, and electrical characteristics.
• In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions
Read the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual.
• In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known
Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the
register. The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 21,
List of Registers.
Examples: Register name:
The following notation is used for cases when the same or a
similar function, e.g. 16-bit timer pulse unit or serial
communication, is implemented on more than one channel:
XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel
number)
Bit order:
The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right.
Related Manuals:
The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site.
Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require.
http://www.renesas.com/
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page vi of xxxvi
H8S/2604 Group manuals:
Document Title
Document No.
H8S/2604 Group Hardware Manual
This manual
H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual
REJ09B0139
User's manuals for development tools:
Document Title
Document No.
H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor
User's Manual
REJ10B0058
Microcomputer Development Environment System H8S, H8/300 Series
Simulator/Debugger User's Manual
ADE-702-037
H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop 3 Tutorial
REJ10B0024
H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop 3 User's
Manual
REJ10B0026
All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page vii of xxxvi
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page viii of xxxvi
Contents
Section 1 Overview................................................................................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Overview................................................................................................................................ 1
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................... 2
Pin Assignment ...................................................................................................................... 3
Pin Functions ......................................................................................................................... 4
Section 2 CPU......................................................................................................11
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Features................................................................................................................................ 11
2.1.1 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU ..................................... 12
2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU ............................................................................... 13
2.1.3 Differences from H8/300H CPU............................................................................. 13
CPU Operating Modes......................................................................................................... 14
2.2.1 Normal Mode.......................................................................................................... 14
2.2.2 Advanced Mode...................................................................................................... 15
Address Space...................................................................................................................... 18
Registers............................................................................................................................... 19
2.4.1 General Registers.................................................................................................... 20
2.4.2 Program Counter (PC) ............................................................................................ 21
2.4.3 Extended Control Register (EXR) .......................................................................... 21
2.4.4 Condition-Code Register (CCR)............................................................................. 22
2.4.5 Multiply-Accumulate Register (MAC)................................................................... 23
2.4.6 Initial Values of CPU Registers .............................................................................. 23
Data Formats........................................................................................................................ 24
2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................... 24
2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ............................................................................................ 26
Instruction Set ...................................................................................................................... 27
2.6.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function .......................................................... 28
2.6.2 Basic Instruction Formats ....................................................................................... 37
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation........................................................ 38
2.7.1 Register DirectRn ............................................................................................... 39
2.7.2 Register Indirect@ERn ....................................................................................... 39
2.7.3 Register Indirect with Displacement@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)................. 39
2.7.4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement@ERn+ or @-ERn..... 40
2.7.5 Absolute Address@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32....................................... 40
2.7.6 Immediate#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32.................................................................... 41
2.7.7 Program-Counter Relative@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)....................................... 41
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page ix of xxxvi
2.8
2.9
2.7.8 Memory Indirect@@aa:8 ................................................................................... 41
2.7.9 Effective Address Calculation ................................................................................ 42
Processing States.................................................................................................................. 45
Usage Note........................................................................................................................... 46
2.9.1 Notes on Using the Bit Operation Instruction......................................................... 46
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ....................................................................... 47
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................................... 47
Register Descriptions........................................................................................................... 47
3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ............................................................................ 48
3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)......................................................................... 49
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................... 50
Address Map ........................................................................................................................ 51
Section 4 Exception Handling ............................................................................. 53
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Exception Handling Types and Priority............................................................................... 53
Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table .................................................................. 53
Reset .................................................................................................................................... 55
4.3.1 Reset Exception Handling ...................................................................................... 55
4.3.2 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................... 57
4.3.3 State of On-Chip Peripheral Modules after Reset Release ..................................... 58
Traces................................................................................................................................... 58
Interrupts.............................................................................................................................. 59
Trap Instruction.................................................................................................................... 60
Stack Status after Exception Handling................................................................................. 61
Usage Note........................................................................................................................... 62
Section 5 Interrupt Controller.............................................................................. 63
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Features................................................................................................................................ 63
Input/Output Pins................................................................................................................. 65
Register Descriptions........................................................................................................... 65
5.3.1 Interrupt Priority Registers A to M (IPRA to IPRM) ............................................. 66
5.3.2 IRQ Enable Register (IER) ..................................................................................... 67
5.3.3 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)........................................ 68
5.3.4 IRQ Status Register (ISR)....................................................................................... 70
Interrupt Sources.................................................................................................................. 71
5.4.1 External Interrupts .................................................................................................. 71
5.4.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................... 72
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table......................................................................... 72
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ................................................................ 76
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page x of xxxvi
5.7
5.6.1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ........................................................................................ 76
5.6.2 Interrupt Control Mode 2 ........................................................................................ 78
5.6.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence ................................................................. 80
5.6.4 Interrupt Response Times ....................................................................................... 82
5.6.5 DTC Activation by Interrupt................................................................................... 83
Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................... 83
5.7.1 Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling ............................................ 83
5.7.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ......................................................................... 84
5.7.3 When Interrupts Are Disabled ................................................................................ 84
5.7.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction............................................. 85
5.7.5 IRQ Interrupt .......................................................................................................... 85
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) .................................................................87
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Features................................................................................................................................ 87
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 88
6.2.1 Break Address Register A (BARA) ........................................................................ 88
6.2.2 Break Address Register B (BARB) ........................................................................ 89
6.2.3 Break Control Register A (BCRA) ......................................................................... 89
6.2.4 Break Control Register B (BCRB).......................................................................... 90
Operation ............................................................................................................................. 90
6.3.1 PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch .......................................................... 90
6.3.2 PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access.................................................................. 91
6.3.3 PC Break Operation at Consecutive Data Transfer................................................. 91
6.3.4 Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes ................................................... 91
6.3.5 When Instruction Execution Is Delayed by One State............................................ 92
Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................... 93
6.4.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ..................................................................................... 93
6.4.2 PC Break Interrupts ................................................................................................ 93
6.4.3 CMFA and CMFB .................................................................................................. 93
6.4.4 PC Break Interrupt when DTC Is Bus Master ........................................................ 93
6.4.5 PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Address Following
BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS Instruction............................................... 93
6.4.6 I Bit Set by LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC Instruction .......................................... 93
6.4.7 PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Address Following Bcc Instruction............. 94
6.4.8 PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Branch Destination
Address of Bcc Instruction...................................................................................... 94
Section 7 Bus Controller......................................................................................95
7.1
Basic Timing........................................................................................................................ 95
7.1.1 On-Chip Memory Access Timing (ROM, RAM) ................................................... 95
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xi of xxxvi
7.2
7.1.2 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Timing........................................................... 96
7.1.3 On-Chip SSU Module and Realtime Input Port Data Register Access Timing ...... 97
Bus Arbitration .................................................................................................................... 98
7.2.1 Order of Priority of the Bus Masters....................................................................... 98
7.2.2 Bus Transfer Timing............................................................................................... 98
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC).......................................................... 99
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
Features................................................................................................................................ 99
Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 101
8.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) ............................................................................. 102
8.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB).............................................................................. 103
8.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR)................................................................... 103
8.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR)........................................................... 103
8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) ............................................................... 103
8.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)................................................................ 104
8.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTCER).......................................................................... 104
8.2.8 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)......................................................................... 105
Activation Sources............................................................................................................. 106
Location of Register Information and DTC Vector Table ................................................. 107
Operation ........................................................................................................................... 110
8.5.1 Normal Mode........................................................................................................ 111
8.5.2 Repeat Mode......................................................................................................... 112
8.5.3 Block Transfer Mode ............................................................................................ 113
8.5.4 Chain Transfer ...................................................................................................... 115
8.5.5 Interrupts............................................................................................................... 116
8.5.6 Operation Timing.................................................................................................. 116
8.5.7 Number of DTC Execution States ........................................................................ 117
Procedures for Using DTC................................................................................................. 119
8.6.1 Activation by Interrupt.......................................................................................... 119
8.6.2 Activation by Software ......................................................................................... 119
Examples of Use of the DTC ............................................................................................. 120
8.7.1 Normal Mode........................................................................................................ 120
8.7.2 Chain Transfer ...................................................................................................... 121
8.7.3 Software Activation .............................................................................................. 122
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 123
8.8.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 123
8.8.2 On-Chip RAM ...................................................................................................... 123
8.8.3 DTCE Bit Setting.................................................................................................. 123
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xii of xxxvi
Section 9 I/O Ports .............................................................................................125
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
Port 1.................................................................................................................................. 129
9.1.1 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR).............................................................. 129
9.1.2 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)................................................................................. 130
9.1.3 Port 1 Register (PORT1)....................................................................................... 130
9.1.4 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 131
Port 3.................................................................................................................................. 134
9.2.1 Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR).............................................................. 134
9.2.2 Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)................................................................................. 135
9.2.3 Port 3 Register (PORT3)....................................................................................... 135
9.2.4 Port 3 Open-Drain Control Register (P3ODR) ..................................................... 136
9.2.5 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 136
Port 4.................................................................................................................................. 138
9.3.1 Port 4 Register (PORT4)....................................................................................... 138
Port 7.................................................................................................................................. 139
9.4.1 Port 7 Data Direction Register (P7DDR).............................................................. 139
9.4.2 Port 7 Data Register (P7DR)................................................................................. 140
9.4.3 Port 7 Register (PORT7)....................................................................................... 140
9.4.4 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 141
Port 9.................................................................................................................................. 143
9.5.1 Port 9 Register (PORT9)....................................................................................... 143
Port A................................................................................................................................. 144
9.6.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) ............................................................ 144
9.6.2 Port A Data Register (PADR)............................................................................... 145
9.6.3 Port A Register (PORTA)..................................................................................... 145
9.6.4 Port A Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PAPCR) ................................................. 146
9.6.5 Port A Open-Drain Control Register (PAODR) ................................................... 146
9.6.6 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 147
Port B ................................................................................................................................. 148
9.7.1 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) ............................................................ 148
9.7.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR) ............................................................................... 149
9.7.3 Port B Register (PORTB) ..................................................................................... 149
9.7.4 Port B Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PBPCR) ................................................. 150
9.7.5 Port B Open-Drain Control Register (PBODR).................................................... 150
9.7.6 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 151
Port C ................................................................................................................................. 153
9.8.1 Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR) ............................................................ 153
9.8.2 Port C Data Register (PCDR) ............................................................................... 154
9.8.3 Port C Register (PORTC) ..................................................................................... 154
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xiii of xxxvi
9.8.4 Port C Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PCPCR) ................................................. 155
9.8.5 Port C Open-Drain Control Register (PCODR).................................................... 155
9.8.6 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 156
9.9 Port D................................................................................................................................. 159
9.9.1 Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR)............................................................ 159
9.9.2 Port D Data Register (PDDR)............................................................................... 160
9.9.3 Port D Register (PORTD)..................................................................................... 160
9.9.4 Port D Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PDPCR) ................................................. 161
9.9.5 Port D RealTime Input Data Register (PDRTIDR) .............................................. 161
9.10 Port F ................................................................................................................................. 162
9.10.1 Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR) ............................................................. 162
9.10.2 Port F Data Register (PFDR) ................................................................................ 163
9.10.3 Port F Register (PORTF) ...................................................................................... 163
9.10.4 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 164
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) ....................................................... 167
10.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 167
10.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 171
10.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 172
10.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR).............................................................................. 174
10.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR)............................................................................. 179
10.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)...................................................................... 181
10.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)............................................................... 198
10.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................. 200
10.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)......................................................................................... 203
10.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................. 203
10.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) ................................................................................ 203
10.3.9 Timer Synchro Register (TSYR) .......................................................................... 204
10.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 205
10.4.1 Basic Functions..................................................................................................... 205
10.4.2 Synchronous Operation......................................................................................... 210
10.4.3 Buffer Operation................................................................................................... 212
10.4.4 Cascaded Operation .............................................................................................. 217
10.4.5 PWM Modes......................................................................................................... 219
10.4.6 Phase Counting Mode........................................................................................... 225
10.5 Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 233
10.6 DTC Activation.................................................................................................................. 235
10.7 A/D Converter Activation.................................................................................................. 235
10.8 Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 236
10.8.1 Input/Output Timing............................................................................................. 236
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xiv of xxxvi
10.8.2 Interrupt Signal Timing......................................................................................... 239
10.9 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 243
10.9.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 243
10.9.2 Input Clock Restrictions ....................................................................................... 243
10.9.3 Caution on Period Setting ..................................................................................... 244
10.9.4 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear Operations .......................................... 244
10.9.5 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment Operations ................................... 245
10.9.6 Conflict between TGR Write and Compare Match............................................... 246
10.9.7 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match .............................. 247
10.9.8 Conflict between TGR Read and Input Capture ................................................... 248
10.9.9 Conflict between TGR Write and Input Capture .................................................. 249
10.9.10 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture.................................. 250
10.9.11 Conflict between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing ............................. 251
10.9.12 Conflict between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow .................................... 252
10.9.13 Multiplexing of I/O Pins ....................................................................................... 252
10.9.14 Interrupts in Module Stop Mode........................................................................... 252
Section 11 8-Bit Timers .....................................................................................253
11.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 253
11.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 255
11.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 255
11.3.1 Timer Counters (TCNT) ....................................................................................... 256
11.3.2 Time Constant Registers A (TCORA) .................................................................. 256
11.3.3 Time Constant Registers B (TCORB) .................................................................. 257
11.3.4 Timer Control Registers (TCR) ............................................................................ 257
11.3.5 Timer Control/Status Registers (TCSR) ............................................................... 259
11.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 264
11.4.1 Pulse Output.......................................................................................................... 264
11.5 Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 265
11.5.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing .............................................................................. 265
11.5.2 Timing of CMFA and CMFB Setting When a Compare-Match Occurs............... 266
11.5.3 Timing of Timer Output When a Compare-Match Occurs ................................... 266
11.5.4 Timing of Compare-Match Clear When a Compare-Match Occurs ..................... 267
11.5.5 TCNT External Reset Timing............................................................................... 267
11.5.6 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting .............................................................. 268
11.6 Operation with Cascaded Connection................................................................................ 269
11.6.1 16-Bit Count Mode ............................................................................................... 269
11.6.2 Compare-Match Count Mode ............................................................................... 269
11.7 Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 270
11.7.1 Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation ................................................................. 270
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xv of xxxvi
11.7.2 A/D Converter Activation..................................................................................... 270
11.8 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 271
11.8.1 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear ............................................................. 271
11.8.2 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment...................................................... 272
11.8.3 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare-Match............................................ 273
11.8.4 Conflict between Compare-Matches A and B ...................................................... 273
11.8.5 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation ............................................. 274
11.8.6 Conflict between Interrupts and Module Stop Mode............................................ 275
11.8.7 Notes on Cascaded Connection ............................................................................ 275
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)............................................ 277
12.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 277
12.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 279
12.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 279
12.3.1 Next Data Enable Registers H, L (NDERH, NDERL) ......................................... 280
12.3.2 Output Data Registers H, L (PODRH, PODRL)................................................... 281
12.3.3 Next Data Registers H, L (NDRH, NDRL) .......................................................... 282
12.3.4 PPG Output Control Register (PCR) .................................................................... 284
12.3.5 PPG Output Mode Register (PMR) ...................................................................... 285
12.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 286
12.4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 286
12.4.2 Output Timing ...................................................................................................... 287
12.4.3 Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output............................................... 288
12.4.4 Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output)........... 289
12.4.5 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output............................................................................. 290
12.4.6 Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output............................... 292
12.4.7 Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
(Example of Four-Phase Complementary Non-Overlapping Output) .................. 293
12.4.8 Inverted Pulse Output ........................................................................................... 295
12.4.9 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture ............................................................. 296
12.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 297
12.5.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 297
12.5.2 Operation of Pulse Output Pins............................................................................. 297
Section 13 Watchdog Timer.............................................................................. 299
13.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 299
13.2 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 300
13.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)......................................................................................... 300
13.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................. 301
13.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)............................................................. 303
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xvi of xxxvi
13.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 304
13.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode Operation ........................................................................ 304
13.3.2 Interval Timer Mode............................................................................................. 304
13.4 Interrupts............................................................................................................................ 305
13.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 305
13.5.1 Notes on Register Access...................................................................................... 305
13.5.2 Conflict between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment........................... 306
13.5.3 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0....................................................................... 307
13.5.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................. 307
13.5.5 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode.............................................................. 307
13.5.6 OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode ......................................................... 307
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) ............................................309
14.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 309
14.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 311
14.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 311
14.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ............................................................................... 312
14.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) ............................................................................... 312
14.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR).............................................................................. 312
14.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) .............................................................................. 312
14.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ................................................................................ 313
14.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) .............................................................................. 317
14.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................. 320
14.3.8 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)..................................................................... 326
14.3.9 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ....................................................................................... 327
14.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ..................................................................................... 334
14.4.1 Data Transfer Format............................................................................................ 334
14.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in
Asynchronous Mode ............................................................................................. 336
14.4.3 Clock..................................................................................................................... 337
14.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode) .............................................................. 338
14.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)............................................................ 339
14.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)....................................................... 341
14.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function.......................................................................... 345
14.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission ............................................................. 346
14.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception .................................................................. 347
14.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ......................................................................... 351
14.6.1 Clock..................................................................................................................... 351
14.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .................................................. 352
14.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ..................................... 353
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xvii of xxxvi
14.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .......................................... 356
14.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception
(Clocked Synchronous Mode) .............................................................................. 358
14.7 Operation in Smart Card Interface ..................................................................................... 360
14.7.1 Pin Connection Example ...................................................................................... 360
14.7.2 Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode)................................................... 361
14.7.3 Block Transfer Mode ............................................................................................ 363
14.7.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in
Smart Card Interface Mode................................................................................... 363
14.7.5 Initialization.......................................................................................................... 364
14.7.6 Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode)......................................... 365
14.7.7 Serial Data Reception (Except for Block Transfer Mode).................................... 368
14.7.8 Clock Output Control............................................................................................ 370
14.8 Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 372
14.8.1 Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode ............................... 372
14.8.2 Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode .............................................................. 373
14.9 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 375
14.9.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 375
14.9.2 Break Detection and Processing ........................................................................... 375
14.9.3 Mark State and Break Detection ........................................................................... 375
14.9.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations
(Clocked Synchronous Mode Only) ..................................................................... 375
14.9.5 Restrictions on Using DTC................................................................................... 376
14.9.6 SCI Operations during Mode Transitions ............................................................. 376
14.9.7 Notes when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin ................................................ 380
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU) ............................ 383
15.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 383
15.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 385
15.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 385
15.3.1 SS Control Register H (SSCRH) .......................................................................... 386
15.3.2 SS Control Register L (SSCRL) ........................................................................... 388
15.3.3 SS Mode Register (SSMR) ................................................................................... 389
15.3.4 SS Enable Register (SSER) .................................................................................. 390
15.3.5 SS Status Register (SSSR).................................................................................... 391
15.3.6 SS Transmit Data Register 3 to 0 (SSTDR3 to SSTDR0) .................................... 393
15.3.7 SS Receive Data Register 3 to 0 (SSRDR3 to SSRDR0) ..................................... 394
15.3.8 SS Shift Register (SSTRSR)................................................................................. 394
15.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 395
15.4.1 Transfer Clock ...................................................................................................... 395
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xviii of xxxvi
15.4.2 Relationship of Clock Phase, Polarity, and Data .................................................. 395
15.4.3 Relationship between Data I/O Pins and the Shift Register.................................. 396
15.4.4 Data Transmission and Data Reception ................................................................ 397
15.4.5 SCS Pin Control and Conflict Error...................................................................... 406
15.5 Interrupt Requests .............................................................................................................. 407
15.6 Usage Note......................................................................................................................... 408
15.6.1 Setting of Module Stop Mode............................................................................... 408
Section 16 A/D Converter..................................................................................409
16.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 409
16.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 411
16.3 Register Description........................................................................................................... 412
16.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) .............................................. 412
16.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ................................................................ 413
16.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................. 415
16.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 416
16.4.1 Single Mode.......................................................................................................... 416
16.4.2 Scan Mode ............................................................................................................ 416
16.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .......................................................... 417
16.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing.............................................................................. 419
16.5 Interrupt Source ................................................................................................................. 419
16.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions .............................................................................. 420
16.7 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 422
16.7.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 422
16.7.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance .................................................................. 422
16.7.3 Influences on Absolute Accuracy ......................................................................... 423
16.7.4 Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pin Settings....................................... 423
16.7.5 Notes on Board Design ......................................................................................... 424
16.7.6 Notes on Noise Countermeasures ......................................................................... 424
Section 17 RAM ................................................................................................427
Section 18 ROM ................................................................................................429
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
Features.............................................................................................................................. 429
Mode Transitions ............................................................................................................... 430
Block Configuration........................................................................................................... 434
Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 435
Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 435
18.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)...................................................... 435
18.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)...................................................... 437
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xix of xxxvi
18.6
18.7
18.8
18.9
18.10
18.11
18.12
18.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ............................................................................ 437
18.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ............................................................................ 438
18.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER).................................................................... 438
On-Board Programming Modes......................................................................................... 439
18.6.1 Boot Mode ............................................................................................................ 440
18.6.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode...................................................... 442
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM .................................................................................... 444
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing................................................................................ 446
18.8.1 Program/Program-Verify ...................................................................................... 446
18.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify................................................................................................ 448
18.8.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory........................... 448
Program/Erase Protection .................................................................................................. 450
18.9.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................. 450
18.9.2 Software Protection .............................................................................................. 450
18.9.3 Error Protection .................................................................................................... 450
Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................. 451
Power-Down States for Flash Memory.............................................................................. 451
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Masked ROM Version ............................... 452
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator..................................................................... 453
19.1 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 454
19.1.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) ............................................................ 454
19.1.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ............................................................ 455
19.2 Oscillator............................................................................................................................ 456
19.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator............................................................................ 456
19.2.2 External Clock Input............................................................................................. 457
19.3 PLL Circuit ........................................................................................................................ 459
19.4 Medium-Speed Clock Divider ........................................................................................... 459
19.5 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit................................................................................... 459
19.6 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 460
19.6.1 Note on Crystal Resonator.................................................................................... 460
19.6.2 Note on Board Design........................................................................................... 460
Section 20 Power-Down Modes........................................................................ 463
20.1 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 466
20.1.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ..................................................................... 466
20.1.2 Module Stop Control Registers A to C (MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC) ................... 468
20.2 Medium-Speed Mode ........................................................................................................ 469
20.3 Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................ 470
20.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode...................................................................................... 470
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xx of xxxvi
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8
20.3.2 Clearing Sleep Mode ............................................................................................ 470
Software Standby Mode..................................................................................................... 471
20.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode .................................................................. 471
20.4.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode ......................................................................... 471
20.4.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing
Software Standby Mode........................................................................................ 472
20.4.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example..................................................... 473
Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................................................... 474
20.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................. 474
20.5.2 Clearing Hardware Standby Mode........................................................................ 474
20.5.3 Hardware Standby Mode Timings ........................................................................ 474
Module Stop Mode ............................................................................................................ 475
φ Clock Output Disabling Function ................................................................................... 476
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 477
20.8.1 I/O Port Status....................................................................................................... 477
20.8.2 Current Consumption during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period..................... 477
20.8.3 DTC Module Stop................................................................................................. 477
20.8.4 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupt................................................................... 477
20.8.5 Writing to MSTPCR ............................................................................................. 477
Section 21 List of Registers ...............................................................................479
21.1 Register Addresses (Address Order).................................................................................. 480
21.2 Register Bits....................................................................................................................... 488
21.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode ........................................................................... 498
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics .................................................................507
22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................................................. 507
22.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................................. 508
22.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................................. 510
22.3.1 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 511
22.3.2 Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 512
22.3.3 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules ............................................................... 514
22.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics......................................................................................... 523
22.5 Flash Memory Characteristics ........................................................................................... 524
Appendix
A.
B.
C.
.........................................................................................................527
I/O Port States in Each Pin State........................................................................................ 527
Product Code Lineup ......................................................................................................... 528
Package Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 529
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxi of xxxvi
Index
......................................................................................................... 531
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxii of xxxvi
Figures
Section 1 Overview
Figure 1.1 Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 2
Figure 1.2 Pin Assignment ............................................................................................................. 3
Section 2 CPU
Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)..................................................................... 15
Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode ................................................................................. 15
Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)................................................................. 16
Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode ............................................................................. 17
Figure 2.5 Memory Map............................................................................................................... 18
Figure 2.6 CPU Registers ............................................................................................................. 19
Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers ......................................................................................... 20
Figure 2.8 Stack............................................................................................................................ 21
Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1).............................................................................. 24
Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2).............................................................................. 25
Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats............................................................................................... 26
Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples) ................................................................................ 38
Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode ......................................... 42
Figure 2.13 State Transitions ........................................................................................................ 46
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Figure 3.1 Address Map ............................................................................................................... 51
Section 4 Exception Handling
Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Enabled)............................... 56
Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence
(Advanced Mode with On-chip ROM Disabled: Not Available in this LSI) .............. 57
Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling ........................................................................ 61
Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value Is Odd................................................................................ 62
Section 5
Figure 5.1
Figure 5.2
Figure 5.3
Figure 5.4
Figure 5.5
Figure 5.6
Interrupt Controller
Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller........................................................................ 64
Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 ................................................................ 71
Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0..... 77
Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Control Mode 2..................... 79
Interrupt Exception Handling ...................................................................................... 81
Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling................................................. 84
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxiii of xxxvi
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of PC Break Controller ...................................................................... 88
Figure 6.2 Operation in Power-Down Mode Transitions ............................................................. 92
Section 7
Figure 7.1
Figure 7.2
Figure 7.3
Bus Controller
On-Chip Memory Access Cycle.................................................................................. 95
On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle.................................................................. 96
On-Chip SSU Module Access Cycle........................................................................... 97
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DTC ............................................................................................. 100
Figure 8.2 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control .................................................. 106
Figure 8.3 Location of DTC Register Information in Address Space......................................... 107
Figure 8.4 Flowchart of DTC Operation .................................................................................... 110
Figure 8.5 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode .......................................................................... 111
Figure 8.6 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode ........................................................................... 112
Figure 8.7 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode .............................................................. 114
Figure 8.8 Chain Transfer Operation.......................................................................................... 115
Figure 8.9 DTC Operation Timing (Example in Normal Mode or Repeat Mode) ..................... 116
Figure 8.10 DTC Operation Timing
(Example of Block Transfer Mode, with Block Size of 2) ..................................... 117
Figure 8.11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Chain Transfer) ............................................ 117
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of TPU............................................................................................ 170
Figure 10.2 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure .................................................. 205
Figure 10.3 Free-Running Counter Operation ............................................................................ 206
Figure 10.4 Periodic Counter Operation..................................................................................... 207
Figure 10.5 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match.............. 207
Figure 10.6 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation ............................................................... 208
Figure 10.7 Example of Toggle Output Operation ..................................................................... 208
Figure 10.8 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure ......................................... 209
Figure 10.9 Example of Input Capture Operation ...................................................................... 210
Figure 10.10 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure ........................................ 211
Figure 10.11 Example of Synchronous Operation...................................................................... 212
Figure 10.12 Compare Match Buffer Operation......................................................................... 213
Figure 10.13 Input Capture Buffer Operation............................................................................. 213
Figure 10.14 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure................................................... 214
Figure 10.15 Example of Buffer Operation (1) .......................................................................... 215
Figure 10.16 Example of Buffer Operation (2) .......................................................................... 216
Figure 10.17 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure ................................................................. 217
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxiv of xxxvi
Figure 10.18
Figure 10.19
Figure 10.20
Figure 10.21
Figure 10.22
Figure 10.23
Figure 10.24
Figure 10.25
Figure 10.26
Figure 10.27
Figure 10.28
Figure 10.29
Figure 10.30
Figure 10.31
Figure 10.32
Figure 10.33
Figure 10.34
Figure 10.35
Figure 10.36
Figure 10.37
Figure 10.38
Figure 10.39
Figure 10.40
Figure 10.41
Figure 10.42
Figure 10.43
Figure 10.44
Figure 10.45
Figure 10.46
Figure 10.47
Figure 10.48
Figure 10.49
Figure 10.50
Figure 10.51
Figure 10.52
Figure 10.53
Section 11
Figure 11.1
Figure 11.2
Figure 11.3
Example of Cascaded Operation (1)...................................................................... 218
Example of Cascaded Operation (2)...................................................................... 218
Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure .......................................................... 221
Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) ................................................................. 222
Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) ................................................................. 223
Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) ................................................................. 224
Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure........................................... 226
Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation .................................................... 226
Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation .................................................... 227
Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation .................................................... 229
Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation .................................................... 230
Phase Counting Mode Application Example......................................................... 232
Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation............................................................ 236
Count Timing in External Clock Operation........................................................... 236
Output Compare Output Timing ........................................................................... 237
Input Capture Input Signal Timing........................................................................ 237
Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match) .............................................................. 238
Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) .................................................................. 238
Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match).......................................................... 239
Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) ............................................................. 239
TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match) ............................................................... 240
TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture) ................................................................... 240
TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing.............................................................................. 241
TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing.............................................................................. 241
Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU .............................................................. 242
Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC Activation ............................................ 242
Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode ................ 243
Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear Operations ........................................... 244
Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment Operations .................................... 245
Conflict between TGR Write and Compare Match ............................................... 246
Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match............................... 247
Conflict between TGR Read and Input Capture.................................................... 248
Conflict between TGR Write and Input Capture................................................... 249
Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture .................................. 250
Conflict between Overflow and Counter Clearing ................................................ 251
Conflict between TCNT Write and Overflow ....................................................... 252
8-Bit Timers
Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module................................................................... 254
Example of Pulse Output......................................................................................... 264
Count Timing for Internal Clock Input.................................................................... 265
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxv of xxxvi
Figure 11.4 Count Timing for External Clock Input .................................................................. 265
Figure 11.5 Timing of CMF Setting ........................................................................................... 266
Figure 11.6 Timing of Timer Output .......................................................................................... 266
Figure 11.7 Timing of Compare-Match Clear ............................................................................ 267
Figure 11.8 Timing of Clearing by External Reset Input ........................................................... 267
Figure 11.9 Timing of OVF Setting............................................................................................ 268
Figure 11.10 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear.............................................................. 271
Figure 11.11 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment ...................................................... 272
Figure 11.12 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare-Match ............................................ 273
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of PPG............................................................................................ 278
Figure 12.2 PPG Output Operation ............................................................................................ 286
Figure 12.3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example) ................................. 287
Figure 12.4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example) ............................................ 288
Figure 12.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output) ..................................... 289
Figure 12.6 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output ............................................................................... 290
Figure 12.7 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing ............................................. 291
Figure 12.8 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example)............................. 292
Figure 12.9 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary)................ 293
Figure 12.10 Inverted Pulse Output (Example) .......................................................................... 295
Figure 12.11 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example)............................................ 296
Section 13
Figure 13.1
Figure 13.2
Figure 13.3
Figure 13.4
Watchdog Timer
Block Diagram of WDT .......................................................................................... 300
Example of WDT0 Watchdog Timer Operation ..................................................... 304
Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR (Example for WDT0) .............................. 306
Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment ........................................................ 306
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of SCI............................................................................................. 310
Figure 14.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) .................................................. 334
Figure 14.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ........................................ 336
Figure 14.4 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode) ............................................................................................. 337
Figure 14.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ....................................................................... 338
Figure 14.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) .................................................... 339
Figure 14.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ................................................................... 340
Figure 14.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) .................................................... 341
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxvi of xxxvi
Figure 14.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1) .......................................................... 343
Figure 14.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2) .......................................................... 344
Figure 14.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) .......................................... 346
Figure 14.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart ........................................ 347
Figure 14.12 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit).............................. 348
Figure 14.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)........................................ 349
Figure 14.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)........................................ 350
Figure 14.14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First) ............................ 351
Figure 14.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ..................................................................... 352
Figure 14.16 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode .................. 354
Figure 14.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ................................................................. 355
Figure 14.18 Example of SCI Operation in Reception ............................................................... 356
Figure 14.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart ...................................................................... 357
Figure 14.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations ...... 359
Figure 14.21 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections.............................. 360
Figure 14.22 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format ........................................................... 361
Figure 14.23 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0) ...................................................... 362
Figure 14.24 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1)..................................................... 362
Figure 14.25 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode
(Using Clock of 372 Times the Transfer Rate) ..................................................... 364
Figure 14.26 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode......................................................... 366
Figure 14.27 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation.................................. 366
Figure 14.28 Example of Transmission Processing Flow........................................................... 367
Figure 14.29 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode .......................................................... 368
Figure 14.30 Example of Reception Processing Flow................................................................ 369
Figure 14.31 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level.................................................................. 370
Figure 14.32 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure ......................................................................... 371
Figure 14.33 Sample Transmission using DTC in Clocked Synchronous Mode........................ 376
Figure 14.34 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission............................... 377
Figure 14.35 Pin States during Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Internal Clock)............. 377
Figure 14.36 Pin States during Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode
(Internal Clock)...................................................................................................... 378
Figure 14.37 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception .................................... 379
Figure 14.38 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin........................................... 380
Figure 14.39 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin
(Example of Preventing Low-Level Output)......................................................... 381
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxvii of xxxvi
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of SSU............................................................................................ 384
Figure 15.2 Relationship of Clock Phase, Polarity, and Data..................................................... 395
Figure 15.3 Relationship between Data I/O Pins and the Shift Register .................................... 396
Figure 15.4 Example of SSU Initialization................................................................................. 397
Figure 15.5 Example of Transmission Operation ....................................................................... 399
Figure 15.6 Example of Data Transmission Flowchart .............................................................. 400
Figure 15.7 Example of Reception Operation ............................................................................ 402
Figure 15.8 Example of Data Reception Flowchart.................................................................... 403
Figure 15.9 Example of Simultaneous Transmission/Reception Flowchart ............................... 405
Figure 15.10 Conflict Error Detection Timing (Before Transfer Start)...................................... 406
Figure 15.11 Conflict Error Detection Timing (After Transfer End) ......................................... 407
Section 16
Figure 16.1
Figure 16.2
Figure 16.3
Figure 16.4
Figure 16.5
Figure 16.6
Figure 16.7
Figure 16.8
A/D Converter
Block Diagram of A/D Converter ........................................................................... 410
A/D Conversion Timing.......................................................................................... 417
External Trigger Input Timing ................................................................................ 419
A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions ................................................................... 421
A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions ................................................................... 421
Example of Analog Input Circuit ............................................................................ 423
Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit........................................................... 425
Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit ....................................................................... 425
Section 18 ROM
Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory........................................................................... 430
Figure 18.2 Flash Memory State Transitions.............................................................................. 431
Figure 18.3 Boot Mode............................................................................................................... 432
Figure 18.4 User Program Mode ................................................................................................ 433
Figure 18.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration........................................................................ 434
Figure 18.6 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode ........................ 443
Figure 18.7 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ................................................... 444
Figure 18.8 Example of RAM Overlap Operation...................................................................... 445
Figure 18.9 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart ....................................................................... 447
Figure 18.10 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ............................................................................... 449
Section 19
Figure 19.1
Figure 19.2
Figure 19.3
Figure 19.4
Figure 19.5
Clock Pulse Generator
Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ............................................................... 453
Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example)........................................................... 456
Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit...................................................................... 456
External Clock Input (Examples) ............................................................................ 457
External Clock Input Timing................................................................................... 458
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxviii of xxxvi
Figure 19.6 Note on Board Design of Oscillator Circuit ............................................................ 460
Figure 19.7 External Circuitry Recommended for PLL Circuit.................................................. 461
Section 20
Figure 20.1
Figure 20.2
Figure 20.3
Figure 20.4
Figure 20.5
Power-Down Modes
Mode Transition Diagram ....................................................................................... 464
Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing ........................................ 470
Software Standby Mode Application Example ....................................................... 473
Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode .................................................. 474
Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode ............................................... 475
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
Figure 22.1 Output Load Circuit................................................................................................. 510
Figure 22.2 System Clock Timing .............................................................................................. 511
Figure 22.3 Oscillation Settling Timing ..................................................................................... 512
Figure 22.4 Reset Input Timing.................................................................................................. 513
Figure 22.5 Interrupt Input Timing............................................................................................. 513
Figure 22.6 I/O Port Input/Output Timing.................................................................................. 517
Figure 22.7 Realtime Input Port Data Input Timing................................................................... 517
Figure 22.8 TPU Input/Output Timing ....................................................................................... 517
Figure 22.9 TPU Clock Input Timing......................................................................................... 518
Figure 22.10 SCK Clock Input Timing....................................................................................... 518
Figure 22.11 SCI Input/Output Timing (Clocked Synchronous Mode)...................................... 518
Figure 22.12 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing...................................................... 518
Figure 22.13 PPG Output Timing............................................................................................... 519
Figure 22.14 8-Bit Timer Output Timing ................................................................................... 519
Figure 22.15 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing ........................................................................... 519
Figure 22.16 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing ............................................................................ 520
Figure 22.17 SSU Timing (Master, CPHS = 1) .......................................................................... 520
Figure 22.18 SSU Timing (Master, CPHS = 0) .......................................................................... 521
Figure 22.19 SSU Timing (Slave, CPHS = 1) ............................................................................ 521
Figure 22.20 SSU Timing (Slave, CPHS = 0) ............................................................................ 522
Appendix
Figure C.1 Dimensions ............................................................................................................... 529
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxix of xxxvi
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxx of xxxvi
Tables
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.1
Instruction Classification ........................................................................................ 27
Table 2.2
Operation Notation ................................................................................................. 28
Table 2.3
Data Transfer Instructions....................................................................................... 29
Table 2.4
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1) ................................................................... 30
Table 2.4
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2) ................................................................... 31
Table 2.5
Logic Operations Instructions................................................................................. 32
Table 2.6
Shift Instructions..................................................................................................... 32
Table 2.7
Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)............................................................................ 33
Table 2.7
Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)............................................................................ 34
Table 2.8
Branch Instructions ................................................................................................. 35
Table 2.9
System Control Instructions.................................................................................... 36
Table 2.10
Block Data Transfer Instructions ............................................................................ 37
Table 2.11
Addressing Modes .................................................................................................. 39
Table 2.12
Absolute Address Access Ranges ........................................................................... 40
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Table 3.1
MCU Operating Mode Selection ............................................................................ 47
Section 4 Exception Handling
Table 4.1
Exception Types and Priority.................................................................................. 53
Table 4.2
Exception Handling Vector Table........................................................................... 54
Table 4.3
Statuses of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling ................................... 58
Table 4.4
Statuses of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling................... 60
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 65
Table 5.2
Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities................................. 73
Table 5.3
Interrupt Control Modes ......................................................................................... 76
Table 5.4
Interrupt Response Times ....................................................................................... 82
Table 5.5
Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Status ........................ 83
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.1
Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs............... 108
Table 8.2
Register Information in Normal Mode.................................................................. 111
Table 8.3
Register Information in Repeat Mode................................................................... 112
Table 8.4
Register Information in Block Transfer Mode...................................................... 113
Table 8.5
DTC Execution Status........................................................................................... 118
Table 8.6
Number of States Required for Each Execution Status......................................... 118
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxxi of xxxvi
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.1
Port Functions....................................................................................................... 126
Table 9.2
P17 Pin Function................................................................................................... 131
Table 9.3
P16 Pin Function................................................................................................... 131
Table 9.4
P15 Pin Function................................................................................................... 132
Table 9.5
P14 Pin Function................................................................................................... 132
Table 9.6
P13 Pin Function................................................................................................... 132
Table 9.7
P12 Pin Function................................................................................................... 133
Table 9.8
P11 Pin Function................................................................................................... 133
Table 9.9
P10 Pin Function................................................................................................... 133
Table 9.10
P37 Pin Function................................................................................................... 136
Table 9.11
P36 Pin Function................................................................................................... 136
Table 9.12
P35 Pin Function................................................................................................... 137
Table 9.13
P34 Pin Function................................................................................................... 137
Table 9.14
P33 Pin Function................................................................................................... 137
Table 9.15
P32 Pin Function................................................................................................... 137
Table 9.16
P31 Pin Function................................................................................................... 138
Table 9.17
P30 Pin Function................................................................................................... 138
Table 9.18
P77 Pin Function................................................................................................... 141
Table 9.19
P76 Pin Function................................................................................................... 141
Table 9.20
P75 Pin Function................................................................................................... 141
Table 9.21
P74 Pin Function................................................................................................... 141
Table 9.22
P73 Pin Function................................................................................................... 141
Table 9.23
P72 Pin Function................................................................................................... 142
Table 9.24
P71 Pin Function................................................................................................... 142
Table 9.25
P70 Pin Function................................................................................................... 142
Table 9.26
PA3 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 147
Table 9.27
PA2 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 147
Table 9.28
PA1 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 147
Table 9.29
PA0 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 147
Table 9.30
PB7 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 151
Table 9.31
PB6 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 151
Table 9.32
PB5 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 151
Table 9.33
PB4 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 152
Table 9.34
PB3 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 152
Table 9.35
PB2 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 152
Table 9.36
PB1 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 152
Table 9.37
PB0 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 153
Table 9.38
PC7 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 156
Table 9.39
PC6 Pin Function.................................................................................................. 156
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxxii of xxxvi
Table 9.40
Table 9.41
Table 9.42
Table 9.43
Table 9.44
Table 9.45
Table 9.46
Table 9.47
Table 9.48
Table 9.49
Table 9.50
Table 9.51
Table 9.52
Table 9.53
PC5 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 156
PC4 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 157
PC3 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 157
PC2 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 157
PC1 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 158
PC0 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 158
PF7 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 164
PF6 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 164
PF5 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 164
PF4 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 164
PF3 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 164
PF2 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 165
PF1 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 165
PF0 Pin Function .................................................................................................. 165
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.1
TPU Functions ...................................................................................................... 168
Table 10.2
TPU Pins............................................................................................................... 171
Table 10.3
CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 0 and 3) ................................................................. 175
Table 10.4
CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 1, 2, 4, and 5) ........................................................ 175
Table 10.5
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 0) .............................................................................. 176
Table 10.6
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 1) .............................................................................. 176
Table 10.7
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 2) .............................................................................. 177
Table 10.8
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 3) .............................................................................. 177
Table 10.9
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 4) .............................................................................. 178
Table 10.10
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 5) .......................................................................... 178
Table 10.11
MD3 to MD0 .................................................................................................... 180
Table 10.12
TIORH_0 (Channel 0) ...................................................................................... 182
Table 10.13
TIORL_0 (Channel 0)....................................................................................... 183
Table 10.14
TIOR_1 (Channel 1) ......................................................................................... 184
Table 10.15
TIOR_2 (Channel 2) ......................................................................................... 185
Table 10.16
TIORH_3 (Channel 3) ...................................................................................... 186
Table 10.17
TIORL_3 (Channel 3)....................................................................................... 187
Table 10.18
TIOR_4 (Channel 4) ......................................................................................... 188
Table 10.19
TIOR_5 (Channel 5) ......................................................................................... 189
Table 10.20
TIORH_0 (Channel 0) ...................................................................................... 190
Table 10.21
TIORL_0 (Channel 0)....................................................................................... 191
Table 10.22
TIOR_1 (Channel 1) ......................................................................................... 192
Table 10.23
TIOR_2 (Channel 2) ......................................................................................... 193
Table 10.24
TIORH_3 (Channel 3) ...................................................................................... 194
Table 10.25
TIORL_3 (Channel 3)....................................................................................... 195
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxxiii of xxxvi
Table 10.26
Table 10.27
Table 10.28
Table 10.29
Table 10.30
Table 10.31
Table 10.32
Table 10.33
Table 10.34
Table 10.35
Table 10.36
TIOR_4 (Channel 4) ......................................................................................... 196
TIOR_5 (Channel 5) ......................................................................................... 197
Register Combinations in Buffer Operation ..................................................... 213
Cascaded Combinations.................................................................................... 217
PWM Output Registers and Output Pins .......................................................... 220
Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins ........................................................... 225
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1.................................. 227
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2.................................. 228
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3.................................. 229
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4.................................. 230
TPU Interrupts .................................................................................................. 234
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 255
Table 11.1
Table 11.2
8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources............................................................................... 270
Table 11.3
Timer Output Priorities......................................................................................... 273
Table 11.4
Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation ............................................... 274
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Table 12.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 279
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
Table 13.1
WDT Interrupt Source .......................................................................................... 305
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 311
Table 14.2
The Relationships between The N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B ...................... 327
Table 14.3
BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) ........................... 328
Table 14.3
BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) ........................... 329
Table 14.3
BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3) ........................... 330
Table 14.4
Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) .......................... 330
Table 14.5
Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) ................ 331
Table 14.6
BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)..................... 332
Table 14.7
Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .... 332
Table 14.8
Examples of Bit Rate for Various BRR Settings
(Smart Card Interface Mode) (When n = 0 and S = 372)...................................... 333
Table 14.9
Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies
(Smart Card Interface Mode) (When S = 372)..................................................... 333
Table 14.10
Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)................................................ 335
Table 14.11
SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling .................................................. 342
Table 14.12
SCI Interrupt Sources........................................................................................ 373
Table 14.13
SCI Interrupt Sources........................................................................................ 374
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxxiv of xxxvi
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Table 15.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 385
Table 15.2
Interrupt Souses .................................................................................................... 408
Section 16 A/D Converter
Table 16.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 411
Table 16.2
Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers .............................. 412
Table 16.3
A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)................................................................... 418
Table 16.4
A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode) ..................................................................... 418
Table 16.5
A/D Converter Interrupt Source............................................................................ 419
Table 16.6
Analog Pin Specifications..................................................................................... 425
Section 18 ROM
Table 18.1
Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode .................................. 431
Table 18.2
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 435
Table 18.3
Setting On-Board Programming Modes ............................................................... 439
Table 18.4
Boot Mode Operation ........................................................................................... 441
Table 18.5
System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic
Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is Possible................................................................. 441
Table 18.6
Flash Memory Operating States............................................................................ 451
Table 18.7
Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Masked ROM Version ....... 452
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
Table19.1
Damping Resistance Value ................................................................................... 456
Table19.2
Crystal Resonator Characteristics ......................................................................... 457
Table19.3
External Clock Input Conditions........................................................................... 458
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
Table 20.1
Low Power Consumption Mode Transition Conditions ....................................... 464
Table 20.2
LSI Internal States in Each Mode ......................................................................... 465
Table 20.3
Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings................................................................. 472
Table 20.4
φ Pin State in Each Processing State..................................................................... 476
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
Table 22.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................. 507
Table 22.2
DC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 508
Table 22.3
Permissible Output Currents ................................................................................. 510
Table 22.4
Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 511
Table 22.5
Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 512
Table 22.6
Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules ............................................................... 514
Table 22.7
Timing of SSU ...................................................................................................... 516
Table 22.8
A/D Conversion Characteristics............................................................................ 523
Table 22.9
Flash Memory Characteristics .............................................................................. 524
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxxv of xxxvi
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page xxxvi of xxxvi
Section 1 Overview
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Overview
• High-speed H8S/2600 central processing unit with an internal 16-bit architecture
 Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs on an object level
 Sixteen 16-bit general registers
 69 basic instructions
• Various peripheral functions
 PC break controller
 Data transfer controller
 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU)
 8-bit timer (TMR)
 Programmable pulse generator (PPG)
 Watchdog timer
 Asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication interface (SCI)
 Synchronous serial communication unit (SSU)
 10-bit A/D converter
 Clock pulse generator
• On-chip memory
ROM
Model
ROM
RAM
Remarks
F-ZTAT Version
HD64F2604
128 kbytes
8 kbytes
Masked ROM Version
HD6432604
128 kbytes
8 kbytes
HD6432603
64 kbytes
8 kbytes
• General I/O ports
 I/O pins: 59
 Input-only pins: 17
• Supports various power-down states
• Compact package
Package
Code
Body Size
Pin Pitch
100-pin QFP
FP-100M/FP-100MV
14.0 × 14.0 mm
0.5 mm
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 1 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 1 Overview
Block Diagram
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
VCL
VCC
VCC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
1.2
Port A
Port B
Port C
RAM
PB7/TIOCB5
PB6/TIOCA5
PB5/TIOCB4
PB4/TIOCA4
PB3/TIOCD3
PB2/TIOCC3
PB1/TIOCB3
PB0/TIOCA3
PC7/SCS1
PC6/SSCK1
PC5/SSI1
PC4/SSO1
PC3/SCS0
PC2/SSCK0
PC1/SSI0
PC0/SSO0
Port 3
ROM
(Masked ROM,
flash memory)
PA3/SCK2
PA2/RxD2
PA1/TxD2
PA0
P37
P36
P35/SCK1/IRQ5
P34/RxD1
P33/TxD1
P32/SCK0/IRQ4
P31/RxD0
P30/TxD0
Port 9
PC break controller
(2 channels)
Port F
PF7/φ
PF6
PF5
PF4
PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF2
PF1/BUzz
PF0/IRQ2
DTC
Peripheral data bus
Interrupt controller
Bus controller
H8S/2600 CPU
Peripheral address bus
NMI
Internal data bus
P
L
L
Internal address bus
MD2
MD1
MD0
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLVCL
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
STBY
RES
FWE/NC*
Clock pulse
generator
Port D
P97/AN15
P96/AN14
P95/AN13
P94/AN12
P93/AN11
P92/AN10
P91/AN9
P90/AN8
WDT × 1 channel
TMR × 4 channels
SCI × 3 channels
SSU × 2 channels
Port 7
TPU
P77
P76
P75/TMO3
P74/TMO2
P73/TMO1
P72/TMO0
P71/TMCI23/TMRI23
P70/TMCIO1/TMRIO1
PPG
A/D converter
P47 / AN7
P46 / AN6
P45 / AN5
P44 / AN4
P43 / AN3
P42 / AN2
P41 / AN1
P40 / AN0
Vref
AVCC
AVSS
Port 4
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
P11/PO9/TIOCB0
P10/PO8/TIOCA0
Port 1
Note: * The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version. The NC pin is provided only in the masked ROM version.
Figure 1.1 Block Diagram
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 2 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 1 Overview
PF0/IRQ2
PF1
PF2
PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF4
PF5
PF6
PF7/φ
PLLCAP
FWE/NC*
PLLVSS
VSS
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
NMI
STBY
VCL
RES
VSS
MD2
MD1
MD0
P30/TxD0
P31/RxD0
Pin Assignment
P97/AN15
P96/AN14
P95/AN13
P94/AN12
P93/AN11
P92/AN10
P91/AN9
P90/AN8
AVSS
Vref
AVCC
P47/AN7
P46/AN6
P45/AN5
P44/AN4
P43/AN3
P42/AN2
P41/AN1
P40/AN0
P10/PO8/TIOCA0
P11/PO9/TIOCB0
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
75747372717069686766656463626160595857565554535251
76
50
77
49
78
48
79
47
80
46
81
45
82
44
83
43
84
42
85
41
H8S/2604
Group
86
40
PRQP0100KB-A
87
39
88
38
FP-100M/FP-100MV
89
37
(Top view)
90
36
91
35
92
34
93
33
94
32
95
31
96
30
97
29
98
28
99
27
100
26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425
P32/SCK0/IRQ4
P33/TxD1
P34/RxD1
P35/SCK1/IRQ5
P36
P37
PA3/SCK2
PA2/RxD2
PA1/TxD2
PA0
PB7/TIOCB5
PB6/TIOCA5
PB5/TIOCB4
PB4/TIOCA4
PB3/TIOCD3
PB2/TIOCC3
VSS
PB1/TIOCB3
VCC
PB0/TIOCA3
PC7/SCS1
PC6/SSCK1
PC5/SSI1
PC4/SSO1
PC3/SCS0
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
VCC
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
VSS
NC
NC
P70/TMCI01/TMRI01
P71/TMCI23/TMRI23
P72/TMO0
P73/TMO1
P74/TMO2
P75/TMO3
P76
P77
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
PC0/SSO0
PC1/SSI0
PC2/SSCK0
1.3
Note: * The FWE pin is provided only in the flash memory version. The NC pin is provided only in the masked ROM
version.
Figure 1.2 Pin Assignment
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 3 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 1 Overview
1.4
Pin Functions
Type
Symbol
Pin NO.
I/O
Function
Power
Supply
VCC
2
32
61
Input
Power supply pins. Connect all these pins to the
system power supply.
VSS
4
34
56
64
Input
Ground pins. Connect all these pins to the system
power supply (0 V).
VCL
58
Output
External capacitance pin for internal power-down
power supply. Connect this pin to VSS via a 0.1µF capacitor (placed close to the pins).
PLLVSS
65
Input
On-chip PLL oscillator ground pin.
PLLCAP
67
Output
External capacitance pin for an on-chip PLL
oscillator.
XTAL
62
Input
For connection to a crystal resonator. For
examples of crystal resonator connection and
external clock input, see section 19, Clock Pulse
Generator.
EXTAL
63
Input
For connection to a crystal resonator (An external
clock can be supplied from the EXTAL pin). For
examples of crystal resonator connection and
external clock input, see section 19, Clock Pulse
Generator.
φ
68
Output
Supplies the system clock to external devices.
Operating
mode
control
MD2
MD1
MD0
55
54
53
Input
Set the operating mode. Inputs at these pins
should not be changed during operation.
System
control
RES
57
Input
Reset input pin. When this pin is low, the chip is
reset.
STBY
59
Input
When this pin is low, a transition is made to
hardware standby mode.
FWE
66
Input
Pin for use by flash memory. This pin is only used
in the flash memory version.
Clock
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 4 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin NO.
I/O
Function
Interrupts
NMI
60
Input
Nonmaskable interrupt pin. If this pin is not used,
it should be fixed high.
IRQ5
IRQ4
IRQ3
IRQ2
IRQ1
IRQ0
47
50
72
75
1
99
Input
These pins request a maskable interrupt.
97
98
100
3
Input
These pins input an external clock.
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
95
96
97
98
Input/
Output
TGRA_0 to TGRD_0 input capture input/output
compare output/PWM output pins.
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
99
100
Input/
Output
TGRA_1 to TGRB_1 input capture input/output
compare output/PWM output pins.
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
1
3
Input/
Output
TGRA_2 to TGRB_2 input capture input/output
compare output/PWM output pins.
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
31
33
35
36
Input/
Output
TGRA_3 to TGRD_3 input capture input/output
compare output/PWM output pins.
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
37
38
Input/
Output
TGRA_4 to TGRB_4 input capture input/output
compare output/PWM output pins.
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
39
40
Input/
Output
TGRA_5 to TGRB_5 input capture input/output
compare output/PWM output pins.
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
3
1
100
99
98
97
96
95
Output
Pulse output pins.
16-bit timer- TCLKA
pulse unit
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
Programmable pulse
generator
(PPG)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 5 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin NO.
I/O
Function
8-bit timer
(TMR)
TMO3
TMO2
TMO1
TMO0
12
11
10
9
Output
Compare-match output pins.
TMCI23
TMCI01
8
7
Input
Input pins of external clocks input to the counter.
8-bit timer
(TMR)
TMRI23
TMRI01
8
7
Input
Counter reset input pins.
Serial
communication
Interface
(SCI)/
smart card
interface
TxD2
TxD1
TxD0
42
49
52
Output
Data output pins.
RxD2
RxD1
RxD0
43
48
51
Input
Data input pins.
SCK2
SCK1
SCK0
44
47
50
Input/
Output
Clock input/output pins.
SSO1
SSO0
27
23
Input/
Output
Data input/output pins.
SSI1
SSI0
28
24
Input/
Output
Data input/output pins.
SSCK1
SSCK0
29
25
Input/
Output
Clock input/output pins.
SCS1
SCS0
30
26
Input/
Output
Chip select input/output pins.
Synchronous serial
communication unit
(SSU)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 6 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin NO.
I/O
Function
A/D
converter
AN15
AN14
AN13
AN12
AN11
AN10
AN9
AN8
AN7
AN6
AN5
AN4
AN3
AN2
AN1
AN0
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
Input
Analog input pins.
ADTRG
72
Input
Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D
conversion.
AVCC
86
Input
Power supply pin for the A/D converter. When the
A/D converter is not used, connect this pin to the
system power supply (+5 V).
AVSS
84
Input
The ground pin for the A/D converter. Connect
this pin to the system power supply (0 V).
Vref
85
Input
The reference voltage input pin for the A/D
converter. When the A/D converter is not used,
connect this pin to the system power supply
(+5 V).
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
3
1
100
99
98
97
96
95
Input/
Output
Eight input/output pins.
I/O ports
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 7 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin NO.
I/O
Function
I/O ports
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Input/
Output
Eight input/output pins.
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
Input
Eight input pins.
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Input/
Output
Eight input/output pins.
P97
P96
P95
P94
P93
P92
P91
P90
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
Input
Eight input pins.
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
44
43
42
41
Input/
Output
Four input/output pins.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 8 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin NO.
I/O
Function
I/O ports
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
40
39
38
37
36
35
33
31
Input/
Output
Eight input/output pins.
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
Input/
Output
Eight input/output pins.
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
Input/
Output
Eight input/output pins.
PF7
PF6
PF5
PF4
PF3
PF2
PF1
PF0
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
Input/
Output
Eight input/output pins.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 9 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 1 Overview
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 10 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Section 2 CPU
The H8S/2600 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that
is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2600 CPU has sixteen 16-bit
general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control.
This section describes the H8S/2600 CPU. The usable modes and address spaces differ depending
on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes.
2.1
Features
• Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs
 Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs object programs
• General-register architecture
 Sixteen 16-bit general registers also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers
• Sixty-nine basic instructions
 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions
 Multiply and divide instructions
 Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
 Multiply-and-accumulate instruction
• Eight addressing modes
 Register direct [Rn]
 Register indirect [@ERn]
 Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)]
 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn]
 Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32]
 Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
 Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]
 Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
• 16-Mbyte address space
 Program: 16 Mbytes
 Data:
16 Mbytes
• High-speed operation
 All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states
 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 1 state
 8 × 8-bit register-register multiply:
3 states
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 11 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide:
 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply:
 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide:
• Two CPU operating modes
 Normal mode*
12 states
4 states
20 states
 Advanced mode
• Power-down state
 Transition to power-down state by the SLEEP instruction
 CPU clock speed selection
Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
2.1.1
Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU
The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are shown below.
• Register configuration
The MAC register is supported by the H8S/2600 CPU only.
• Basic instructions
The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported by the H8S/2600
CPU only.
• The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions;
Execution States
Instruction
Mnemonic
H8S/2600
H8S/2000
MULXU
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
3
12
MULXU.W Rs, ERd
4
20
MULXS.B Rs, Rd
4
13
MULXS.W Rs, ERd
5
21
MULXS
In addition, there are differences in address space, CCR and EXR register functions, and powerdown modes, etc., depending on the model.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 12 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.1.2
Differences from H8/300 CPU
In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements:
• More general registers and control registers
 Eight 16-bit extended registers, and one 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers, have been
added.
• Expanded address space
 Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU.
 Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space.
• Enhanced addressing
 The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address
space.
• Enhanced instructions
 Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.
 Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added.
 A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added.
 Two-bit shift instructions have been added.
 Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.
 A test and set instruction has been added.
• Higher speed
 Basic instructions execute twice as fast.
2.1.3
Differences from H8/300H CPU
In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements:
• More control registers
 One 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers have been added.
• Enhanced instructions
 Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.
 A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added.
 Two-bit shift instructions have been added.
 Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.
 A test and set instruction has been added.
• Higher speed
 Basic instructions execute twice as fast.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 13 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.2
CPU Operating Modes
The H8S/2600 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a
maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address
space. The mode is selected by the mode pins.
2.2.1
Normal Mode
The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU.
• Address Space
Linear access to a 64-kbyte maximum address space is provided.
• Extended Registers (En)
The extended registers (E7 to E0) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit
segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even
when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the general
register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@–Rn) or
post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding
extended register (En) will be affected.
• Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective
addresses (EA) are valid.
• Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In normal mode the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One
branch address is stored per 16 bits. The exception vector table structure in normal mode is
shown in figure 2.1. For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception
Handling.
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions
uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand
that contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand,
providing a 16-bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'0000 to
H'00FF. Note that the first part of this range is also used for the exception vector table.
• Stack Structure
When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC,
condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto the stack
in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.2. EXR is not pushed onto the stack
in interrupt control mode 0. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling.
Note: Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 14 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
H'0004
H'0005
H'0006
H'0007
H'0008
H'0009
H'000A
H'000B
Exception vector 1
Exception vector 2
Exception vector 3
Exception
vector table
Exception vector 4
Exception vector 5
Exception vector 6
Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)
SP
PC
(16 bits)
EXR*1
SP
Reserved*1*3
2
(SP *
)
CCR
CCR*3
PC
(16 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch
(b) Exception Handling
Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack.
2. SP when EXR is not used.
3. lgnored when returning.
Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode
2.2.2
Advanced Mode
• Address Space
Linear access to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space is provided.
• Extended Registers (En)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 15 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
The extended registers (E7 to E0) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit
segments of 32-bit registers or address registers.
• Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used.
• Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In advanced mode, the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector
table in units of 32 bits. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is
stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2.3). For details of the exception vector table, see section 4,
Exception Handling.
H'00000000
Reserved
Exception vector 1
H'00000003
H'00000004
Reserved
Exception vector 2
H'00000007
H'00000008
Reserved
Exception vector table
Exception vector 3
H'0000000B
H'0000000C
Reserved
Exception vector 4
H'00000010
Reserved
Exception vector 5
Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions
uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand
that contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand,
providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits is a reserved area that is
regarded as H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF.
Note that the first part of this range is also used for the exception vector table.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 16 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
• Stack Structure
In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine
call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are
pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.4. When
EXR is not pushed onto the stack in interrupt control mode 0. For details, see section 4,
Exception Handling.
EXR*1
SP
SP
Reserved
PC
(24 bits)
(SP
*2
Reserved*1*3
)
(a) Subroutine Branch
CCR
PC
(24 bits)
(b) Exception Handling
Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack.
2. SP when EXR is not used.
3. Ignored when returning.
Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 17 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.3
Address Space
Figure 2.5 shows a memory map for the H8S/2600 CPU. The H8S/2600 CPU provides linear
access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte
(architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode. The usable modes and address spaces
differ depending on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating
Modes.
H'0000
H'00000000
64 kbytes
H'FFFF
16 Mbytes
H'00FFFFFF
Data area
Cannot be
used for
this LSI
H'FFFFFFFF
(a) Normal Mode
(b) Advanced Mode
Figure 2.5 Memory Map
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 18 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Program area
Section 2 CPU
2.4
Registers
The H8S/2600 CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.6. There are two types of registers;
general registers and control registers. The control registers are a 24-bit program counter (PC), an
8-bit extended control register (EXR), an 8-bit condition code register (CCR), and a 64-bit
multiply-accumulate register (MAC).
General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En)
15
0 7
0 7
0
ER0
E0
R0H
R0L
ER1
E1
R1H
R1L
ER2
E2
R2H
R2L
ER3
E3
R3H
R3L
ER4
E4
R4H
R4L
ER5
E5
R5H
R5L
ER6
E6
R6H
R6L
ER7 (SP)
E7
R7H
R7L
Control Registers (CR)
0
23
PC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - I2 I1 I0
EXR T
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CCR I UI H U N Z V C
63
41
MAC
32
MACH
(Sign extension)
MACL
31
0
[Legend]
SP:
PC:
EXR:
T:
I2 to I0:
CCR:
I:
UI:
Stack pointer
Program counter
Extended control register
Trace bit
Interrupt mask bits
Condition-code register
Interrupt mask bit
User bit or interrupt mask bit
H:
U:
N:
Z:
V:
C:
MAC:
Half-carry flag
User bit
Negative flag
Zero flag
Overflow flag
Carry flag
Multiply-accumulate register
Figure 2.6 CPU Registers
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 19 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.4.1
General Registers
The H8S/2600 CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally
identical and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is
used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. Figure 2.7 illustrates
the usage of the general registers. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address
registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER7 to ER0).
The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E7 to E0) and R
(R7 to R0). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit
registers. The E registers (E7 to E0) are also referred to as extended registers.
The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R7H to R0H) and
RL (R7L to R0L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8bit registers.
The usage of each register can be selected independently.
General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.8 shows the
stack.
• Address registers
• 32-bit registers
• 16-bit registers
• 8-bit registers
E registers (extended registers)
(E7 to E0)
ER registers
(ER7 to ER0)
RH registers
(R7H to R0H)
R registers
(R7 to R0)
RL registers
(R7L to R0L)
Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 20 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Free area
SP (ER7)
Stack area
Figure 2.8 Stack
2.4.2
Program Counter (PC)
This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length
of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored (When an
instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0).
2.4.3
Extended Control Register (EXR)
EXR is an 8-bit register that manipulates the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
When these instructions, except for the STC instruction, are executed, all interrupts including NMI
will be masked for three states after execution is completed.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
T
0
R/W
Description
Trace Bit
When this bit is set to 1, a trace exception is
generated each time an instruction is executed.
When this bit is cleared to 0, instructions are
executed in sequence.
6 to 3

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
2
1
0
I2
I1
I0
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
These bits designate the interrupt mask level (7
to 0). For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt
Controller.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 21 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.4.4
Condition-Code Register (CCR)
This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and
half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags.
Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch
(Bcc) instructions.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
I
1
R/W
Interrupt Mask Bit
Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1.
NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting.
The I bit is set to 1 at the start of an exceptionhandling sequence. For details, refer to section 5,
Interrupt Controller.
6
UI
undefined
R/W
User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit
Can be read or written by software using the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
This bit cannot be used as an interrupt mask bit
in this LSI.
5
H
undefined
R/W
Half-Carry Flag
When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B,
CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this
flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3,
and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W,
SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is
executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry
or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L
instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if
there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to
0 otherwise.
4
U
undefined
R/W
User Bit
Can be read or written by software using the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
3
N
undefined
R/W
Negative Flag
Stores the value of the most significant bit of data
as a sign bit.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 22 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
2
Z
undefined
R/W
Zero Flag
Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to
indicate non-zero data.
1
V
undefined
R/W
Overflow Flag
Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and
cleared to 0 at other times.
0
C
undefined
R/W
Carry Flag
Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0
otherwise. Used by:
•
Add instructions, to indicate a carry
•
Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
•
Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a
carry
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator
by bit manipulation instructions.
2.4.5
Multiply-Accumulate Register (MAC)
This 64-bit register stores the results of multiply-and-accumulate operations. It consists of two 32bit registers denoted MACH and MACL. The lower 10 bits of MACH are valid; the upper bits are
a sign extension.
2.4.6
Initial Values of CPU Registers
Reset exception handling loads the CPU’s program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the
trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits
and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized.
The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately
after a reset.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 23 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.5
Data Formats
The H8S/2600 CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit
(longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2,
…, 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two
digits of 4-bit BCD data.
2.5.1
General Register Data Formats
Figure 2.9 shows the data formats in general registers.
Data Type
Register Number
Data Format
7
RnH
1-bit data
0
Don't care
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7
1-bit data
RnL
4-bit BCD data
RnH
4-bit BCD data
RnL
Byte data
RnH
Don't care
7
4 3
Upper
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
Lower
Don't care
7
Don't care
7
4 3
Upper
0
Don't care
MSB
LSB
7
Byte data
RnL
Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1)
REJ09B0426-0100
0
Don't care
MSB
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 24 of 534
0
Lower
LSB
Section 2 CPU
Data Type
Register Number
Word data
Rn
Data Format
15
0
MSB
Word data
15
0
MSB
Longword data
LSB
En
LSB
ERn
31
16 15
MSB
En
0
Rn
LSB
[Legend]
ERn:
En:
Rn:
RnH:
RnL:
MSB:
LSB:
General register ER
General register E
General register R
General register RH
General register RL
Most significant bit
Least significant bit
Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 25 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.5.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in memory. The H8S/2600 CPU can access word data and
longword data in memory, however word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an
attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, an address error does not
occur, however the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so access begins the
preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches.
When ER7 is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word or
longword.
Data Type
Address
Data Format
7
1-bit data
Address L
7
Byte data
Address L
MSB
Word data
Address 2M
MSB
0
6
5
4
3
2
Address 2N
0
LSB
LSB
Address 2M+1
Longword data
1
MSB
Address 2N+1
Address 2N+2
Address 2N+3
Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 26 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
LSB
Section 2 CPU
2.6
Instruction Set
The H8S/2600 CPU has 69 instructions. The instructions are classified by function in table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Instruction Classification
Function
Instructions
Size
Types
Data transfer
MOV
POP*1, PUSH*1
B/W/L
5
W/L
Arithmetic
operations
LDM, STM
MOVFPE*3, MOVTPE*3
L
ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG
B/W/L
ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS
B
INC, DEC
B/W/L
ADDS, SUBS
L
B
23
MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS
B/W
EXTU, EXTS
W/L
TAS*4
B
MAC, LDMAC, STMAC, CLRMAC

Logic operations
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
B/W/L
4
Shift
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL,
ROTXR
B/W/L
8
Bit manipulation
BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST,
BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR
B
14
Branch
Bcc*2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS

5
System control
TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC,
NOP

9
Block data transfer
EEPMOV

1
Total: 69
Notes: B:
W:
L:
1.
Byte
Word
Longword
POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+,Rn and MOV.W Rn,@-SP.
POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+,ERn and
MOV.L ERn,@-SP.
2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.
3. Cannot be used in this LSI.
4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 27 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.6.1
Table of Instructions Classified by Function
Tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in
tables 2.3 to 2.10 is defined below.
Table 2.2
Operation Notation
Symbol
Description
Rd
Rs
General register (destination)*
General register (source)*
Rn
General register*
ERn
General register (32-bit register)
MAC
Multiply-accumulate register (32-bit register)
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
EXR
Extended control register
CCR
Condition-code register
N
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#IMM
Immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
Logical AND
∨
Logical OR
⊕
Logical XOR
→
Move
∼
NOT (logical complement)
:8/:16/:24/:32
Note:
*
8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length
General registers include 8-bit registers (R7H to R0H, R7L to R0L), 16-bit registers (R7
to R0, E7 to E0), and 32-bit registers (ER7 to ER0).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 28 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.3
Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
MOV
B/W/L
(EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a general register
and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register.
MOVFPE
B
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MOVTPE
B
Cannot be used in this LSI.
POP
W/L
@SP+ → Rn
Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W
@SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn.
PUSH
W/L
Rn → @–SP
Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to
MOV.W Rn, @–SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @–SP.
LDM
L
@SP+ → Rn (register list)
Pops two or more general registers from the stack.
STM
L
Rn (register list) → @–SP
Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 29 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.4
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1)
Instruction
Size*
Function
ADD
SUB
B/W/L
Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on
immediate data and data in a general register (immediate byte data
cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX
or ADD instruction).
ADDX
SUBX
B
Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general
registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register.
INC
DEC
B/W/L
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2 (Byte operands
can be incremented or decremented by 1 only).
ADDS
SUBS
L
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register.
DAA
DAS
B
Rd decimal adjust → Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by
referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data.
MULXU
B/W
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either
8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
MULXS
B/W
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8
bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
DIVXU
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16
bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits →
16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 30 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.4
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2)
Instruction
Size*1
Function
DIVXS
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷
8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit
quotient and 16-bit remainder.
CMP
B/W/L
Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another general register
or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result.
NEG
B/W/L
0 – Rd → Rd
Takes the two’s complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a
general register.
EXTU
W/L
Rd (zero extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16
bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the
left.
EXTS
W/L
Rd (sign extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16
bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit.
TAS*2
B
@ERd – 0, 1 → (<bit 7> of @ERd)
Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7) to 1.
MAC

(EAs) × (EAd) + MAC → MAC
Performs signed multiplication on memory contents and adds the result
to the multiply-accumulate register. The following operations can be
performed:
16 bits × 16 bits + 32 bits → 32 bits, saturating
16 bits × 16 bits + 42 bits → 42 bits, non-saturating
CLRMAC

0 → MAC
Clears the multiply-accumulate register to zero.
LDMAC
STMAC
L
Rs → MAC, MAC → Rd
Transfers data between a general register and a multiply-accumulate
register.
Notes: 1. Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 31 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.5
Logic Operations Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
AND
B/W/L
Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
OR
B/W/L
Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
XOR
B/W/L
Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data.
NOT
B/W/L
∼(Rd) → (Rd)
Takes the one’s complement (logical complement) of general register
contents.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Table 2.6
Shift Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
SHAL
SHAR
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents.
1-bit or 2-bit shifts are possible.
SHLL
SHLR
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs a logical shift on general register contents.
1-bit or 2-bit shifts are possible.
ROTL
ROTR
B/W/L
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents.
1-bit or 2-bit rotations are possible.
ROTXL
ROTXR
B/W/L
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents through the carry flag.
1-bit or 2-bit rotations are possible.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 32 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.7
Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)
Instruction
Size*
Function
BSET
B
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
BCLR
B
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The
bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
BNOT
B
∼(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
BTST
B
∼(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or
clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register.
BAND
B
BIAND
B
BOR
B
BIOR
B
C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
C ∧ [∼(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
C ∨ [∼(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register
or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 33 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.7
Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)
Instruction
Size*
Function
BXOR
B
C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
XORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIXOR
B
C ⊕ [∼(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
XORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BLD
B
BILD
B
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the
carry flag.
∼(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BST
B
BIST
B
C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand.
∼C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 34 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.8
Branch Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
Bcc

Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The
branching conditions are listed below.
Mnemonic
Description
Condition
BRA (BT)
Always (true)
Always
BRN (BF)
Never (false)
Never
BHI
High
C∨Z=0
BLS
Low or same
C∨Z=1
BCC (BHS)
Carry clear
(high or same)
C=0
BCS (BLO)
Carry set (low)
C=1
BNE
Not equal
Z=0
BEQ
Equal
Z=1
BVC
Overflow clear
V=0
BVS
Overflow set
V=1
BPL
Plus
N=0
BMI
Minus
N=1
BGE
Greater or equal
N⊕V=0
BLT
Less than
N⊕V=1
BGT
Greater than
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0
BLE
Less or equal
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 1
JMP

Branches unconditionally to a specified address.
BSR

Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
JSR

Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
RTS

Returns from a subroutine
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 35 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.9
System Control Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
TRAPA

Starts trap-instruction exception handling.
RTE

Returns from an exception-handling routine.
SLEEP

Causes a transition to a power-down state.
LDC
B/W
(EAs) → CCR, (EAs) → EXR
Moves general register or memory contents or immediate data to CCR or
EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are
performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.
STC
B/W
CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd)
Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or memory.
Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are
performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.
ANDC
B
CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR
Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data.
ORC
B
CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR
Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data.
XORC
B
CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR
Logically XORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data.
NOP

PC + 2 → PC
Only increments the program counter.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 36 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
EEPMOV.B

if R4L ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+
R4L–1 → R4L
Until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W

if R4 ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+
R4–1 → R4
Until R4 = 0
else next;
Transfers a data block. Starting from the address set in ER5, transfers
data for the number of bytes set in R4L or R4 to the address location set
in ER6.
Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is
completed.
2.6.2
Basic Instruction Formats
The H8S/2600 CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an
operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a
condition field (cc).
Figure 2.11 shows examples of instruction formats.
• Operation Field
Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried
out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction.
Some instructions have two operation fields.
• Register Field
Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, and data registers by 3
bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field.
• Effective Address Extension
8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement.
• Condition Field
Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 37 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
(1) Operation field only
op
NOP, RTS, etc.
(2) Operation field and register fields
op
rm
rn
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
op
rn
rm
MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc.
EA(disp)
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op
cc
EA(disp)
BRA d:16, etc.
Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples)
2.7
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
The H8S/2600 CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses
a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct
and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except programcounter relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register
indirect, or the absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR,
BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in
the operand.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 38 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.11 Addressing Modes
No.
Addressing Mode
Symbol
1
Register direct
Rn
2
Register indirect
@ERn
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn)
4
Register indirect with post-increment
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@ERn+
@–ERn
5
Absolute address
@aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32
6
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
7
Program-counter relative
@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
8
Memory indirect
@@aa:8
2.7.1
Register DirectRn
The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the
operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7
can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers.
2.7.2
Register Indirect@ERn
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the
address of the operand on memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24
bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
2.7.3
Register Indirect with Displacement@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)
A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn)
specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory
operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 39 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.7.4
Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement@ERn+ or @-ERn
Register indirect with post-increment@ERn+: The register field of the instruction code
specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. After the
operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the
address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for
longword transfer instruction. For the word or longword transfer instructions, the register value
should be even.
Register indirect with pre-decrement@-ERn: The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an
address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result is the
address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value
subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer
instruction. For the word or longword transfer instructions, the register value should be even.
2.7.5
Absolute Address@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32
The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address
may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long
(@aa:32). Table 2.12 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges.
To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits
(@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF).
For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can
access the entire address space.
A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8
bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges
Normal Mode*
Absolute Address
Data address
8 bits (@aa:8)
H'FF00 to H'FFFF
H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF
16 bits (@aa:16)
H'0000 to H'FFFF
H'000000 to H'007FFF,
H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF
32 bits (@aa:32)
Program instruction
address
Note: *
24 bits (@aa:24)
Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 40 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Advanced Mode
H'000000 to H'FFFFFF
Section 2 CPU
2.7.6
Immediate#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32
The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an
operand.
The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit
number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a
vector address.
2.7.7
Program-Counter Relative@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in
the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address.
Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0
(H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next
instruction, so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to
+32768 bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should
be an even number.
2.7.8
Memory Indirect@@aa:8
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit
absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address.
The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255
(H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode,
the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode,
the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details,
refer to section 4, Exception Handling.
If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the
least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or instruction code to be fetched
at the address preceding the specified address (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory
Data Formats).
Note: Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 41 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Specified
by @aa:8
Branch address
Specified
by @aa:8
Reserved
Branch address
(a) Normal Mode*
(a) Advanced Mode
Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
2.7.9
Effective Address Calculation
Table 2.13 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal
mode the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address.
Note: Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 42 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation (1)
No
1
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
op
2
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Register direct(Rn)
rm
Operand is general register contents.
rn
Register indirect(@ERn)
0
31
op
3
31
24 23
0
Don't care
General register contents
r
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)
0
31
General register contents
op
r
31
disp
Sign extension
Register indirect with post-increment or
pre-decrement
•Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
op
disp
31
0
31
24 23
0
Don't care
General register contents
r
•Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn
0
0
31
4
24 23
Don't care
1, 2, or 4
31
0
General register contents
31
24 23
0
Don't care
op
r
1, 2, or 4
Operand Size
Byte
Word
Longword
Offset
1
2
4
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 43 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation (2)
No
5
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Absolute address
@aa:8
31
op
@aa:16
31
op
0
H'FFFF
24 23
16 15
0
Don't care Sign extension
abs
@aa:24
31
op
8 7
24 23
Don't care
abs
24 23
0
Don't care
abs
@aa:32
op
31
6
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
op
7
0
24 23
Don't care
abs
Operand is immediate data.
IMM
0
23
Program-counter relative
PC contents
@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
op
disp
23
0
Sign
extension
disp
31
24 23
0
Don't care
8
Memory indirect @@aa:8
• Normal mode*
8 7
31
op
abs
0
abs
H'000000
15
0
31
24 23
Don't care
Memory contents
16 15
0
H'00
• Advanced mode
31
op
abs
8 7
H'000000
31
0
Memory contents
Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 44 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
0
abs
31
24 23
Don't care
0
Section 2 CPU
2.8
Processing States
The H8S/2600 CPU has five main processing states: the reset state, exception handling state,
program execution state, bus-released state, and power-down state. Figure 2.13 indicates the state
transitions.
• Reset State
In this state, the CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are initialized and not operating.
When the RES input goes low, all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state.
All interrupts are masked in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES
signal changes from low to high. For details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling.
The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow.
• Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal
processing flow due to an exception source, such as a reset, trace, interrupt, or trap instruction.
The CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that
address. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling.
• Program Execution State
In this state, the CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
• Bus-Released State
The bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master other than the CPU.
While the bus is released, the CPU halts operations.
• Program stop state
This is a power-down state in which the CPU stops operating. The program stop state occurs
when a SLEEP instruction is executed or the CPU enters hardware standby mode. For further
details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 45 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 2 CPU
Reset state*
igh
=H
,
i gh
= H ow
BY = L
ST ES
R
ES
R
Exception handling state
Request for
exception
handling
In
reqterru
ue p t
st
End of
exception
handling
Bus-released state
s
Bu est
u
req
Bus
request
End of
bus request
us
fb
d o st
En eque
r
Program execution state
SLEEP instruction
Program halt state
Notes: From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low.
* From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state
occurs whenever RES goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state
when the watchdog timer overflows.
Figure 2.13 State Transitions
2.9
Usage Note
2.9.1
Notes on Using the Bit Operation Instruction
Instructions BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST read data in byte units, and write data in byte
units after bit operation. Therefore, attention must be paid when these instructions are used for
ports or registers including write-only bits.
Instruction BCLR can be used to clear the flag in the internal I/O register to 0. If it is obvious that
the flag has been set to 1 by the interrupt processing routine, it is unnecessary to read the flag
beforehand.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 46 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.1
Operating Mode Selection
This LSI supports only operating mode 7, that is, the advanced single-chip mode. The operating
mode is determined by the setting of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0). Only mode 7 can be used in
this LSI. Therefore, all mode pins must be fixed high, as shown in table 3.1. Do not change the
mode pin settings during operation.
Table 3.1
MCU Operating Mode Selection
MCU
Operating
Mode
MD2 MD1 MD0
CPU
Operating
Mode
Description
7
Advanced
mode
3.2
1
1
1
Single-chip mode
External Data Bus
On-Chip
ROM
Initial
Width
Max.
Width
Enabled


Register Descriptions
The following registers are related to the operating mode.
• Mode control register (MDCR)
• System control register (SYSCR)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 47 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.2.1
Mode Control Register (MDCR)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Descriptions
7

1
R/W
Reserved
Only 1 should be written to this bit.
6 to 3 
All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
2
1
0
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0



R
R
R
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 48 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Mode Select 2 to 0
These bits indicate the input levels at pins MD2 to MD0
(the current operating mode). Bits MDS2 to MDS0
correspond to MD2 to MD0. MDS2 to MDS0 are readonly bits and they cannot be written to. The mode pin
(MD2 to MD0) input levels are latched into these bits
when MDCR is read. These latches are canceled by a
reset.
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.2.2
System Control Register (SYSCR)
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects saturating or non-saturating calculation
for the MAC instruction, selects the interrupt control mode and the detected edge for NMI, and
enables or disables on-chip RAM.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Descriptions
7
MACS
0
R/W
MAC Saturation
Selects either saturating or non-saturating calculation
for the MAC instruction.
0: Non-saturating calculation for the MAC instruction
1: Saturating calculation for the MAC instruction
6

0

Reserved
This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
5
4
INTM1
INTM0
0
0
R/W
R/W
These bits select the control mode of the interrupt
controller. For details of the interrupt control modes,
see section 5.6, Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt
Operation.
00: Interrupt control mode 0
01: Setting prohibited
10: Interrupt control mode 2
11: Setting prohibited
3
NMIEG
0
R/W
NMI Edge Select
Selects the valid edge of the NMI interrupt input.
0: An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI
input
1: An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI
input
2, 1

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
0
RAME
1
R/W
RAM Enable
Enables or disables on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is
initialized when the reset status is released.
0: On-chip RAM is disabled
1: On-chip RAM is enabled
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 49 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.3
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled,
however external addresses cannot be accessed.
All I/O ports are available for use as input-output ports.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 50 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.4
Address Map
Figure 3.1 shows the address map in each operating mode.
H8S/2604
H8S/2603
ROM: 128 kbytes, RAM: 8 kbytes
Mode 7
Advanced single-chip mode
H'000000
ROM: 64 kbytes, RAM: 8 kbytes
Mode 7
Advanced single-chip mode
H'000000
On-chip ROM
(Mask ROM version)
On-chip ROM
(F-ZTAT/Mask ROM version)
H'00FFFF
H'01FFFF
H'FFD000
H'FF0000
On-chip RAM
H'FFEFBF
On-chip RAM
H'FFEFBF
H'FFF800
H'FFF800
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFF3F
H'FFFF60
H'FFFF60
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFBF
H'FFFFC0
Internal I/O registers
H'FFFFBF
H'FFFFC0
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFF
Figure 3.1 Address Map
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 51 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 52 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1
Exception Handling Types and Priority
As shown in table 4.1, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trace, interrupt, or trap
instruction. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions
occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Exception sources, the
stack structure, and operation of the CPU vary depending on the interrupt control mode. For
details on the interrupt control mode, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Table 4.1
Exception Types and Priority
Priority
Exception Type
Start of Exception Handling
High
Reset
Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES
pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. The CPU enters
the reset state when the RES pin is low.
Trace*1
Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
handling ends, if the trace (T) bit in EXR is set to 1.
Direct transition
Starts when a direction transition occurs as the result of
SLEEP instruction execution.
Interrupt
Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued.*2
Trap instruction *3
Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA).
Low
Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception handling is not
executed after execution of an RTE instruction.
2. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC
instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling.
3. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in program
execution state.
4.2
Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table
Different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4.2 lists the exception
sources and their vector addresses. Since the usable modes differ depending on the product, for
details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 53 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Table 4.2
Exception Handling Vector Table
Vector Address*1
Exception Source
Vector Number
Normal Mode
Advanced Mode
Power-on reset
Manual reset *2
0
H'0000 to H'0001
H'0000 to H'0003
1
H'0002 to H'0003
H'0004 to H'0007
Reserved for system use
2
H'0004 to H'0005
H'0008 to H'000B
3
H'0006 to H'0007
H'000C to H'000F
4
H'0008 to H'0019
H'0010 to H'0013
5
H'000A to H'000B
H'0014 to H'0017
Interrupt (direct transitions)*2 6
H'000C to H'000D
H'0018 to H'001B
Trace
Interrupt (NMI)
7
H'000E to H'000F
H'001C to H'001F
Trap instruction (#0)
8
H'0010 to H'0011
H'0020 to H'0023
(#1)
9
H'0012 to H'0013
H'0024 to H'0027
(#2)
10
H'0014 to H'0015
H'0028 to H'002B
(#3)
11
H'0016 to H'0017
H'002C to H'002F
12
H'0018 to H'0019
H''0030 to H'0033
13
H'001A to H'001B
H'0034 to H'0037
14
H'001C to H'001D
H'0038 to H'003B
Reserved for system use
15
H'001E to H'001F
H'003C to H'003F
IRQ0
16
H'0020 to H'0021
H'0040 to H'0043
IRQ1
17
H'0022 to H'0023
H'0044 to H'0047
IRQ2
18
H'0024 to H'0025
H'0048 to H'004B
IRQ3
19
H'0026 to H'0027
H'004C to H'004F
IRQ4
20
H'0028 to H'0029
H'0050 to H'0053
IRQ5
21
H'002A to H'002B
H'0054 to H'0057
Reserved for system use
22
H'002C to H'002D
H'0058 to H'005B
23
H'002E to H'002F
H'005C to H'005F
Internal interrupt*3
24

127
H'0030 to H'0031

H'00FE to H'00FF
H'0060 to H'0063

H'01FC to H'01FF
External interrupt
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Not available in this LSI.
3. For details of internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.5, Interrupt Exception Handling
Vector Table.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 54 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.3
Reset
A reset has the highest exception priority.
When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset state. To ensure that
this LSI is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. To reset the chip during
operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states. A reset initializes the internal state of the
CPU and the registers of on-chip peripheral modules.
The chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details, see section 13,
Watchdog Timer.
The interrupt control mode is 0 immediately after reset.
4.3.1
Reset Exception Handling
When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary period, this LSI starts reset
exception handling as follows:
1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are
initialized, the T bit in EXR is cleared to 0, and the I bit in EXR and CCR is set to 1.
2. The reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program
execution starts from the address indicated by the PC.
Figures 4.1 and 4.2 show examples of the reset sequence.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 55 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Vector fetch
Fetch of first
Internal
processing program instruction
(1)
(3)
φ
RES
Internal
address bus
(5)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
High
Internal data
bus
(2)
(4)
(1)(3) Reset exception handling vector address (when reset, (1)=H'000000, (3)=H'000002)
(2)(4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)
(5) Start address ((5)=(2)(4))
(6) First program instruction
Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence
(Advanced Mode with On-Chip ROM Enabled)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 56 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
(6)
Section 4 Exception Handling
Internal
processing
Vector fetch
*
*
Fetch of first
program instruction
*
φ
RES
Address bus
(1)
(3)
(5)
RD
HWR, LWR
D15 to D0
High
(2)
(4)
(6)
(1)(3) Reset exception handling vector address (when reset, (1)=H'000000, (3)=H'000002)
(2)(4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)
(5) Start address ((5)=(2)(4))
(6) First program instruction
Note: * Three program wait states are inserted.
Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence
(Advanced Mode with On-chip ROM Disabled: Not Available in this LSI)
4.3.2
Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted immediately after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized,
the PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all
interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset exception handling is
executed. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset,
make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx: 32, SP).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 57 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.3.3
State of On-Chip Peripheral Modules after Reset Release
After reset release, MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC are initialized to H'3F, H'FF, and H'FF, respectively,
and all modules except the DTC enter module stop mode. Consequently, on-chip peripheral
module registers cannot be read or written to. Register reading and writing is enabled when the
module stop mode is cancelled.
4.4
Traces
Traces are enabled in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is not activated in interrupt control
mode 0, irrespective of the state of the T bit. For details of interrupt control modes, see section 5,
Interrupt Controller.
If the T bit in EXR is set to 1, trace mode is activated. In trace mode, a trace exception occurs on
completion of each instruction. Trace mode is not affected by interrupt mask bit in CCR. Table 4.3
shows the states of CCR and EXR after execution of trace exception handling. Trace mode is
cancelled by clearing the T bit in EXR to 0 with the trace exception handling. The T bit saved on
the stack retains its value of 1, and when control is returned from the trace exception handling
routine by the RTE instruction, trace mode resumes. Trace exception handling is not carried out
after execution of the RTE instruction.
Interrupts are accepted even within the trace exception handling routine.
Table 4.3
Statuses of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling
Interrupt Control Mode
CCR
I
0
2
[Legend]
1: Set to 1
0: Cleared to 0
—: Retains value prior to execution
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 58 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
EXR
UI
I2 to I0
T
Trace exception handling cannot be used.
1
—
—
0
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.5
Interrupts
Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two interrupt
control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to eight priority/mask levels to enable
multiplexed interrupt control. The source to start interrupt exception handling and the vector
address differ depending on the product. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Interrupt exception handling is conducted as follows:
1. The values in the program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended control
register (EXR) are saved to the stack.
2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared to 0.
3. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded
from the vector table to the PC, and program execution begins from that address.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 59 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.6
Trap Instruction
Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction
exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state.
Trap instruction exception handling is conducted as follows:
1. The values in the program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended control
register (EXR) are saved to the stack.
2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared to 0.
3. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded
from the vector table to the PC, and program execution starts from that address.
The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector
number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code.
Table 4.4 shows the statuses of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception
handling.
Table 4.4
Statuses of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling
Interrupt Control Mode
CCR
EXR
I
UI
I2 to I0
T
0
1
—
—
—
2
1
—
—
0
[Legend]
1: Set to 1
0: Cleared to 0
—: Retains value prior to execution
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 60 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.7
Stack Status after Exception Handling
Figures 4.3 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt
exception handling.
(a) Normal Modes*2
SP
EXR
Reserved*1
SP
CCR
CCR
CCR*1
CCR*1
PC (16 bits)
PC (16 bits)
Interrupt control mode 0
Interrupt control mode 2
(b) Advanced Modes
SP
EXR
Reserved*1
SP
CCR
PC (24 bits)
Interrupt control mode 0
CCR
PC (24 bits)
Interrupt control mode 2
Notes: 1. Ignored on return.
2. Normal modes are not available in this LSI.
Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 61 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.8
Usage Note
When accessing word data or longword data, this LSI assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The
stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and
the value of the stack pointer (SP: ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following
instructions to save registers:
PUSH.W
Rn
(or MOV.W Rn, @-SP)
PUSH.L
ERn
(or MOV.L ERn, @-SP)
Use the following instructions to restore registers:
POP.W
Rn
(or MOV.W @SP+, Rn)
POP.L
ERn
(or MOV.L @SP+, ERn)
Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.4 shows an example of what
happens when the SP value is odd.
Address
CCR
SP
R1L
SP
H'FFFEFA
H'FFFEFB
PC
PC
H'FFFEFC
H'FFFEFD
H'FFFEFE
SP
H'FFFEFF
SP set to H'FFFEFF
TRAP instruction executed
MOV.B R1L, @-ER7 instruction executed
Data saved above SP
Contents of CCR lost
[Legend]
CCR: Condition code register
PC: Program counter
R1L: General register R1L
SP: Stack pointer
Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, in advanced mode.
Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value Is Odd
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 62 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1
Features
• Two interrupt control modes
 Any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in
the system control register (SYSCR).
• Priorities settable with IPR
 An interrupt priority register (IPR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Eight priority
levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI. NMI is assigned the
highest priority level of 8, and can be accepted at all times.
• Independent vector addresses
 All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for
the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine.
• Seven external interrupts
 NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising edge or falling
edge can be selected for NMI. Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level
sensing, can be selected for IRQ5 to IRQ0.
• DTC control
 The DTC can be activated by an interrupt request.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 63 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 5.1.
CPU
INTM1, INTM0
SYSCR
NMIEG
NMI input
NMI input unit
IRQ input
IRQ input unit
ISR
ISCR
IER
Interrupt
request
Vector number
Priority
determination
I
Internal interrupt request
SWDTEND to SSERT_i1
CCR
I2 to I0
IPR
Interrupt controller
[Legend]
IRQ sense control register
ISCR:
IRQ enable register
IER:
IRQ status register
ISR:
Interrupt priority register
IPR:
SYSCR: System control register
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 64 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
EXR
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller.
Table 5.1
Pin Configuration
Name
I/O
Function
NMI
Input
Nonmaskable external interrupt
Rising or falling edge can be selected.
IRQ5
IRQ4
IRQ3
IRQ2
IRQ1
IRQ0
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Maskable external interrupts
Rising, falling, or both edges, or level sensing, can be
selected.
5.3
Register Descriptions
The interrupt controller has the following registers. For the system control register (SYSCR), refer
to section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System control register (SYSCR)
IRQ sense control register H (ISCRH)
IRQ sense control register L (ISCRL)
IRQ enable register (IER)
IRQ status register (ISR)
Interrupt priority register A (IPRA)
Interrupt priority register B (IPRB)
Interrupt priority register C (IPRC)
Interrupt priority register D (IPRD)
Interrupt priority register E (IPRE)
Interrupt priority register F (IPRF)
Interrupt priority register G (IPRG)
Interrupt priority register H (IPRH)
Interrupt priority register I (IPRI)
Interrupt priority register J (IPRJ)
Interrupt priority register K (IPRK)
Interrupt priority register L (IPRL)
Interrupt priority register M (IPRM)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 65 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.1
Interrupt Priority Registers A to M (IPRA to IPRM)
The IPR registers are thirteen 8-bit readable/writable registers that set priorities (levels 7 to 0) for
interrupts other than NMI.
The correspondence between interrupt sources and IPR settings is shown in table 5.2. Setting a
value in the range from H'7 to H'0 in the 3-bit groups of bits 2 to 0 and 6 to 4 sets the priority of
the corresponding interrupt.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7

0

Reserved
6
5
4
IPR6
IPR5
IPR4
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
This bit is always read as 0.
Sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt
source.
000: Priority level 0 (Lowest)
001: Priority level 1
010: Priority level 2
011: Priority level 3
100: Priority level 4
101: Priority level 5
110: Priority level 6
111: Priority level 7 (Highest)
3

0

Reserved
This bit is always read as 0.
2
1
0
IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
Sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt
source.
000: Priority level 0 (Lowest)
001: Priority level 1
010: Priority level 2
011: Priority level 3
100: Priority level 4
101: Priority level 5
110: Priority level 6
111: Priority level 7 (Highest)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 66 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.2
IRQ Enable Register (IER)
IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the enabling and disabling of interrupt
requests IRQ5 to IRQ0.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 0
R/W
Reserved
Only 0 should be written to these bits.
5
IRQ5E
0
R/W
IRQ5 Enable
The IRQ5 interrupt request is enabled when this
bit is 1.
4
IRQ4E
0
R/W
IRQ4 Enable
The IRQ4 interrupt request is enabled when this
bit is 1.
3
IRQ3E
0
R/W
IRQ3 Enable
The IRQ3 interrupt request is enabled when this
bit is 1.
2
IRQ2E
0
R/W
IRQ2 Enable
The IRQ2 interrupt request is enabled when this
bit is 1.
1
IRQ1E
0
R/W
IRQ1 Enable
The IRQ1 interrupt request is enabled when this
bit is 1.
0
IRQ0E
0
R/W
IRQ0 Enable
The IRQ0 interrupt request is enabled when this
bit is 1.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 67 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.3
IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)
The ISCR registers are 16-bit readable/writable registers that select the source that generates an
interrupt request at pins IRQ5 to IRQ0.
•
Bit
ISCRH
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
15 to 12 
All 0
R/W
Reserved
11
10
0
0
R/W
R/W
IRQ5 Sense Control B
IRQ5 Sense Control A
Only 0 should be written to these bits.
IRQ5SCB
IRQ5SCA
00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ5 input
level low
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge
of IRQ5 input
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of
IRQ5 input
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling
and rising edges of IRQ5 input
9
8
IRQ4SCB
IRQ4SCA
0
0
R/W
R/W
IRQ4 Sense Control B
IRQ4 Sense Control A
00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ4 input
level low
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge
of IRQ4 input
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of
IRQ4 input
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling
and rising edges of IRQ4 input
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 68 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
•
ISCRL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
6
IRQ3SCB
IRQ3SCA
0
0
R/W
R/W
IRQ3 Sense Control B
IRQ3 Sense Control A
00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ3 input
level low
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge
of IRQ3 input
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of
IRQ3 input
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling
and rising edges of IRQ3 input
5
4
IRQ2SCB
IRQ2SCA
0
0
R/W
R/W
IRQ2 Sense Control B
IRQ2 Sense Control A
00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ2 input
level low
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge
of IRQ2 input
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of
IRQ2 input
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling
and rising edges of IRQ2 input
3
2
IRQ1SCB
IRQ1SCA
0
0
R/W
R/W
IRQ1 Sense Control B
IRQ1 Sense Control A
00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ1 input
level low
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge
of IRQ1 input
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of
IRQ1 input
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling
and rising edges of IRQ1 input
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 69 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
1
0
IRQ0SCB
IRQ0SCA
0
0
R/W
R/W
IRQ0 Sense Control B
IRQ0 Sense Control A
00: Interrupt request generated at IRQ0 input
level low
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge
of IRQ0 input
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of
IRQ0 input
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling
and rising edges of IRQ0 input
5.3.4
IRQ Status Register (ISR)
ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt
requests.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 0
R/W
Reserved
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ5F
IRQ4F
IRQ3F
IRQ2F
IRQ1F
IRQ0F
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
[Setting condition]
Only 0 should be written to these bits.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 70 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
•
When the interrupt source selected by the
ISCR registers occurs
[Clearing conditions]
•
Cleared by reading IRQnF flag when IRQnF
= 1, then writing 0 to IRQnF flag
•
When interrupt exception handling is
executed when low-level detection is set
and IRQn input is high
•
When IRQn interrupt exception handling is
executed when falling, rising, or both-edge
detection is set
•
When the DTC is activated by an IRQn
interrupt, and the DISEL bit in MRB of the
DTC is cleared to 0
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4
Interrupt Sources
5.4.1
External Interrupts
There are seven external interrupts: NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0. These interrupts can be used to
restore this LSI from software standby mode.
NMI Interrupt: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU
regardless of the interrupt control mode or the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG
bit in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling
edge on the NMI pin.
IRQ5 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ5
to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 have the following features:
• Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling
edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ5 to IRQ0.
• Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 can be selected with IER.
• The interrupt priority level can be set with IPR.
• The status of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0
by software.
The detection of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been
set for input or output. However, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear
the corresponding DDR to 0; and use the pin as an I/O pin for another function.
A block diagram of interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 is shown in figure 5.2.
IRQnE
IRQnSCA, IRQnSCB
IRQnF
Edge/level
detection circuit
S
Q
IRQn interrupt
request
R
IRQn input
Clear signal
Note: n = 5 to 0
Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 71 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4.2
Internal Interrupts
The sources for internal interrupts from on-chip peripheral modules have the following features:
• For each on-chip peripheral module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status,
and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If both of these are set to 1
for a particular interrupt source, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller.
• The interrupt priority level can be set by means of IPR.
• The DTC can be activated by a TPU, SCI, or other interrupt request.
• When the DTC is activated by an interrupt request, it is not affected by the interrupt control
mode or CPU interrupt mask bit.
5.5
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table
Table 5.2 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities.
For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. Priorities among
modules can be set by means of IPR. Modules set at the same priority will conform to their default
priorities. Priorities within a module are fixed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 72 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.2
Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities
Vector
Address*
Interrupt
Source
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
External
pin
NMI
7
H'001C
IRQ0
16
H'0040
IPRA6 to IPRA4
IRQ1
17
H'0044
IPRA2 to IPRA0
IRQ2
18
H'0048
IPRB6 to IPRB4
IPR
High
IRQ3
19
H'004C
IRQ4
20
H'0050
IRQ5
21
H'0054
Reserved for
system use
22
H'0058
23
H'005C
DTC
SWDTEND
24
H'0060
IPRC2 to IPRC0
Watchdog
timer 0
WOVI0
25
H'0064
IPRD6 to IPRD4
PC break
control
PC break
27
H'006C
IPRE6 to IPRE4
A/D
ADI
28
H'0070
IPRE2 to IPRE0
TPU
channel 0
TGIA_0
32
H'0080
IPRF6 to IPRF4
TGIB_0
33
H'0084
TGIC_0
34
H'0088
TGID_0
35
H'008C
TCIV_0
36
H'0090
TGIA_1
40
H'00A0
TGIB_1
41
H'00A4
TCIV_1
42
H'00A8
TCIU_1
43
H'00AC
TGIA_2
44
H'00B0
TGIB_2
45
H'00B4
TCIV_2
46
H'00B8
TCIU_2
47
H'00BC
—
TPU
channel 1
TPU
channel 2
Priority
IPRB2 to IPRB0
IPRF2 to IPRF0
IPRG6 to IPRG4
Low
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 73 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Vector
Address*
Interrupt
Source
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
IPR
Priority
TPU
channel 3
TGIA_3
48
H'00C0
IPRG2 to IPRG0
High
TGIB_3
49
H'00C4
TGIC_3
50
H'00C8
TGID_3
51
H'00CC
TCIV_3
52
H'00D0
TGIA_4
56
H'00E0
TGIB_4
57
H'00E4
TCIV_4
58
H'00E8
TCIU_4
59
H'00EC
TGIA_5
60
H'00F0
TGIB_5
61
H'00F4
TCIV_5
62
H'00F8
TCIU_5
63
H'00FC
CMIA_0
64
H'0100
CMIB_0
65
H'0104
OVI_0
66
H'0108
CMIA_1
68
H'0110
CMIB_1
69
H'0114
OVI_1
70
H'0118
ERI_0
80
H'0140
RXI_0
81
H'0144
TXI_0
82
H'0148
TEI_0
83
H'014C
ERI_1
84
H'0150
RXI_1
85
H'0154
TXI_1
86
H'0158
TEI_1
87
H'015C
TPU
channel 4
TPU
channel 5
8-bit timer
channel 0
8-bit timer
channel 1
SCI
channel 0
SCI
channel 1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 74 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
IPRH6 to IPRH4
IPRH2 to IPRH0
IPRI6 to IPRI4
IPRI2 to IPRI0
IPRJ2 to IPRJ0
IPRK6 to IPRK4
Low
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Vector
Address*
Interrupt
Source
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Vector
Number
Advanced
Mode
IPR
Priority
SCI
channel 2
ERI_2
88
H'0160
IPRK2 to IPRK0
High
RXI_2
89
H'0164
8-bit timer
channel 2
8-bit timer
channel 3
SSU
channel 0
SSU
channel 1
Note:
*
TXI_2
90
H'0168
TEI_2
91
H'016C
CMIA_2
92
H'0170
CMIB_2
93
H'0174
OVI_2
94
H'0178
CMIA_3
96
H'0180
CMIB_3
97
H'0184
OVI_3
98
H'0188
SSEr_i0
108
H'01B0
SSRx_i0
109
H'01B4
SSTx_i0
110
H'01B8
SSERT_i1
111
H'01BC
IPRL6 to IPRL4
IPRM2 to IPRM0
Low
Lower 16 bits of the start address.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 75 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation
The interrupt controller has two modes: interrupt control mode 0 and interrupt control mode 2.
Interrupt operations differ depending on the interrupt control mode. The interrupt control mode is
selected by SYSCR. Table 5.3 shows the differences between interrupt control mode 0 and
interrupt control mode 2.
Table 5.3
Interrupt Control Modes
Interrupt
Priority Setting
Control Mode Registers
Interrupt
Mask Bits Description
0
Default
I
The priorities of interrupt sources are fixed at
the default settings.
Interrupt sources, except for NMI, are masked
by the I bit.
2
IPR
I2 to I0
8 priority levels other than NMI can be set with
IPR.
8-level interrupt mask control is performed by
bits I2 to I0.
5.6.1
Interrupt Control Mode 0
In interrupt control mode 0, interrupt requests other than for NMI are masked by the I bit in CCR
in the CPU. Figure 5.3 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.
1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
2. If the I bit in CCR is set to 1, only an NMI interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests
are held pending. If the I bit is cleared, an interrupt request is accepted.
3. When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the interrupt with the highest
priority according to the interrupt priority levels is selected and other interrupt requests are
held pending.
4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after
execution of the current instruction has been completed.
5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on
the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the
interrupt handling routine.
6. Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 76 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the
interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the
vector table.
Program execution status
No
Interrupt generated?
Yes
Yes
NMI
No
No
I=0
Hold
pending
Yes
IRQ0
Yes
No
IRQ1
No
Yes
TEI_2
Yes
Save PC and CCR
I←1
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5.3 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance
in Interrupt Control Mode 0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 77 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.2
Interrupt Control Mode 2
In interrupt control mode 2, mask control is applied to eight levels for interrupt requests other than
NMI by comparing the EXR interrupt mask level (I2 to I0 bits) in the CPU and the IPR setting.
Figure 5.4 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.
1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt
request is sent to the interrupt controller.
2. When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the interrupt with the highest
priority according to the interrupt priority levels set in IPR is selected, and lower-priority
interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same priority are
generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the
priority system shown in table 5.2 is selected.
3. Next, the priority of the selected interrupt request is compared with the interrupt mask level set
in EXR. An interrupt request with a priority no higher than the mask level set at that time is
held pending, and only an interrupt request with a priority higher than the interrupt mask level
is accepted.
4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after
execution of the current instruction has been completed.
5. The PC, CCR, and EXR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC
saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from
the interrupt handling routine.
6. The T bit in EXR is cleared to 0. The interrupt mask level is rewritten with the priority level of
the accepted interrupt. If the accepted interrupt is NMI, the interrupt mask level is set to H'7.
7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the
interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the
vector table.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 78 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Program execution status
Interrupt generated?
No
Yes
Yes
NMI
No
Level 7 interrupt?
No
Yes
Mask level 6
or below?
Yes
Level 6 interrupt?
No
No
Yes
Level 1 interrupt?
Mask level 5
or below?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Mask level 0?
No
Yes
Save PC, CCR, and EXR
Hold
pending
Clear T bit to 0
Update mask level
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Control Mode 2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 79 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.3
Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
Figure 5.5 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case
where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are
in on-chip memory.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 80 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
Internal
operation
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.
This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address)
(2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed)
(3)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed)
(5)
SP-2
(7)
SP-4
(1)
Internal
data bus
Internal
write signal
Internal
read signal
Internal
address bus
Interrupt
request signal
φ
Interrupt level determination Instruction
Wait for end of instruction
prefetch
Interrupt
acceptance
(7)
(8)
(10)
(9)
Vector fetch
(12)
(11)
(14)
(13)
Interrupt service
routine instruction
prefetch
Saved PC and saved CCR
Vector address
Interrupt handling routine start address (Vector address contents)
Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10)(12))
First instruction of interrupt handling routine
(6)
(6) (8)
(9) (11)
(10) (12)
(13)
(14)
(5)
stack
Internal
operation
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Figure 5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 81 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.4
Interrupt Response Times
Table 5.4 shows interrupt response times—the interval between generation of an interrupt request
and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The execution status
symbols used in table 5.4 are explained in table 5.5.
This LSI is capable of fast word transfer to on-chip memory, has the program area in on-chip
ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM, enabling high-speed processing.
Table 5.4
Interrupt Response Times
Normal Mode*5
Advanced Mode
Interrupt
control
mode 2
Interrupt
control
mode 0
Interrupt
control
mode 2
3
3
3
No.
Execution Status
Interrupt
control
mode 0
1
Interrupt priority determination*1
3
2
Number of wait states until executing 19 to 1+2·SI 19 to 1+2·SI
instruction ends*2
19 to 1+2·SI 19 to 1+2·SI
3
PC, CCR, EXR stack save
2·SK
3·SK
2·SK
3·SK
4
Vector fetch
SI
SI
2·SI
2·SI
5
Instruction fetch*3
2·SI
2·SI
2·SI
2·SI
6
Internal processing*4
Total (using on-chip memory)
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2
2
2
2
31 to 11
32 to 12
32 to 12
33 to 13
Two states in case of internal interrupt.
Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions.
Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch.
Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch.
Not available in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 82 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.5
Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Status
Object of Access
External Device*
8-Bit Bus
Symbol
Instruction fetch
SI
Branch address read
SJ
Stack manipulation
SK
16-Bit Bus
Internal
Memory
2-State
Access
3-State
Access
2-State
Access
3-State
Access
1
4
6+2m
2
3+m
[Legend]
m:
Number of wait states in an external device access.
Note: * Not available in this LSI.
5.6.5
DTC Activation by Interrupt
The DTC can be activated by an interrupt. For details, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller
(DTC).
5.7
Usage Notes
5.7.1
Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective
after execution of the instruction.
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, and if an
interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be
enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will
be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request of higher
priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority
interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored.
The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0.
Figure 5.6 shows an example in which the TCIEV bit in TIER_0 of the TPU is cleared to 0.
The above conflict will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while the
interrupt is masked.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 83 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
TIER_0 write cycle by CPU
TCIV exception handling
φ
Internal
address bus
TIER_0 address
Internal
write signal
TCIEV
TCFV
TCIV
interrupt signal
Figure 5.6 Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
5.7.2
Instructions that Disable Interrupts
The instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these
instructions are executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is
always executed. When the I bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid
two states after execution of the instruction ends.
5.7.3
When Interrupts Are Disabled
There are times when interrupt acceptance is disabled by the interrupt controller.
The interrupt controller disables interrupt acceptance for a 3-state period after the CPU has
updated the mask level with an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 84 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.7.4
Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction
Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction.
With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer
is not accepted until the transfer is completed.
With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt
exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this
case is the address of the next instruction.
Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the
following coding should be used.
L1:
5.7.5
EEPMOV.W
MOV.W
R4,R4
BNE
L1
IRQ Interrupt
When operating by clock input, acceptance of input to an IRQ is synchronized with the clock. In
software standby mode, the input is accepted asynchronously. For details on the input conditions,
see section 22.3.2, Control Signal Timing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 85 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 86 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
The PC break controller (PBC) provides functions that simplify program debugging. Using these
functions, it is easy to create a self-monitoring debugger, enabling programs to be debugged with
the chip alone, without using an in-circuit emulator. A block diagram of the PC break controller is
shown in figure 6.1.
6.1
Features
• Two break channels (A and B)
• 24-bit break address
 Bit masking possible
• Four types of break compare conditions
 Instruction fetch
 Data read
 Data write
 Data read/write
• Bus master
 Either CPU or CPU/DTC can be selected
• The timing of PC break exception handling after the occurrence of a break condition is as
follows
 Immediately before execution of the instruction fetched at the set address (instruction
fetch)
 Immediately after execution of the instruction that accesses data at the set address (data
access)
• Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 87 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
BCRA
Output control
BARA
Mask control
Control
logic
Comparator
Internal address
PC break
interrupt
Access
status
Control
logic
Comparator
Output control
Match signal
Mask control
BARB
BCRB
Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of PC Break Controller
6.2
Register Descriptions
The PC break controller has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
Break address register A (BARA)
Break address register B (BARB)
Break control register A (BCRA)
Break control register B (BCRB)
6.2.1
Break Address Register A (BARA)
BARA is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the channel A break address.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
31 to 24
−
Undefined
−
Reserved
These bits are read as an undefined value
and cannot be modified.
23 to 0
BAA23 to BAA0
H'000000
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 88 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
R/W
These bits set the channel A PC break
address.
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.2.2
Break Address Register B (BARB)
BARB is the channel B break address register. The bit configuration is the same as for BARA.
6.2.3
Break Control Register A (BCRA)
BCRA controls channel A PC breaks. BCRA also contains a condition match flag.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
CMFA
0
R/W
Condition Match Flag A
[Setting condition]
•
When a condition set for channel A is satisfied
[Clearing condition]
•
6
CDA
0
R/W
When 0 is written to CMFA after reading
CMFA = 1
CPU Cycle/DTC Cycle Select A
Selects the channel A break condition bus master.
0: CPU
1: CPU or DTC
5
4
3
BAMRA2
BAMRA1
BAMRA0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Break Address Mask Register A2 to A0
These bits specify which bits of the break address
set in BARA are to be masked.
000: BAA23 to BAA0 (All bits are unmasked)
001: BAA23 to BAA1 (Lowest bit is masked)
010: BAA23 to BAA2 (Lower 2 bits are masked)
011: BAA23 to BAA3 (Lower 3 bits are masked)
100: BAA23 to BAA4 (Lower 4 bits are masked)
101: BAA23 to BAA8 (Lower 8 bits are masked)
110: BAA23 to BAA12 (Lower 12 bits are masked)
111: BAA23 to BAA16 (Lower 16 bits are masked)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 89 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
2
1
CSELA1
CSELA0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Break Condition Select A
Selects break condition of channel A.
00: Instruction fetch is used as break condition
01: Data read cycle is used as break condition
10: Data write cycle is used as break condition
11: Data read/write cycle is used as break condition
0
BIEA
0
R/W
Break Interrupt Enable A
When this bit is 1, the PC break interrupt request of
channel A is enabled.
6.2.4
Break Control Register B (BCRB)
BCRB is the channel B break control register. The bit configuration is the same as for BCRA.
6.3
Operation
The operation flow from break condition setting to PC break interrupt exception handling is
shown in section 6.3.1, PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch, and section 6.3.2, PC Break
Interrupt Due to Data Access, taking the example of channel A.
6.3.1
PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch
1. Set the break address in BARA.
For a PC break caused by an instruction fetch, set the address of the first instruction byte as the
break address.
2. Set the break conditions in BCR.
Set bit 6 (CDA) to 0 to select the CPU because the bus master must be the CPU for a PC break
caused by an instruction fetch. Set the address bits to be masked to bits 5 to 3 (BAMA2 to
BAMA0). Set bits 2 and 1 (CSELA1 and CSELA0) to 00 to specify an instruction fetch as the
break condition. Set bit 0 (BIEA) to 1 to enable break interrupts.
3. When the instruction at the set address is fetched, a PC break request is generated immediately
before execution of the fetched instruction, and the condition match flag (CMFA) is set.
4. After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception handling
is started.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 90 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.3.2
PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access
1. Set the break address in BARA.
For a PC break caused by a data access, set the target ROM, RAM, I/O, or external address
space address as the break address. Stack operations and branch address reads are included in
data accesses.
2. Set the break conditions in BCRA.
Select the bus master with bit 6 (CDA). Set the address bits to be masked to bits 5 to 3
(BAMA2 to BAMA0). Set bits 2 and 1 (CSELA1 and CSELA0) to 01, 10, or 11 to specify
data access as the break condition. Set bit 0 (BIEA) to 1 to enable break interrupts.
3. After execution of the instruction that performs a data access on the set address, a PC break
request is generated and the condition match flag (CMFA) is set.
4. After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception handling
is started.
6.3.3
PC Break Operation at Consecutive Data Transfer
• When a PC break interrupt is generated at the transfer address of an EEPMOV.B instruction
PC break exception handling is executed after all data transfers have been completed and the
EEPMOV.B instruction has ended.
• When a PC break interrupt is generated at a DTC transfer address
PC break exception handling is executed after the DTC has completed the specified number of
data transfers, or after data for which the DISEL bit is set to 1 has been transferred.
6.3.4
Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes
The operation when a PC break interrupt is set for an instruction fetch at the address after a
SLEEP instruction is shown below.
• When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from high-speed (medium-speed) mode to
sleep mode:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is not made to sleep mode, and PC break
exception handling is executed. After execution of PC break exception handling, the
instruction at the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6.2 (A)).
• When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition to software standby mode:
After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is made to software standby mode, and
PC break exception handling is not executed. However, the CMFA or CMFB flag is set (figure
6.2 (B)).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 91 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
SLEEP
instruction execution
SLEEP
instruction execution
PC break exception
handling
Transition to
respective mode
(B)
Execution of instruction
after sleep instruction
(A)
Figure 6.2 Operation in Power-Down Mode Transitions
6.3.5
When Instruction Execution Is Delayed by One State
While the break interrupt enable bit is set to 1, instruction execution is one state later than usual.
• For 1-word branch instructions (Bcc d:8, BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, and RTS) in on-chip
ROM or RAM.
• When break interrupt by instruction fetch is set, the set address indicates on-chip ROM or
RAM space, and that address is used for data access, the instruction will be one state later than
in normal operation.
• When break interrupt by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the
executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction has one of the addressing
modes shown below, and that address indicates on-chip ROM or RAM, the instruction will be
one state later than in normal operation.
Addressing modes: @ERn, @(d:16,ERn), @(d:32,ERn), @-ERn/ERn+, @aa:8, @aa:24,
@aa:32, @(d:8,PC), @(d:16,PC), @@aa:8
• When break interrupt by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the
executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction is NOP or SLEEP, or has
#xx,Rn as its addressing mode, and that instruction is located in on-chip ROM or RAM, the
instruction will be one state later than in normal operation.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 92 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.4
Usage Notes
6.4.1
Module Stop Mode Setting
PBC operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial
setting is for PBC operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop
mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.
6.4.2
PC Break Interrupts
The PC break interrupt is shared by channels A and B. The channel from which the request was
issued must be determined by the interrupt handler.
6.4.3
CMFA and CMFB
The CMFA and CMFB flags are not automatically cleared to 0, so 0 must be written to CMFA or
CMFB after first reading the flag while it is set to 1. If the flag is left set to 1, another interrupt
will be requested after interrupt handling ends.
6.4.4
PC Break Interrupt when DTC Is Bus Master
A PC break interrupt generated when the DTC is the bus master is accepted after the bus
mastership has been transferred to the CPU by the bus controller.
6.4.5
PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Address Following BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA,
RTE, or RTS Instruction
Even if the instruction at the address following a BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS
instruction is fetched, it is not executed, and so a PC break interrupt is not generated by the
instruction fetch at the next address.
6.4.6
I Bit Set by LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC Instruction
When the I bit is set by an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction, a PC break interrupt
becomes valid two states after the end of the instruction execution. If a PC break interrupt is set
for the instruction following one of these instructions, since interrupts, including NMI, are
disabled for a 3-state period in the case of LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XOR, the next instruction is
always executed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 93 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC)
6.4.7
PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Address Following Bcc Instruction
A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the next address is executed in accordance
with the branch condition, and is not generated if the instruction at the next address is not
executed.
6.4.8
PC Break Set for Instruction Fetch at Branch Destination Address of Bcc
Instruction
A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the branch destination is executed in
accordance with the branch condition, and is not generated if the instruction at the branch
destination is not executed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 94 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 7 Bus Controller
Section 7 Bus Controller
The H8S/2600 CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol φ.
The bus controller controls a memory cycle and a bus cycle. Different methods are used to access
on-chip memory and on-chip peripheral modules. The bus controller also has a bus arbitration
function, and controls the operation of the internal bus masters: the CPU and data transfer
controller (DTC).
7.1
Basic Timing
The period from one rising edge of φ to the next is referred to as a “state”. The memory cycle or
bus cycle consists of one, two, three, or four states. Different methods are used to access on-chip
memory and on-chip peripheral modules.
7.1.1
On-Chip Memory Access Timing (ROM, RAM)
On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and
word transfer instruction. Figure 7.1 shows the on-chip memory access cycle.
Bus cycle
T1
φ
Internal address bus
Address
Internal read signal
Read
Internal data bus
Read data
Internal write signal
Write
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 7.1 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 95 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.1.2
On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Timing
The on-chip peripheral modules, except for the SSU and realtime input port data register, are
accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits wide, depending on the particular
internal I/O register being accessed. For details, refer to section 21, List of Registers. Figure 7.2
shows access timing for the on-chip peripheral modules.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
φ
Internal address bus
Address
Internal read signal
Read
Internal data bus
Read data
Internal write signal
Write
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 7.2 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 96 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.1.3
On-Chip SSU Module and Realtime Input Port Data Register Access Timing
The on-chip SSU module or realtime input port data register is accessed in three states. At this
time, a data bus width is 16 bits. Figure 7.3 shows the SSU module access timing.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
φ
Internal address bus
Address
SSU read signal
Read
Internal data bus
Read data
SSU write signal
Write
Internal data bus
Write data
Figure 7.3 On-Chip SSU Module Access Cycle
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 97 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 7 Bus Controller
7.2
Bus Arbitration
The Bus Controller has a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master operations.
There are two bus masters, the CPU and DTC, which perform read/write operations when they
control the bus.
7.2.1
Order of Priority of the Bus Masters
Each bus master requests the bus mastership by means of a bus request signal. The bus arbiter
detects the bus masters’ bus request signals, and if the bus mastership is requested, sends a bus
request acknowledge signal to the bus master making the request. If there are bus requests from
more than one bus master, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the highest
priority. When a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the
bus until that signal is cancelled.
The order of priority of the bus mastership is as follows:
(High)
7.2.2
DTC
>
CPU
(Low)
Bus Transfer Timing
Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus
master that has acquired the bus mastership and is currently operating, the bus mastership is not
necessarily transferred immediately. The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus
request is received from the DTC, the bus arbiter transfers the bus mastership to the bus master
that issued the request. The timing for transfer of the bus mastership is as follows:
• The bus mastership is transferred at a break between bus cycles.
However, if a bus cycle is executed in discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size
access, the bus mastership is not transferred between such operations. For details, refer to
section 2.7, Bus Status in Instruction Execution in the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series
Software Manual.
• If the CPU is in sleep mode, it transfers the bus mastership immediately.
The DTC can release the bus mastership after a vector read, a register information read (3 states),
a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states). It does not release the bus
mastership during a register information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register
information write (3 states).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 98 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
This LSI includes a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can be activated by an interrupt or
software, to transfer data.
Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the DTC.
The DTC’s register information is stored in the on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME
bit in SYSCR must be set to 1. A 32-bit bus connects the DTC to the on-chip RAM (1 kbyte),
enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the DTC register information.
8.1
Features
• Transfer is possible over any number of channels
• Three transfer modes
 Normal, repeat, and block transfer modes are available
• One activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer)
• The direct specification of 16-Mbyte address space is possible
• Activation by software is possible
• Transfer can be set in byte or word units
• A CPU interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the DTC
• Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 99 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Internal address bus
CPU interrupt
request
[Legend]
MRA, MRB:
CRA, CRB:
SAR:
DAR:
DTCERA to DTCERG:
DTVECR:
Internal data bus
DTC mode registers A and B
DTC transfer count registers A and B
DTC source address register
DTC destination address register
DTC enable registers A to G
DTC vector register
Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DTC
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 100 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Register information
MRA MRB
CRA
CRB
DAR
SAR
Control logic
DTC service
request
DTCERA
to
DTCERG
Interrupt
request
On-chip
RAM
DTC
DTVECR
Interrupt controller
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2
Register Descriptions
The DTC has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
DTC mode register A (MRA)
DTC mode register B (MRB)
DTC source address register (SAR)
DTC destination address register (DAR)
DTC transfer count register A (CRA)
DTC transfer count register B (CRB)
These six registers cannot be directly accessed from the CPU.
When activated, the DTC reads a set of register information that is stored in on-chip RAM to the
corresponding DTC registers and transfers data. After the data transfer, it writes a set of updated
register information back to the RAM.
• DTC enable registers (DTCER)
• DTC vector register (DTVECR)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 101 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.1
DTC Mode Register A (MRA)
MRA is an 8-bit register that selects the DTC operating mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
6
SM1
SM0
Undefined
Undefined


Source Address Mode 1 and 0
These bits specify an SAR operation after a data
transfer.
0×: SAR is fixed
10: SAR is incremented after a transfer
(by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1)
11: SAR is decremented after a transfer
(by –1 when Sz = 0; by –2 when Sz = 1)
5
4
DM1
DM0
Undefined
Undefined


Destination Address Mode 1 and 0
These bits specify a DAR operation after a data
transfer.
0×: DAR is fixed
10: DAR is incremented after a transfer
(by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1)
11: DAR is decremented after a transfer
(by –1 when Sz = 0; by –2 when Sz = 1)
3
2
MD1
MD0
Undefined
Undefined


DTC Mode
These bits specify the DTC transfer mode.
00: Normal mode
01: Repeat mode
10: Block transfer mode
11: Setting prohibited
1
DTS
Undefined

DTC Transfer Mode Select
Specifies whether the source side or the destination
side is set to be a repeat area or block area, in
repeat mode or block transfer mode.
0: Destination side is repeat area or block area
1: Source side is repeat area or block area
0
Sz
Undefined

DTC Data Transfer Size
Specifies the size of data to be transferred.
0: Byte-size transfer
1: Word-size transfer
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 102 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.2
DTC Mode Register B (MRB)
MRB is an 8-bit register that selects the DTC operating mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
CHNE
Undefined

DTC Chain Transfer Enable
When this bit is set to 1, a chain transfer will be
performed. For details, refer to section 8.5.4, Chain
Transfer.
In data transfer with CHNE set to 1, determination of
the end of the specified number of transfers, clearing
of the interrupt source flag, and clearing of DTCER,
are not performed.
6
DISEL
Undefined

DTC Interrupt Select
When this bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt request is
generated every time after the end of a data transfer.
When this bit is set to 0, a CPU interrupt request is
generated at the time when the specified number of
data transfer ends.
5 to 0

Undefined

Reserved
These bits have no effect on DTC operation. Only 0
should be written to these bits.
8.2.3
DTC Source Address Register (SAR)
SAR is a 24-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the DTC.
For word-size transfer, specify an even source address.
8.2.4
DTC Destination Address Register (DAR)
DAR is a 24-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the
DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even destination address.
8.2.5
DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA)
CRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC.
In normal mode, the entire CRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536). It is
decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 103 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
In repeat mode or block transfer mode, the CRA is divided into two parts; the upper 8 bits
(CRAH) and the lower 8 bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the number of transfers while CRAL
functions as an 8-bit transfer counter (1 to 256). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time data is
transferred, and the contents of CRAH are sent when the count reaches H'00.
8.2.6
DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)
CRB is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC in
block transfer mode. It functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536) that is decremented by 1
every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000.
8.2.7
DTC Enable Registers (DTCER)
DTCER is comprised of seven registers; DTCERA to DTCERG, and is a register that specifies
DTC activation interrupt sources. The correspondence between interrupt sources and DTCE bits is
shown in table 8.1. For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and
BCLR for reading and writing. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set
at one time (only at the initial setting) by writing data after executing a dummy read on the
relevant register.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTCE7
DTCE6
DTCE5
DTCE4
DTCE3
DTCE2
DTCE1
DTCE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DTC Activation Enable
Setting these bits to 1 specifies a relevant interrupt
source as a DTC activation source.
[Clearing conditions]
•
When the DISEL bit in MRB is 1 and the data
transfer has ended
•
When the specified number of transfers have
ended
These bits are not cleared when the DISEL bit is 0
and the specified number of transfers have not been
completed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 104 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.8
DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)
DTVECR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables DTC activation by
software, and sets a vector number for the software activation interrupt.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
SWDTE
0
R/W
DTC Software Activation Enable
Setting this bit to 1 activates DTC. Only 1 can be
written to this bit.
[Clearing conditions]
•
When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified
number of transfers have not ended
•
When 0 is written to the DISEL bit after a
software-activated data transfer end interrupt
(SWDTEND) request has been sent to the CPU.
When the DISEL bit is 1 and data transfer has ended
or when the specified number of transfers have
ended, this bit will not be cleared.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTVEC6
DTVEC5
DTVEC4
DTVEC3
DTVEC2
DTVEC1
DTVEC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DTC Software Activation Vectors 6 to 0
These bits specify a vector number for DTC software
activation.
The vector address is expressed as H'0400 + (vector
number × 2). For example, when DTVEC6 to
DTVEC0 = H'10, the vector address is H'0420. When
the bit SWDTE is 0, these bits can be written.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 105 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.3
Activation Sources
The DTC operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to DTVECR by software. An
interrupt request can be directed to the CPU or DTC, as designated by the corresponding DTCER
bit. At the end of a data transfer (or the last consecutive transfer in the case of chain transfer), the
activation source or corresponding DTCER bit is cleared. The activation source flag, in the case
of RXI_0, for example, is the RDRF flag of SCI_0.
When an interrupt has been designated a DTC activation source, the existing CPU mask level and
interrupt controller priorities have no effect. If there is more than one activation source at the same
time, the DTC operates in accordance with the default priorities.
Figure 8.2 shows a block diagram of DTC activation source control. For details, see section 5,
Interrupt Controller.
Source flag cleared
Clear
controller
Clear
DTCER
On-chip
supporting
module
IRQ interrupt
Interrupt
request
Selection circuit
Select
DTVECR
Clear request
DTC
CPU
Interrupt controller
Interrupt mask
Figure 8.2 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 106 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.4
Location of Register Information and DTC Vector Table
Locate the register information in the on-chip RAM (addresses: H'FFEBC0 to H'FFEFBF).
Register information should be located at an address that is a multiple of four within the range.
Locating the register information in address space is shown in figure 8.3. Locate the MRA, SAR,
MRB, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers, in that order, from the start address of the register
information.
In the case of chain transfer, register information should be located in consecutive areas and the
register information start address should be located at the vector address corresponding to the
interrupt source as shown in figure 8.3. The DTC reads the start address of the register information
from the vector address set for each activation source, and then reads the register information from
that start address.
When the DTC is activated by software, the vector address is obtained from: H'0400 +
(DTVECR[6:0] × 2). For example, if DTVECR is H'10, the vector address is H'0420. The
configuration of the vector address is the same in both normal and advanced modes, a 2-byte unit
being used in both cases. These two bytes specify the lower bits of the register information start
address.
Lower address
0
Register
information
start address
Chain
transfer
1
2
MRA
SAR
MRB
DAR
3
Register information
CRB
CRA
MRA
SAR
MRB
DAR
Register information
for 2nd transfer in
chain transfer
CRB
CRA
4 bytes
Figure 8.3 Location of DTC Register Information in Address Space
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 107 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.1
Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs
Interrupt
Source
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Vector Number
Software
Write to DTVECR
DTVECR
External pin
IRQ0
DTC
Vector Address
DTCE*
Priority
H'0400 + (vector
number × 2)

High
16
H'0420
DTCEA7
IRQ1
17
H'0422
DTCEA6
IRQ2
18
H'0424
DTCEA5
IRQ3
19
H'0426
DTCEA4
IRQ4
20
H'0428
DTCEA3
IRQ5
21
H'042A
DTCEA2
Reserved for
system use
22
H'042C
DTCEA1
23
H'042E
DTCEA0
A/D counter
ADI (A/D conversion 28
end)
H'0438
DTCEB6
TPU
channel 0
TGIA_0
32
H'0440
DTCEB5
TGIB_0
33
H'0442
DTCEB4
TGIC_0
34
H'0444
DTCEB3
TGID_0
35
H'0446
DTCEB2
TPU
channel 1
TGIA_1
40
H'0450
DTCEB1
TGIB_1
41
H'0452
DTCEB0
TPU
channel 2
TGIA_2
44
H'0458
DTCEC7
TGIB_2
45
H'045A
DTCEC6
TPU
channel 3
TGIA_3
48
H'0460
DTCEC5
TGIB_3
49
H'0462
DTCEC4
TGIC_3
50
H'0464
DTCEC3
TGID_3
51
H'0466
DTCEC2
TPU
channel 4
TGIA_4
56
H'0470
DTCEC1
TGIB_4
57
H'0472
DTCEC0
TPU
channel 5
TGIA_5
60
H'0478
DTCED5
TGIB_5
61
H'047A
DTCED4
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 108 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Low
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Interrupt
Source
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Vector Number
DTC
Vector Address
DTCE*
Priority
8-bit timer
channel 0
CMIA_1
64
H'0480
DTCED3
High
65
H'0482
DTCED2
8-bit timer
channel 1
CMIB_1
68
H'0488
DTCED1
69
H'048A
DTCED0

Reserved for
system use
72
H'0490
DTCEE7
73
H'0492
DTCEE6
74
H'0494
DTCEE5
75
H'0496
DTCEE4
SCI
channel 0
RXI_0
81
H'04A2
DTCEE3
TXI_0
82
H'04A4
DTCEE2
SCI
channel 1
RXI_1
85
H′04A8
DTCEE1
TXI_1
86
H′04AA
DTCEE0
SCI
channel 2
RXI_2
89
H'04B2
DTCEF7
TXI_2
90
H'04B4
DTCEF6
8-bit timer
channel 2
CMIA_2
92
H'04B8
DTCEF5
CMIB_2
93
H'04BA
DTCEF4
8-bit timer
channel 3
CMIA_3
96
H'04C0
DTCEF3
CMIB3
97
H'04C2
DTCEF2

Reserved for
system use
104
H'04D0
DTCEG7
105
H'04D2
DTCEG6
106
H'04D4
DTCEG5
107
H'04D6
DTCEG4
SSRx_i0
109
H'04DA
DTCEG2
SSTx_i0
110
H'04DC
DTCEG1
SSU
channel 0
Note:
*
Low
DTCE bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and the write value should
always be 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 109 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5
Operation
Register information is stored in on-chip RAM. When activated, the DTC reads register
information in on-chip RAM and transfers data. After the data transfer, the DTC writes updated
register information back to the on-chip RAM.
The pre-storage of register information in the on-chip RAM makes it possible to transfer data over
any required number of channels. The transfer mode can be specified as normal, repeat, and block
transfer mode. Setting the CHNE bit in MRB to 1 makes it possible to perform a number of
transfers with a single activation source (chain transfer).
The 24-bit SAR designates the DTC transfer source address, and the 24-bit DAR designates the
transfer destination address. After each transfer, SAR and DAR are independently incremented,
decremented, or left fixed depending on its register information.
Start
Read DTC vector
Next transfer
Read register information
Data transfer
Write register information
CHNE=1
Yes
No
Transfer Counter=0
or DISEL=1
Yes
No
Clear an activation flag
Clear DTCER
End
Interrupt exception
handling
Figure 8.4 Flowchart of DTC Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 110 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.1
Normal Mode
In normal mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data.
Table 8.2 lists the register information in normal mode.
From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have been
completed, a CPU interrupt can be requested.
Table 8.2
Register Information in Normal Mode
Name
Abbreviation
Function
DTC source address register
SAR
Designates source address
DTC destination address register
DAR
Designates destination address
DTC transfer count register A
CRA
Designates transfer count
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
Not used
SAR
DAR
Transfer
Figure 8.5 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 111 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.2
Repeat Mode
In repeat mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. Table 8.3 lists the register
information in repeat mode.
From 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, the
initial state of the transfer counter and the address register specified as the repeat area is restored,
and transfer is repeated. In repeat mode the transfer counter value does not reach H'00, and
therefore CPU interrupts cannot be requested when DISEL = 0.
Table 8.3
Register Information in Repeat Mode
Name
Abbreviation
Function
DTC source address register
SAR
Designates source address
DTC destination address register
DAR
Designates destination address
DTC transfer count register AH
CRAH
Holds number of transfers
DTC transfer count register AL
CRAL
Designates transfer count
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
Not used
SAR
or
DAR
Repeat area
Transfer
Figure 8.6 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 112 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
DAR
or
SAR
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.3
Block Transfer Mode
In block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. Either the transfer source or the
transfer destination is designated as a block area. Table 8.4 lists the register information in block
transfer mode.
The block size can be between 1 and 256. When the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of
the block size counter and the address register specified as the block area is restored. The other
address register is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed.
From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have been
completed, a CPU interrupt is requested.
Table 8.4
Register Information in Block Transfer Mode
Name
Abbreviation
Function
DTC source address register
SAR
Designates source address
DTC destination address register
DAR
Designates destination address
DTC transfer count register AH
CRAH
Holds block size
DTC transfer count register AL
CRAL
Designates block size count
DTC transfer count register B
CRB
Transfer count
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 113 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
First block
SAR
or
DAR
.
.
.
Block area
Transfer
Nth block
Figure 8.7 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 114 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
DAR
or
SAR
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.4
Chain Transfer
Setting the CHNE bit in MRB to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed
consecutively in response to a single transfer request. SAR, DAR, CRA, CRB, MRA, and MRB,
which define data transfers, can be set independently.
Figure 8.8 shows the outline of the chain transfer operation.
When activated, the DTC reads the register information start address stored at the vector address
corresponding to the activation source, and then reads the first register information at that start
address. After data transfer ends, the CHNE bit will be tested. When it has been set to 1, DTC
reads the next register information located in a consecutive area and performs the data transfer.
These sequences are repeated until the CHNE bit is cleared to 0.
In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the
end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt
source flag for the activation source is not affected.
Source
Destination
Register information
CHNE=1
DTC vector
address
Register information
start address
Register information
CHNE=0
Source
Destination
Figure 8.8 Chain Transfer Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 115 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.5
Interrupts
An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC has completed the specified number of
data transfers, or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt
activation, the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are
subject to CPU mask level and interrupt controller priority level control.
In the case of software activation, a software-activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) is
generated.
When the DISEL bit is 1 and one data transfer has been completed, or the specified number of
transfers have been completed, after data transfer ends the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and an
SWDTEND interrupt is generated. The interrupt handling routine will then clear the SWDTE bit
to 0.
When the DTC is activated by software, an SWDTEND interrupt is not generated during a data
transfer wait or during data transfer even if the SWDTE bit is set to 1.
8.5.6
Operation Timing
φ
DTC activation
request
DTC
request
Vector read
Data transfer
Address
Read Write
Transfer
information read
Transfer
information write
Figure 8.9 DTC Operation Timing (Example in Normal Mode or Repeat Mode)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 116 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
φ
DTC activation
request
DTC
request
Data transfer
Vector read
Read Write Read Write
Address
Transfer
information read
Transfer
information write
Figure 8.10 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Block Transfer Mode,
with Block Size of 2)
φ
DTC activation
request
DTC
request
Data transfer
Data transfer
Read Write
Read Write
Vector read
Address
Transfer
information read
Transfer
information
write
Transfer
information
read
Transfer
information write
Figure 8.11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Chain Transfer)
8.5.7
Number of DTC Execution States
Table 8.5 lists execution status for a single DTC data transfer, and table 8.6 shows the number of
states required for each execution status.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 117 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.5
DTC Execution Status
Mode
Vector Read
I
Register Information
Read/Write
Data Read
J
K
Data Write
L
Internal
Operations
M
Normal
1
6
1
1
3
Repeat
1
6
1
1
3
Block transfer
1
6
N
N
3
[Legend]
N: Block size (initial setting of CRAH and CRAL)
Table 8.6
Number of States Required for Each Execution Status
OnChip
RAM
OnChip
ROM
Bus width
32
16
8
16
Access states
1
1
2
2
Object to be Accessed
Execution
status
Note:
*
On-Chip I/O
Registers
External Devices*
8
16
2
3
2
3
SI

1


4
6+2m
2
3+m
Register information
read/write
SJ
1







Byte data read
SK
1
1
2
2
2
3+m
2
3+m
Word data read
SK
1
1
4
2
4
6+2m
2
3+m
Byte data write
SL
1
1
2
2
2
3+m
2
3+m
Word data write
SL
1
1
4
2
4
6+2m
2
3+m
Internal operation
SM
Vector read
1
Not available in this LSI.
The number of execution states is calculated from using the formula below. Note that Σ is the sum
of all transfers activated by one activation source (the number in which the CHNE bit is set to 1,
plus 1).
Number of execution states = I · (1 + SI) + Σ (J · SJ + K · SK + L · SL) + M · SM
For example, when the DTC vector address table is located in the on-chip ROM, normal mode is
set, and data is transferred from on-chip ROM to an internal I/O register, then the time required for
the DTC operation is 13 states. The time from activation to the end of the data write is 10 states.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 118 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.6
Procedures for Using DTC
8.6.1
Activation by Interrupt
The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in on-chip RAM.
Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address.
Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1.
Set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the activation sources to 1. The DTC
is activated when an interrupt used as an activation source is generated.
5. After one data transfer has been completed, or after the specified number of data transfers have
been completed, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and a CPU interrupt is requested. If the DTC is to
continue transferring data, set the DTCE bit to 1.
8.6.2
Activation by Software
The procedure for using the DTC with software activation is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in on-chip RAM.
Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address.
Check that the SWDTE bit is 0.
Write 1 to SWDTE bit and the vector number to DTVECR.
Check the vector number written to DTVECR.
After one data transfer has been completed, if the DISEL bit is 0 and a CPU interrupt is not
requested, the SWDTE bit is cleared to 0. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the
SWDTE bit to 1. When the DISEL bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have
been completed, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and a CPU interrupt is requested.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 119 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.7
Examples of Use of the DTC
8.7.1
Normal Mode
An example is shown in which the DTC is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the SCI.
1. Set MRA to a fixed source address (SM1 = SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1
= 1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have
any value. Set MRB for one data transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0, DISEL = 0). Set the
SCI RDR address in SAR, the start address of the RAM area where data will be received in
DAR, and 128 (H'0080) in CRA. CRB can be set to any value.
2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address.
3. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1.
4. Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the
reception complete (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI
reception operation will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept
receive error interrupts.
5. Each time the reception of one byte of data has been completed on the SCI, the RDRF flag in
SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is
transferred from RDR to RAM by the DTC. DAR is incremented and CRA is decremented.
The RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0.
6. When CRA becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have been completed, the RDRF flag is held
at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The
interrupt handling routine will perform wrap-up processing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 120 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.7.2
Chain Transfer
An example of DTC chain transfer is shown in which pulse output is performed using the PPG.
Chain transfer can be used to perform pulse output data transfer and PPG output trigger cycle
updating. Repeat mode transfer to the PPG’s NDR is performed in the first half of the chain
transfer, and normal mode transfer to the TPU’s TGR in the second half. This is because clearing
of the activation source and interrupt generation at the end of the specified number of transfers are
restricted to the second half of the chain transfer (transfer when CHNE = 0).
1. Perform settings for transfer to the PPG’s NDR. Set MRA to incrementing source address
(SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), a fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), repeat mode (MD1 = 0,
MD0 = 1), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the source side as a repeat area (DTS = 1). Set MRB to
chain mode (CHNE = 1, DISEL = 0). Set the data table start address in SAR, the NDRH
address in DAR, and the data table size in CRAH and CRAL. CRB can be set to any value.
2. Perform settings for transfer to the TPU’s TGR. Set MRA to incrementing source address
(SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), a fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 =
MD0 = 0), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the data table start address in SAR, the TGRA address
in DAR, and the data table size in CRA. CRB can be set to any value.
3. Locate the TPU transfer register information consecutively after the NDR transfer register
information.
4. Set the start address of the NDR transfer register information to the DTC vector address.
5. Set the bit corresponding to TGIA in DTCER to 1.
6. Set TGRA as an output compare register (output disabled) with TIOR, and enable the TGIA
interrupt with TIER.
7. Set the initial output value in PODR, and the next output value in NDR. Set bits in DDR and
NDER for which output is to be performed to 1. Using PCR, select the TPU compare match to
be used as the output trigger.
8. Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1, and start the TCNT count operation.
9. Each time a TGRA compare match occurs, the next output value is transferred to NDR and the
set value of the next output trigger period is transferred to TGRA. The activation source TGFA
flag is cleared.
10. When the specified number of transfers are completed (the TPU transfer CRA value is 0), the
TGFA flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and a TGIA interrupt request is sent to the
CPU. Termination processing should be performed in the interrupt handling routine.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 121 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.7.3
Software Activation
An example is shown in which the DTC is used to transfer a block of 128 bytes of data by means
of software activation. The transfer source address is H'1000 and the destination address is
H'2000. The vector number is H'60, so the vector address is H'04C0.
1. Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), incrementing destination
address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), block transfer mode (MD1 = 1, MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz =
0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one block transfer by one interrupt (CHNE =
0). Set the transfer source address (H'1000) in SAR, the destination address (H'2000) in DAR,
and 128 (H'8080) in CRA. Set 1 (H'0001) in CRB.
2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address (H'04C0).
3. Check that the SWDTE bit in DTVECR is 0. Check that there is currently no transfer activated
by software.
4. Write 1 to the SWDTE bit and the vector number (H'60) to DTVECR. The write data is H'E0.
5. Read DTVECR again and check that it is set to the vector number (H'60). If it is not, this
indicates that the write failed. This is presumably because an interrupt occurred between steps
3 and 4 and led to a different software activation. To activate this transfer, go back to step 3.
6. If the write was successful, the DTC is activated and a block of 128 bytes of data is transferred.
7. After the transfer, an SWDTEND interrupt occurs. The interrupt handling routine should clear
the SWDTE bit to 0 and perform other wrap-up processing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 122 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.8
Usage Notes
8.8.1
Module Stop Mode Setting
DTC operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial
setting is for DTC operation to be enabled. Register access is disabled by setting module stop
mode. Note that module stop mode cannot be set during DTC being activated. For details, refer to
section 20, Power-Down Modes.
8.8.2
On-Chip RAM
The MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers are all located in on-chip RAM. When the
DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must not be cleared to 0.
8.8.3
DTCE Bit Setting
For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR. If all interrupts
are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time (only at the initial setting) by
writing data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 123 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 124 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.1 summarizes the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions such as
input/output or interrupt input pins of on-chip peripheral modules.
Each I/O port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output, a data register
(DR) that stores output data, and a port register (PORT) used to read the pin states. The input-only
ports do not have a DR or DDR register.
Ports A to D have built-in input pull-up MOS functions and input pull-up MOS control registers
(PCR) to control the on/off state of input pull-up MOS.
Ports A to C include an open-drain control register (ODR) that controls the on/off state of the
output buffer PMOS.
All the I/O ports can drive a single TTL load and a 30 pF capacitive load.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 125 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.1
Port Functions
Port
Description
Port 1
General I/O port also
functioning as TPU_2,
TPU_1, and TPU_0
I/O pins, PPG output
pins, and interrupt
input pins
Port and
Other Functions Name
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2/IRQ1
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
P11/PO9/TIOCB0
P10/PO8/TIOCA0
Port 3
General I/O port also
functioning as SCI_0
and SCI_1, I/O pins
and interrupt input
pins
P37
P36
P35/SCK1/IRQ5
P34/RxD1
P33/TxD1
P32/SCK0/IRQ4
P31/RxD0
P30/TxD0
Port 4
General input port also
functioning as A/D
converter analog
inputs
P47/AN7
P46/AN6
P45/AN5
P44/AN4
P43/AN3
P42/AN2
P41/AN1
P40/AN0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 126 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Input/Output and
Output Type
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port
Description
Port 7
General I/O port also
functioning as TMR_0,
TMR_1, TMR_2, and
TMR_3 I/O pins
Port and
Other Functions Name
Input/Output and
Output Type
P77
P76
P75/TMO3
P74/TMO2
P73/TMO1
P72/TMO0
P71/TMCI23/TMRI23
P70/TMCI01/TMRI01
Port 9
General input port also
functioning as A/D
converter analog
inputs
P97/AN15
P96/AN14
P95/AN13
P94/AN12
P93/AN11
P92/AN10
P91/AN9
P90/AN8
Port A
General I/O port also
functioning as SCI_2
I/O pins
PA3/SCK2
Built-in input pull-up MOS
PA2/RxD2
Push-pull or open-drain output
selectable
PA1/TxD2
PA0
Port B
General I/O port also
functioning as TPU_5,
TPU_4, and TPU_3
I/O pins
PB7/TIOCB5
Built-in input pull-up MOS
PB6/TIOCA5
Push-pull or open-drain output
selectable
PB5/TIOCB4
PB4/TIOCA4
PB3/TIOCD3
PB2/TIOCC3
PB1/TIOCB3
PB0/TIOCA3
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 127 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port
Description
Port C
General I/O port also
functioning as SSU_0
and SSU_1 I/O pins
Port and
Other Functions Name
Input/Output and
Output Type
PC7/SCS1
Built-in input pull-up MOS
PC6/SSCK1
Push-pull or open-drain output
selectable
PC5/SSI1
PC4/SSO1
PC3/SCS0
PC2/SSCK0
PC1/SSI0
PC0/SSO0
Port D
General I/O port
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
Port F
General I/O port also
functioning as interrupt
input pins, an A/D
converter start trigger
input pin, and a
system clock output
pin (φ)
PF7/φ
PF6
PF5
PF4
PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3
PF2
PF1
PF0/IRQ2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 128 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Built-in input pull-up MOS
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1
Port 1
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port and has the following registers.
• Port 1 data direction register (P1DDR)
• Port 1 data register (P1DR)
• Port 1 register (PORT1)
9.1.1
Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)
P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port 1.
P1DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P17DDR
0
W
6
P16DDR
0
W
5
P15DDR
0
W
When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O
port, setting these bits to 1 makes the corresponding
port 1 pin an output pin. Clearing these bits to 0
makes the pin an input pin.
4
P14DDR
0
W
3
P13DDR
0
W
2
P12DDR
0
W
1
P11DDR
0
W
0
P10DDR
0
W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 129 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.2
Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)
P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 1 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P17DR
0
R/W
6
P16DR
0
R/W
Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is
specified as a general purpose I/O port.
5
P15DR
0
R/W
4
P14DR
0
R/W
3
P13DR
0
R/W
2
P12DR
0
R/W
1
P11DR
0
R/W
0
P10DR
0
R/W
9.1.3
Port 1 Register (PORT1)
PORT1 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states.
PORT1 cannot be modified.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P17
R
6
P16
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are
set to 1, the P1DR values are read. If a port 1 read is
performed while P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin
states are read.
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
5
P15
4
P14
3
P13
2
P12
1
P11
0
P10
Note:
*
R
R
R
R
Determined by the states of pins P17 to P10.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 130 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.4
Pin Functions
Port 1 pins also function as TPU I/O pins, PPG output pins, and interrupt input pins. The
correspondence between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below.
Table 9.2
P17 Pin Function
TPU channel 2
setting*
P17DDR
NDER15
Pin function
Output
Input or initial value


0
1
1

0
1
TIOCB2 output
P17 input
P17 output
PO15 output
TIOCB2 input
TCLKD input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.3
P16 Pin Function
TPU channel 2
setting*
P16DDR
NDER14
Pin function
Output
Input or initial value



0
1
TIOCA2 output
P16 input
P16 output
PO14 output
0
1
1
TIOCA2 input
IRQ1 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 131 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.4
P15 Pin Function
TPU channel 1
setting*
P15DDR
NDER13
Pin function
Output
Input or initial value


0
1
1

0
1
TIOCB1 output
P15 input
P15 output
PO13 output
TIOCB1 input
TCLKC input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.5
P14 Pin Function
TPU channel 1
setting*
P14DDR
NDER12
Pin function
Output
Input or initial value


0
1
1

0
1
TIOCA1 output
P14 input
P14 output
PO12 output
TIOCA1 input
IRQ0 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.6
P13 Pin Function
TPU channel 0
setting*
P13DDR
NDER11
Pin function
Output
Input or initial value


0
1
1

0
1
TIOCD0 output
P13 input
P13 output
PO11 output
TIOCD0 input
TCLKB input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 132 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.7
P12 Pin Function
TPU channel 0
setting*
P12DDR
NDER10
Pin function
Output
Input or initial value


0
1
1

0
1
TIOCC0 output
P12 input
P12 output
PO10 output
TIOCC0 input
TCLKA input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.8
P11 Pin Function
TPU channel 0
setting*
P11DDR
NDER9
Pin function
Output
Input or initial value


0
1
1

0
1
TIOCB0 output
P11 input
P11 output
PO9 output
TIOCB0 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.9
P10 Pin Function
TPU channel 0
setting*
P10DDR
NDER8
Pin function
Output
Input or initial value



0
1
TIOCA0 output
P10 input
P10 output
PO8 output
0
1
1
TIOCA0 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 133 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2
Port 3
Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port and has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
Port 3 data direction register (P3DDR)
Port 3 data register (P3DR)
Port 3 register (PORT3)
Port 3 open-drain control register (P3ODR)
9.2.1
Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)
P3DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port 3.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P37DDR
0
W
6
P36DDR
0
W
5
P35DDR
0
W
When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O
port, setting these bits to 1 makes the corresponding
port 3 pin an output pin. Clearing these bits to 0
makes the pin an input pin.
4
P34DDR
0
W
3
P33DDR
0
W
2
P32DDR
0
W
1
P31DDR
0
W
0
P30DDR
0
W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 134 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.2
Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)
P3DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 3 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P37DR
0
R/W
6
P36DR
0
R/W
Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is
specified as a general I/O port.
5
P35DR
0
R/W
4
P34DR
0
R/W
3
P33DR
0
R/W
2
P32DR
0
R/W
1
P31DR
0
R/W
0
P30DR
0
R/W
9.2.3
Port 3 Register (PORT3)
PORT3 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P37
R
6
P36
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
If a port 3 read is performed while P3DDR bits are
set to 1, the P3DR values are read. If a port 3 read is
performed while P3DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin
states are read.
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
5
P35
4
P34
3
P33
2
P32
1
P31
0
P30
Note:
*
R
R
R
R
Determined by the states of pins P37 to P30.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 135 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.4
Port 3 Open-Drain Control Register (P3ODR)
P3ODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the output type of port 3.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P37ODR
0
R/W
6
P36ODR
0
R/W
5
P35ODR
0
R/W
4
P34ODR
0
R/W
When a pin is specified as an output port, setting the
corresponding bits to 1 specifies pin output to opendrain and the input pull-up MOS to the off state.
Clearing these bits to 0 specifies that to push-pull
output.
3
P33ODR
0
R/W
2
P32ODR
0
R/W
1
P31ODR
0
R/W
0
P30ODR
0
R/W
9.2.5
Pin Functions
Port 3 pins also function as SCI_0 I/O pins and interrupt input pins. The correspondence between
the register specification and the pin functions is shown below.
Table 9.10 P37 Pin Function
P37DDR
Pin function
0
1
P37 input
P37 output
Table 9.11 P36 Pin Function
P36DDR
Pin function
0
1
P36 input
P36 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 136 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.12 P35 Pin Function
CKE1 in SCR_1
0
C/A in SMR_1
0
Pin function



SCK1 input
1
0
1



P35 input
P35 output
SCK1 output
SCK1 output
CKE0 in SCR_1
P35DDR
1
0
1
IRQ5 input*
Note:
*
When used as an external interrupt input pin, do not use it for another function.
Table 9.13 P34 Pin Function
RE in SCR_1
0
0
1

P34 input
P34 output
RxD1 input
P34DDR
Pin function
1
Table 9.14 P33 Pin Function
TE in SCR_1
0
0
1

P33 input
P33 output
TxD1 output
P33DDR
Pin function
1
Table 9.15 P32 Pin Function
CKE1 in SCR_0
0
0
1






P32 input
P32 output
SCK0 output
SCK0 output
SCK0 input
C/A in SMR_0
0
CKE0 in SCR_0
P32DDR
Pin function
1
0
1
1
IRQ4 input*
Note:
*
When used as an external interrupt input pin, do not use it for another function.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 137 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.16 P31 Pin Function
RE in SCR_0
0
0
1

P31 input
P31 output
RxD0 output
P31DDR
Pin function
1
Table 9.17 P30 Pin Function
TE in SCR_0
0
0
1

P30 input
P30 output
TxD0 output
P30DDR
Pin function
9.3
1
Port 4
Port 4 is an input-only port. Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins. Port 4
has the following register.
• Port 4 register (PORT4)
9.3.1
Port 4 Register (PORT4)
PORT4 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port 4 pin states.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P47
R
6
P46
Undefined*
Undefined*
The pin states are always read when a port 4 read is
performed.
5
P45
R
4
P44
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
3
P43
2
P42
1
P41
0
P40
Note:
*
R
R
R
R
Determined by the states of pins P47 to P40.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 138 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4
Port 7
Port 7 is an 8-bit I/O port and has the following registers.
• Port 7 data direction register (P7DDR)
• Port 7 data register (P7DR)
• Port 7 register (PORT7)
9.4.1
Port 7 Data Direction Register (P7DDR)
P7DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the
pins of port 7.
P7DDR cannot be read, if it is, an undefined value will be read.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P77DDR
0
W
6
P76DDR
0
W
5
P75DDR
0
W
When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O
port, setting these bits to 1 makes the corresponding
port 7 pin an output pin. Clearing these bits to 0
makes the pin an input pin.
4
P74DDR
0
W
3
P73DDR
0
W
2
P72DDR
0
W
1
P71DDR
0
W
0
P70DDR
0
W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 139 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.2
Port 7 Data Register (P7DR)
P7DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 7 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P77DR
0
R/W
6
P76DR
0
R/W
Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is
specified as a general purpose I/O port.
5
P75DR
0
R/W
4
P74DR
0
R/W
3
P73DR
0
R/W
2
P72DR
0
R/W
1
P71DR
0
R/W
0
P70DR
0
R/W
9.4.3
Port 7 Register (PORT7)
PORT7 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states.
PORT7 cannot be modified.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P77
R
6
P76
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
If a port 7 read is performed while P7DDR bits are
set to 1, the P7DR values are read. If a port 7 read is
performed while P7DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin
states are read.
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
5
P75
4
P74
3
P73
2
P72
1
P71
0
P70
Note:
*
R
R
R
R
Determined by the states of pins P77 to P70.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 140 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.4
Pin Functions
Port 7 pins also function as TMR_3, TMR_2, TMR_1, and TMR_0 I/O pins. The correspondence
between the register specification and the pin functions is shown below.
Table 9.18 P77 Pin Function
P77DDR
Pin function
0
1
P77 input
P77 output
Table 9.19 P76 Pin Function
P76DDR
Pin function
0
1
P76 input
P76 output
Table 9.20 P75 Pin Function
OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_3
P75DDR
Pin function
All 0
Any of 1
0
1

P75 input
P75 output
TMO3 output
Table 9.21 P74 Pin Function
OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_2
P74DDR
Pin function
All 0
Any of 1
0
1

P74 input
P74 output
TMO2 output
Table 9.22 P73 Pin Function
OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_1
P73DDR
Pin function
All 0
Any of 1
0
1

P73 input
P73 output
TMO1 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 141 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.23 P72 Pin Function
OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_0
All 0
0
1

P72 input
P72 output
TMO0 output
P72DDR
Pin function
Any of 1
Table 9.24 P71 Pin Function
P71DDR
Pin function
0
1
P71 input
P71 output
TMCI23 input/TMRI23 input
Table 9.25 P70 Pin Function
P70DDR
Pin function
0
1
P70 input
P70 output
TMCI01 input/TMRI01 input
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 142 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5
Port 9
Port 9 is an input-only port. Port 9 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins. Port 9
has the following register.
• Port 9 register (PORT9)
9.5.1
Port 9 Register (PORT9)
PORT9 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port 9 pin states.
PORT9 cannot be modified.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
P97
R
6
P96
Undefined*
Undefined*
The pin states are always read when a port 9 read is
performed.
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
5
P95
4
P94
3
P93
2
P92
1
P91
0
P90
Note:
*
R
R
R
R
Determined by the states of pins P97 to P90.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 143 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6
Port A
Port A is a 4-bit I/O port that also has other functions. Port A has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
Port A data direction register (PADDR)
Port A data register (PADR)
Port A register (PORTA)
Port A pull-up MOS control register (PAPCR)
Port A open-drain control register (PAODR)
9.6.1
Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)
PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of
port A are used for input or output.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

Undefined

Reserved
These bits are read as undefined value and cannot
be modified.
3
PA3DDR
0
W
2
PA2DDR
0
W
1
PA1DDR
0
W
0
PA0DDR
0
W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 144 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O
port, setting these bits to 1 makes the corresponding
port A pin an output pin. Clearing these bits to 0
makes the pin an input pin.
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.2
Port A Data Register (PADR)
PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port A pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

Undefined

Reserved
These bits are read as an undefined value and
cannot be modified.
3
PA3DR
0
R/W
2
PA2DR
0
R/W
1
PA1DR
0
R/W
0
PA0DR
0
R/W
9.6.3
Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is
specified as a general purpose I/O port.
Port A Register (PORTA)
PORTA is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port A pin states.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

Undefined

Reserved
These bits are read as an undefined value.
3
PA3
2
PA2
1
PA1
0
PA0
Note:
*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
R
If a port A read is performed while PADDR bits are
set to 1, the PADR values are read. If a port A read is
performed while PADDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin
states are read.
R
Determined by the states of pins PA3 to PA0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 145 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.4
Port A Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PAPCR)
PAPCR is an 8-bit register that controls the input pull-up MOS function.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7 to4

Undefined

Reserved
These bits are read as an undefined value and
cannot be modified.
3
PA3PCR
0
R/W
2
PA2PCR
0
R/W
1
PA1PCR
0
R/W
0
PA0PCR
0
R/W
9.6.5
When a pin is specified as an input port, setting the
corresponding bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS
for that pin.
Port A Open-Drain Control Register (PAODR)
PAODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the output type of port A.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

Undefined

Reserved
These bits are read as an undefined value and
cannot be modified.
3
PA3ODR
0
R/W
2
PA2ODR
0
R/W
1
PA1ODR
0
R/W
0
PA0ODR
0
R/W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 146 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
When a pin is specified as an output port, setting the
corresponding bits to 1 specifies pin output to opendrain and the input pull-up MOS to the off state.
Clearing these bits to 0 specifies that to push-pull
output.
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.6
Pin Functions
Port A pins also function as SCI_2 I/O pins. The correspondence between the register
specification and the pin functions is shown below.
Table 9.26 PA3 Pin Function
CKE1 in SCR_2
0
C/A in SMR_2
0
Pin function



SCK2 input
1
0
1



PA3 input
PA3 output
SCK2 output
SCK2 output
CKE0 in SCR_2
PA3DDR
1
0
1
Table 9.27 PA2 Pin Function
RE in SCR_2
PA2DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1

PA2 input
PA2 output
RxD2 input
Table 9.28 PA1 Pin Function
TE in SCR_2
PA1DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1

PA1 input
PA1 output
TxD2 output
Table 9.29 PA0 Pin Function
PA0DDR
Pin function
0
1
PA0 input
PA0 output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 147 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7
Port B
Port B is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. Port B has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
Port B data direction register (PBDDR)
Port B data register (PBDR)
Port B register (PORTB)
Port B pull-up MOS control register (PBPCR)
Port B open-drain control register (PBODR)
9.7.1
Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)
PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of
port B are used for input or output.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PB7DDR
0
W
6
PB6DDR
0
W
5
PB5DDR
0
W
When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O
port, setting these bits to 1 makes the corresponding
port 1 pin an output pin. Clearing these bits to 0
makes the pin an input pin.
4
PB4DDR
0
W
3
PB3DDR
0
W
2
PB2DDR
0
W
1
PB1DDR
0
W
0
PB0DDR
0
W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 148 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.2
Port B Data Register (PBDR)
PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port B pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PB7DR
0
R/W
6
PB6DR
0
R/W
Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is
specified as a general purpose I/O port.
5
PB5DR
0
R/W
4
PB4DR
0
R/W
3
PB3DR
0
R/W
2
PB2DR
0
R/W
1
PB1DR
0
R/W
0
PB0DR
0
R/W
9.7.3
Port B Register (PORTB)
PORTB is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port B pin states.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PB7
R
6
PB6
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
If a port B read is performed while PBDDR bits are
set to 1, the PBDR values are read. If a port B read is
performed while PBDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin
states are read.
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
5
PB5
4
PB4
3
PB3
2
PB2
1
PB1
0
PB0
Note:
*
R
R
R
R
Determined by the states of pins PB7 to PB0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 149 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.4
Port B Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PBPCR)
PBPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the on/off state of input pull-up MOS of
port B.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PB7PCR
0
R/W
6
PB6PCR
0
R/W
5
PB5PCR
0
R/W
When a pin is specified as an input port, setting the
corresponding bits to 1 turns on the input pull-up
MOS for that pin.
4
PB4PCR
0
R/W
3
PB3PCR
0
R/W
2
PB2PCR
0
R/W
1
PB1PCR
0
R/W
0
PB0PCR
0
R/W
9.7.5
Port B Open-Drain Control Register (PBODR)
PBODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the output type of port B.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PB7ODR
0
R/W
6
PB6ODR
0
R/W
5
PB5ODR
0
R/W
4
PB4ODR
0
R/W
When a pin function is specified as an output port,
setting the corresponding bits to 1 specifies pin
output as open-drain and the input pull-up MOS to
the off state. Clearing these bits to 0 specifies pushpull output.
3
PB3ODR
0
R/W
2
PB2ODR
0
R/W
1
PB1ODR
0
R/W
0
PB0ODR
0
R/W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 150 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.6
Pin Functions
Port B pins also function as TPU I/O pins. The correspondence between the register specification
and the pin functions is shown below.
Table 9.30 PB7 Pin Function
TPU channel 5 setting*
Output

0
1
TIOCB5 output
PB7 input
PB7 output
PB7DDR
Pin function
Input or initial value
TIOCB5 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.31 PB6 Pin Function
TPU channel 5 setting*
Output

0
1
TIOCA5 output
PB6 input
PB6 output
PB6DDR
Pin function
Input or initial value
TIOCA5 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.32 PB5 Pin Function
TPU channel 4 setting*
PB5DDR
Pin function
Output
Input or initial value

0
1
TIOCB4 output
PB5 input
PB5 output
TIOCB4 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 151 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.33 PB4 Pin Function
TPU channel 4 setting*
Output

0
1
TIOCA4 output
PB4 input
PB4 output
PB4DDR
Pin function
Input or initial value
TIOCA4 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.34 PB3 Pin Function
TPU channel 3 setting*
Output

0
1
TIOCD3 output
PB3 input
PB3 output
PB3DDR
Pin function
Input or initial value
TIOCD3 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.35 PB2 Pin Function
TPU channel 3 setting*
Output

0
1
TIOCC3 output
PB2 input
PB2 output
PB2DDR
Pin function
Input or initial value
TIOCC3 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Table 9.36 PB1 Pin Function
TPU channel 3 setting*
Output
Pin function
Input or initial value

0
1
TIOCB3 output
PB1 input
PB1 output
PB1DDR
TIOCB3 input
Note:
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 152 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.37 PB0 Pin Function
TPU channel 3 setting*
Output

0
1
TIOCA3 output
PB0 input
PB0 output
PB0DDR
Pin function
Input or initial value
TIOCA3 input
Note:
9.8
*
For details on the TPU channel specification, refer to section 10, 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU).
Port C
Port C is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. Port C has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
Port C data direction register (PCDDR)
Port C data register (PCDR)
Port C register (PORTC)
Port C pull-up MOS control register (PCPCR)
Port C open-drain control register (PCODR)
9.8.1
Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR)
PCDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of
port C are used for input or output.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PC7DDR
0
W
6
PC6DDR
0
W
5
PC5DDR
0
W
When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O
port, setting these bits to 1 makes the corresponding
port 1 pin an output pin. Clearing these bits to 0
makes the pin an input pin.
4
PC4DDR
0
W
3
PC3DDR
0
W
2
PC2DDR
0
W
1
PC1DDR
0
W
0
PC0DDR
0
W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 153 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8.2
Port C Data Register (PCDR)
PCDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port C pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PC7DR
0
R/W
6
PC6DR
0
R/W
Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is
specified as a general purpose I/O port.
5
PC5DR
0
R/W
4
PC4DR
0
R/W
3
PC3DR
0
R/W
2
PC2DR
0
R/W
1
PC1DR
0
R/W
0
PC0DR
0
R/W
9.8.3
Port C Register (PORTC)
PORTC is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port C pin states.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PC7
R
6
PC6
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
If a port C read is performed while PCDDR bits are
set to 1, the PCDR values are read. If a port C read
is performed while PCDDR bits are cleared to 0, the
pin states are read.
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
5
PC5
4
PC4
3
PC3
2
PC2
1
PC1
0
PC0
Note:
*
R
R
R
R
Determined by the states of pins PC7 to PC0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 154 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8.4
Port C Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PCPCR)
PCPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the on/off state of input pull-up MOS of
port C.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PC7PCR
0
R/W
6
PC6PCR
0
R/W
5
PC5PCR
0
R/W
When a pin is specified as an input port, setting the
corresponding bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS
for that pin.
4
PC4PCR
0
R/W
3
PC3PCR
0
R/W
2
PC2PCR
0
R/W
1
PC1PCR
0
R/W
0
PC0PCR
0
R/W
9.8.5
Port C Open-Drain Control Register (PCODR)
PCODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies an output type of port C.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PC7ODR
0
R/W
6
PC6ODR
0
R/W
5
PC5ODR
0
R/W
When a pin is specified as an output port, setting the
corresponding bits to 1 specifies pin output as opendrain and the input pull-up MOS to the off state.
Clearing these bits to 0 specifies push-pull output.
4
PC4ODR
0
R/W
3
PC3ODR
0
R/W
2
PC2ODR
0
R/W
1
PC1ODR
0
R/W
0
PC0ODR
0
R/W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 155 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8.6
Pin Functions
Port C pins also function as SSU_1 and SSU_0 I/O pins. The correspondence between the register
specification and the pin functions is shown below.
Table 9.38 PC7 Pin Function
CSS1
0
CSS0
1
0
0
1
0
1



PC7 input
PC7 output
SCS1 input
SCS1
input/output
auto switch
SCS1 output
PC7DDR
Pin function
1
Table 9.39 PC6 Pin Function
MSS
0
SCKS
1
0
1
0
0
1



PC6 input
PC6 output
SSCK1 input
SSCK1 output
Setting
prohibited
PC6DDR
Pin function
1
Table 9.40 PC5 Pin Function
MSS
0
BIDE
0
1
TE
0
0
SCS1 input
Pin function
0

RE
PC5DDR
1

1

1

PC5
input
0
PC5
output
0
0
1
SSI1
output
SSI1
Hi-Z
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 156 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
1

1

1
0
1


0
1
SSI1
input
PC5
input
PC5
output

PC5
input
PC5
output
PC5
input
PC5
output
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.41 PC4 Pin Function
MSS
0
BIDE
0
0

1
0
0

1
1
1

TE
1
0

1
SCS1 input
Pin
function
0
0
RE
PC4DDR

1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1

1

0

1
PC4 PC4 SSO1 PC4 PC4 SSO1 PC4 PC4 SSO1 Setting SSO1 SSO1 SSO1
input output input input output output input output input pro- output Hi-Z output
hibited
Table 9.42 PC3 Pin Function
CSS1
0
CSS0
PC3DDR
Pin function
0
1
1
0
1
0
1



PC3 input
PC3 output
SCS0 input
SCS0
input/output
auto switch
SCS0 output
Table 9.43 PC2 Pin Function
MSS
0
SCKS
PC2DDR
Pin function
0
1
1
1
0
0
1



PC2 input
PC2 output
SSCK0 input
SSCK0 output
Setting
prohibited
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 157 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.44 PC1 Pin Function
MSS
0
BIDE
0
1
TE
0

PC1
input
PC1
output
0

1


1
1
0
1
0
SCS0 input
Pin function
0

RE
PC1DDR
1

1
0

1

0
1
SSI0
input
PC1
input
PC1
output

0
1
SSI0
output
SSI0
Hi-Z
PC1
input
PC1
output
PC1
input
PC1
output
Table 9.45 PC0 Pin Function
MSS
0
BIDE
0
0

1
1
0
0

1
1

TE
0
SCS0 input
Pin function
0
0
RE
PC0DDR

1
1

1

1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1

0
1

PC0 PC0 SSO0 PC0 PC0 SSO0 PC0 PC0 SSO0 Setting SSO0 SSO0 SSO0
input output input input output output input output input pro- output Hi-Z output
hibited
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 158 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.9
Port D
Port D is an 8-bit I/O port that also functions as the realtime input port pins.
The realtime input port stores the pin states of port D in PDRTIDR using the IRQ3 pin as the
trigger input. The falling, rising, or both edges of the IRQ3 pin can be used as a trigger timing.
Port D has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
Port D data direction register (PDDDR)
Port D data register (PDDR)
Port D register (PORTD)
Port D pull-up MOS control register (PDPCR)
Port D realtime input data register (PDRTIDR)
9.9.1
Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR)
PDDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of
port D are used for input or output.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PD7DDR
0
W
6
PD6DDR
0
W
5
PD5DDR
0
W
When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O
port, setting these bits to 1 makes the corresponding
port 1 pin an output pin. Clearing these bits to 0
makes the pin an input pin.
4
PD4DDR
0
W
3
PD3DDR
0
W
2
PD2DDR
0
W
1
PD1DDR
0
W
0
PD0DDR
0
W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 159 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.9.2
Port D Data Register (PDDR)
PDDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port D pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PD7DR
0
R/W
6
PD6DR
0
R/W
Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is
specified as a general purpose I/O port.
5
PD5DR
0
R/W
4
PD4DR
0
R/W
3
PD3DR
0
R/W
2
PD2DR
0
R/W
1
PD1DR
0
R/W
0
PD0DR
0
R/W
9.9.3
Port D Register (PORTD)
PORTD is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port D pin states.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PD7
R
6
PD6
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
If a port D read is performed while PDDDR bits are
set to 1, the PDDR values are read. If a port D read
is performed while PDDDR bits are cleared to 0, the
pin states are read.
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
Undefined*
Undefined*
R
5
PD5
4
PD4
3
PD3
2
PD2
1
PD1
0
PD0
Note:
*
R
R
R
R
Determined by the states of pins PD7 to PD0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 160 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.9.4
Port D Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PDPCR)
PDPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls on/off states of the input pull-up MOS
of port D.
Bit
Bit Name
7
PD7PCR
0
R/W
6
PD6PCR
0
R/W
5
PD5PCR
0
R/W
4
PD4PCR
0
R/W
3
PD3PCR
0
R/W
2
PD2PCR
0
R/W
1
PD1PCR
0
R/W
0
PD0PCR
0
R/W
9.9.5
Initial Value
R/W
Description
When the pin is in its input state, the input pull-up
MOS of the input pin is on when the corresponding
bits are set to 1.
Port D RealTime Input Data Register (PDRTIDR)
The realtime input port stores the pin states of port D in PDRTIDR using the IRQ3 pin as the
trigger input. The falling, rising, or both edges of the IRQ3 pin can be specified as a trigger timing
by bits 7 and 6 in the IRQ sense control register L (ISCRL). For details of this setting, see section
5.3.3, IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL).
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
PDRTIDR7
0
R/W
6
PDRTIDR6
0
R/W
5
PDRTIDR5
0
R/W
4
PDRTIDR4
0
R/W
3
PDRTIDR3
0
R/W
2
PDRTIDR2
0
R/W
1
PDRTIDR1
0
R/W
0
PDRTIDR0
0
R/W
Description
Stores pin states using the IRQ3 pin as a trigger
input.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 161 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10
Port F
Port F is an 8-bit I/O port that also has other functions. Port F has the following registers.
• Port F data direction register (PFDDR)
• Port F data register (PFDR)
• Port F register (PORTF)
9.10.1
Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR)
PFDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify whether the pins of port
F are used for input or output.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PF7DDR
0
W
When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O
port, setting this bit to 1 makes the PF7 pin a φ
output pin. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the pin an
input pin.
6
PF6DDR
0
W
5
PF5DDR
0
W
4
PF4DDR
0
W
When a pin is specified as a general purpose I/O
port, setting these bits to 1 makes the corresponding
port F pin an output pin. Clearing these bits to 0
makes the pin an input pin.
3
PF3DDR
0
W
2
PF2DDR
0
W
1
PF1DDR
0
W
0
PF0DDR
0
W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 162 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10.2
Port F Data Register (PFDR)
PFDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port F pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R/W
Reserved
6
PF6DR
0
R/W
5
PF5DR
0
R/W
4
PF4DR
0
R/W
3
PF3DR
0
R/W
2
PF2DR
0
R/W
1
PF1DR
0
R/W
0
PF0DR
0
R/W
The write value should always be 0.
9.10.3
Output data for a pin is stored when the pin is
specified as a general purpose I/O port.
Port F Register (PORTF)
PORTF is an 8-bit read-only register that shows port F pin states.
PORTF cannot be modified.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PF7
R
6
PF6
Undefined*
Undefined*
PF5
Undefined*
R
If a port F read is performed while PFDDR bits are
set to 1, the PFDR values are read. If a port F read is
performed while PFDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin
states are read.
4
PF4
Undefined*
R
3
PF3
R
2
PF2
Undefined*
Undefined*
PF1
Undefined*
R
PF0
Undefined*
R
5
1
0
Note:
*
R
R
Determined by the states of pins PF7 to PF0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 163 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10.4
Pin Functions
Port F is an 8-bit I/O port. Port F pins also function as external interrupt input, IRQ3 and IRQ2,
A/D trigger input (ADTRG), and system clock output (φ).
Table 9.46 PF7 Pin Function
PF7DDR
Pin function
0
1
PF7 input
φ output
Table 9.47 PF6 Pin Function
PF6DDR
Pin function
0
1
PF6 input
PF6 output
Table 9.48 PF5 Pin Function
PF5DDR
Pin function
0
1
PF5 input
PF5 output
Table 9.49 PF4 Pin Function
PF4DDR
Pin function
0
1
PF4 input
PF4 output
Table 9.50 PF3 Pin Function
PF3DDR
Pin function
0
1
PF3 input
PF3 output
ADTRG input*1
IRQ3 input*2
Notes: 1. ADTRG input when TRGS0 = TRGS1 = 1.
2. When used as an external interrupt input pin, do not use as an I/O pin for another
function. This pin also functions as the trigger input for the realtime input port.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 164 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.51 PF2 Pin Function
PF2DDR
Pin function
0
1
PF2 input
PF2 output
Table 9.52 PF1 Pin Function
PF1DDR
Pin function
0
1
PF1 input
PF1 output
Table 9.53 PF0 Pin Function
PF0DDR
Pin function
0
1
PF0 input
PF0 output
IRQ2 input*
Note:
*
When used as an external interrupt input pin, do not use as an I/O pin for another
function.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 165 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 166 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
This LSI has an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) comprised of six 16-bit timer channels.
The function list of the 16-bit timer unit and its block diagram are shown in table 10.1 and figure
10.1, respectively.
10.1
Features
• Maximum 16-pulse input/output
• Selection of 8 counter input clocks for each channel
• The following operations can be set for each channel:
 Waveform output at compare match
 Input capture function
 Counter clear operation
 Synchronous operation:
Multiple timer counters (TCNT) can be written to simultaneously
Simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture is possible
Register simultaneous input/output is possible by synchronous counter operation
 A maximum 15-phase PWM output is possible in combination with synchronous operation
• Buffer operation settable for channels 0 and 3
• Phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1, 2, 4, and 5
• Cascaded operation
• Fast access via internal 16-bit bus
• 26 interrupt sources
• Automatic transfer of register data
• Programmable pulse generator (PPG) output trigger can be generated
• A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated
• Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 167 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.1 TPU Functions
Item
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5
Count clock
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
TCLKA
TCLKB
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
φ/1024
φ/4096
TCLKA
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKC
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
TCLKA
TCLKC
TCLKD
General registers
(TGR)
TGRA_0
TGRB_0
TGRA_1
TGRB_1
TGRA_2
TGRB_2
TGRA_3
TGRB_3
TGRA_4
TGRB_4
TGRA_5
TGRB_5
General registers/
buffer registers
TGRC_0
TGRD_0


TGRC_3
TGRD_3


I/O pins
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
Counter clear
function
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture


Compare 0 output
match
1 output
output
Toggle
output
Input capture
function
Synchronous
operation
PWM mode
Phase counting
mode
Buffer operation



Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 168 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100

Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Item
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
DTC
TGR
activation compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
TGR
compare
match or
input capture
A/D
TGRA_0
converter compare
trigger
match or
input capture
TGRA_1
compare
match or
input capture
TGRA_2
compare
match or
input capture
TGRA_3
compare
match or
input capture
TGRA_4
compare
match or
input capture
TGRA_5
compare
match or
input capture
PPG
trigger
TGRA_0/
TGRB_0
compare
match or
input capture
TGRA_1/
TGRB_1
compare
match or
input capture
TGRA_2/
TGRB_2
compare
match or
input capture
TGRA_3/

TGRB_3
compare
match or
input capture
Interrupt
sources
5 sources
4 sources
4 sources
5 sources
4 sources
4 sources
• Compare
match or
input
capture 0A
• Compare
match or
input
capture 1A
• Compare
match or
input
capture 2A
• Compare
match or
input
capture 3A
• Compare
match or
input
capture 4A
• Compare
match or
input
capture 5A
• Compare
match or
input
capture 0B
• Compare
match or
input
capture 1B
• Compare
match or
input
capture 2B
• Compare
match or
input
capture 3B
• Compare
match or
input
capture 4B
• Compare
match or
input
capture 5B
• Overflow
• Overflow
• Compare
match or
• Underflow
input
capture 3C
• Overflow
• Compare
match or
• Underflow
input
capture 0C
• Underflow
• Compare
match or
input
capture 0D
• Compare
match or
input
capture 3D
• Overflow
• Overflow

• Overflow
• Underflow
[Legend]
: Possible
: Not possible
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 169 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
[Legend]
TSTR: Timer start register
TSYR: Timer synchro register
TCR: Timer control register
TMDR: Timer mode register
TGRD
TGRC
TGRB
TGRB
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
TCNT
TGRA
TCNT
TGRA
Module data bus
Bus
interface
TGRB
TGRD
TGRB
TGRB
TGRC
TCNT
TGRA
TCNT
TCNT
PPG output trigger signal
TGRA
TSTR
TSR
TSR
TIER
TIER
TSR
TIOR
TIORH TIORL
A/D converter conversion start signal
Timer I/O control registers (H, L)
Timer interrupt enable register
Timer status register
Timer general registers (A, B, C, D)
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of TPU
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 170 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Interrupt request signals
Channel 3: TGIA_3
TGIB_3
TGIC_3
TGID_3
TCIV_3
Channel 4: TGIA_4
TGIB_4
TCIV_4
TCIU_4
Channel 5: TGIA_5
TGIB_5
TCIV_5
TCIU_5
Internal data bus
TGRA
TSR
TIER
TSR
TSYR
TIER
TSR
TIER
TIOR
TIOR
Control logic
TIOR
TIER
TMDR
TIORH TIORL
TCR
TMDR
TCR
TMDR
Channel 4
TIOR (H, L):
TIER:
TSR:
TGR (A, B, C, D):
TCR
Channel 5
Common
Channel 0
Channel 2:
Control logic for channels 0 to 2
Channel 1:
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
Channel 1
Input/output pins
Channel 0:
TMDR
Channel 2
External clock:
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
φ/1024
φ/4096
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
TCR
Clock input
Internal clock:
TMDR
Channel 5:
TCR
Channel 4:
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
Control logic for channels 3 to 5
Channel 3:
TMDR
Input/output pins
TCR
Channel 3
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Interrupt request signals
Channel 3: TGIA_0
TGIB_0
TGIC_0
TGID_0
TCIV_0
Channel 4: TGIA_1
TGIB_1
TCIV_1
TCIU_1
Channel 5: TGIA_2
TGIB_2
TCIV_2
TCIU_2
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 10.2 TPU Pins
Channel
Symbol
I/O
Function
All
TCLKA
Input
External clock A input pin
(Channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode A phase input)
TCLKB
Input
External clock B input pin
(Channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode B phase input)
TCLKC
Input
External clock C input pin
(Channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode A phase input)
TCLKD
Input
External clock D input pin
(Channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode B phase input)
TIOCA0
I/O
TGRA_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCB0
I/O
TGRB_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCC0
I/O
TGRC_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCD0
I/O
TGRD_0 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCA1
I/O
TGRA_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCB1
I/O
TGRB_1 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
0
1
2
3
4
5
TIOCA2
I/O
TGRA_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCB2
I/O
TGRB_2 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCA3
I/O
TGRA_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCB3
I/O
TGRB_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCC3
I/O
TGRC_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCD3
I/O
TGRD_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCA4
I/O
TGRA_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCB4
I/O
TGRB_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCA5
I/O
TGRA_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCB5
I/O
TGRB_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 171 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3
Register Descriptions
The TPU has the following registers. To distinguish registers in each channel, an underscore and
the channel number are added as a suffix to the register name; TCR for channel 0 is expressed as
TCR_0.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timer control register_0 (TCR_0)
Timer mode register_0 (TMDR_0)
Timer I/O control register H_0 (TIORH_0)
Timer I/O control register L_0 (TIORL_0)
Timer interrupt enable register_0 (TIER_0)
Timer status register_0 (TSR_0)
Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0)
Timer general register A_0 (TGRA_0)
Timer general register B_0 (TGRB_0)
Timer general register C_0 (TGRC_0)
Timer general register D_0 (TGRD_0)
Timer control register_1 (TCR_1)
Timer mode register_1 (TMDR_1)
Timer I/O control register _1 (TIOR_1)
Timer interrupt enable register_1 (TIER_1)
Timer status register_1 (TSR_1)
Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1)
Timer general register A_1 (TGRA_1)
Timer general register B_1 (TGRB_1)
Timer control register_2 (TCR_2)
Timer mode register_2 (TMDR_2)
Timer I/O control register_2 (TIOR_2)
Timer interrupt enable register_2 (TIER_2)
Timer status register_2 (TSR_2)
Timer counter_2 (TCNT_2)
Timer general register A_2 (TGRA_2)
Timer general register B_2 (TGRB_2)
Timer control register_3 (TCR_3)
Timer mode register_3 (TMDR_3)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 172 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timer I/O control register H_3 (TIORH_3)
Timer I/O control register L_3 (TIORL_3)
Timer interrupt enable register_3 (TIER_3)
Timer status register_3 (TSR_3)
Timer counter_3 (TCNT_3)
Timer general register A_3 (TGRA_3)
Timer general register B_3 (TGRB_3)
Timer general register C_3 (TGRC_3)
Timer general register D_3 (TGRD_3)
Timer control register_4 (TCR_4)
Timer mode register_4 (TMDR_4)
Timer I/O control register _4 (TIOR_4)
Timer interrupt enable register_4 (TIER_4)
Timer status register_4 (TSR_4)
Timer counter_4 (TCNT_4)
Timer general register A_4 (TGRA_4)
Timer general register B_4 (TGRB_4)
Timer control register_5 (TCR_5)
Timer mode register_5 (TMDR_5)
Timer I/O control register_5 (TIOR_5)
Timer interrupt enable register_5 (TIER_5)
Timer status register_5 (TSR_5)
Timer counter_5 (TCNT_5)
Timer general register A_5 (TGRA_5)
Timer general register B_5 (TGRB_5)
Common Register:
• Timer start register (TSTR)
• Timer synchro register (TSYR)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 173 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.1
Timer Control Register (TCR)
The TCR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the TCNT operation for each
channel. The TPU has a total of six TCR registers, one for each channel (channels 5 to 0). TCR
register settings should be conducted only when TCNT operation is stopped.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial value
R/W
Description
7
6
5
CCLR2
CCLR1
CCLR0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Counter Clear 2 to 0
4
3
CKEG1
CKEG0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Clock Edge 1 and 0
These bits select the TCNT counter clearing source.
See tables 10.3 and 10.4 for details.
These bits select the input clock edge. When the
input clock is counted using both edges, the input
clock period is halved (e.g. φ/4 both edges = φ/2
rising edge). If phase counting mode is used on
channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, this setting is ignored and
the phase counting mode setting has priority. Internal
clock edge selection is valid when the input clock is
φ/4 or slower. This setting is ignored if the input clock
is φ/1, or when overflow/underflow of another
channel is selected.
00: Count at rising edge
01: Count at falling edge
1×: Count at both edges
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
2
1
0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 174 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Time Prescaler 2 to 0
These bits select the TCNT counter clock. The clock
source can be selected independently for each
channel. See tables 10.5 to 10.10 for details.
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.3 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 0 and 3)
Channel
Bit 7
CCLR2
Bit 6
CCLR1
Bit 5
CCLR0
Description
0, 3
0
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input
capture
0
TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input
capture
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation*
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRC compare match/input
2
capture*
0
TCNT cleared by TGRD compare match/input
capture*2
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
synchronous operation*1
1
1
0
1
Notes: 1. Synchronous operation is set by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1.
2. When TGRC or TGRD is used as a buffer register, TCNT is not cleared because the
buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur.
Table 10.4 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 1, 2, 4, and 5)
Channel
Bit 7
Bit 6
Reserved*2 CCLR1
Bit 5
CCLR0
Description
1, 2, 4, 5
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input
capture
0
TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input
capture
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
synchronous operation*1
0
1
Notes: 1. Synchronous operation is selected by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1.
2. Bit 7 is reserved in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. It is always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 175 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.5 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 0)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
0
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
1
1
0
1
0
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
Table 10.6 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 1)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
1
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
Counts on TCNT2 overflow/underflow
1
1
0
1
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 176 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.7 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 2)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
2
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
1
1
0
1
0
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode.
Table 10.8 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 3)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
3
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4096
1
1
0
1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 177 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.9 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 4)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
4
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
1
0
1
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
1
Counts on TCNT5 overflow/underflow
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode.
Table 10.10 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 5)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
5
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
1
1
0
1
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 178 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.2
Timer Mode Register (TMDR)
The TMDR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that are used to set the operating mode of
each channel. The TPU has six TMDR registers, one for each channel. TMDR register settings
should be changed only when TCNT operation is stopped.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
5
BFB
0
R/W
Buffer Operation B
Specifies whether TGRB is to operate in the normal
way, or TGRB and TGRD are to be used together for
buffer operation. When TGRD is used as a buffer
register, TGRD input capture/output compare is not
generated.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRD, bit
5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
0: TGRB operates normally
1: TGRB and TGRD used together for buffer
operation
4
BFA
0
R/W
Buffer Operation A
Specifies whether TGRA is to operate in the normal
way, or TGRA and TGRC are to be used together for
buffer operation. When TGRC is used as a buffer
register, TGRC input capture/output compare is not
generated.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRC, bit
4 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
0: TGRA operates normally
1: TGRA and TGRC used together for buffer
operation
3
2
1
0
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Modes 3 to 0
These bits are used to set the timer operating mode.
MD3 is a reserved bit. In a write, it should always be
written with 0. See table 10.11 for details.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 179 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.11 MD3 to MD0
Bit 3
1
MD3*
Bit 2
MD2*2
Bit 1
MD1
Bit 0
MD0
Description
0
0
0
0
Normal operation
1
Reserved
0
PWM mode 1
1
PWM mode 2
0
Phase counting mode 1
1
Phase counting mode 2
1
1
0
1
1
×
×
0
Phase counting mode 3
1
Phase counting mode 4
×

[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Notes: 1. MD3 is a reserved bit. In a write, it should always be written with 0.
2. Phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. In this case, 0 should always
be written to MD2.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 180 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.3
Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)
The TIOR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the TGR registers. The TPU
has eight TIOR registers, two each for channels 0 and 3, and one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Care is required as TIOR is affected by the TMDR setting. The initial output specified by TIOR is
valid when the counter is stopped (the CST bit in TSTR is cleared to 0). Note also that, in PWM
mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is cleared to 0 is specified.
When TGRC or TGRD is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the register
operates as a buffer register.
• TIORH_5, TIOR_4, TIOR_3, TIORH_2, TIOR_1, TIOR_0
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
value
R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
I/O Control B3 to B0
3
2
1
0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
I/O Control A3 to A0
Specify the function of TGRB.
Specify the function of TGRA.
• TIORL_3, TIORL_0
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
value
R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
I/O Control D3 to D0
3
2
1
0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
I/O Control C3 to C0
Specify the function of TGRD.
Specify the function of TGRC.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 181 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.12 TIORH_0 (Channel 0)
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_0
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCB0 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
Input
capture
register
1
Capture input source is the TIOCB0 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCB0 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCB0 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is channel 1/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down*
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Note: * When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_1 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT_1
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 182 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.13 TIORL_0 (Channel 0)
Description
Bit 7
IOD3
Bit 6
IOD2
Bit 5
IOD1
Bit 4
IOD0
TGRD_0
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register*2
1
TIOCD0 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
Input
capture
register*2
Capture input source is the TIOCD0 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCD0 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCD0 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is channel 1/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down*
1
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_1 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT_1
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRD_0 is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 183 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.14 TIOR_1 (Channel 1)
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_1
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCB1 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
Input
capture
register
1
Capture input source is the TIOCB1 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCB1 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCB1 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
TGRC_0 compare match/ input capture
Input capture at generation of TGRC_0 compare
match/input capture
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 184 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.15 TIOR_2 (Channel 2)
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_2
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCB2 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
×
0
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is the TIOCB2 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCB2 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCB2 pin
Input capture at both edges
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 185 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.16 TIORH_3 (Channel 3)
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_3
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCB3 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
Input
capture
register
1
Capture input source is the TIOCB3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCB3 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCB3 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is channel 4/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down*
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Note: * When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_4 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT_4
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 186 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.17 TIORL_3 (Channel 3)
Description
Bit 7
IOD3
Bit 6
IOD2
Bit 5
IOD1
Bit 4
IOD0
TGRD_3
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register*2
1
TIOCD3 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
Input
capture
register*2
Capture input source is the TIOCD3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCD3 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCD3 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is channel 4/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down*
1
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_4 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT_4
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRD_3 is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 187 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.18 TIOR_4 (Channel 4)
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_4
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCB4 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
Input
capture
register
1
Capture input source is the TIOCB4 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCB4 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCB4 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is TGRC_3 compare
match/input capture
Input capture at generation of TGRC_3 compare
match/input capture
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 188 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.19 TIOR_5 (Channel 5)
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_5
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCB5 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
×
0
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is the TIOCB5 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCB5 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCB5 pin
Input capture at both edges
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 189 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.20 TIORH_0 (Channel 0)
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_0
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCA0 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
Input
capture
register
1
Capture input source is the TIOCA0 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCA0 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCA0 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is channel 1/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 190 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.21 TIORL_0 (Channel 0)
Description
Bit 3
IOC3
Bit 2
IOC2
Bit 1
IOC1
Bit 0
IOC0
TGRC_0
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register*
1
TIOCC0 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
Input
capture
register*
Capture input source is the TIOCC0 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCC0 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCC0 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is channel 1/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Note: * When the BFA bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRC_0 is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 191 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.22 TIOR_1 (Channel 1)
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_1
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCA1 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
Input
capture
register
1
Capture input source is the TIOCA1 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCA1 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCA1 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is TGRA_0 compare
match/input capture
Input capture at generation of channel 0/TGRA_0
compare match/input capture
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 192 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.23 TIOR_2 (Channel 2)
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_2
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCA2 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
×
0
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is the TIOCA2 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCA2 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCA2 pin
Input capture at both edges
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 193 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.24 TIORH_3 (Channel 3)
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_3
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCA3 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
Input
capture
register
1
Capture input source is the TIOCA3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCA3 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCA3 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is channel 4/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 194 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.25 TIORL_3 (Channel 3)
Description
Bit 3
IOC3
Bit 2
IOC2
Bit 1
IOC1
Bit 0
IOC0
TGRC_3
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register*
1
TIOCC3 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
Input
capture
register*
Capture input source is the TIOCC3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCC3 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCC3 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is channel 4/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Note: * When the BFA bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRC_3 is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 195 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.26 TIOR_4 (Channel 4)
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_4
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCA4 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
Input
capture
register
1
Capture input source is the TIOCA4 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCA4 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCA4 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
×
×
Capture input source is TGRA_3 compare
match/input capture
Input capture at generation of TGRA_3 compare
match/input capture
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 196 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.27 TIOR_5 (Channel 5)
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_5
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCA5 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 0
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 1
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
×
0
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is the TIOCA5 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is the TIOCA5 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
×
Capture input source is the TIOCA5 pin
Input capture at both edges
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 197 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.4
Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)
The TIER registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control enabling or disabling of
interrupt requests for each channel. The TPU has six TIER registers, one for each channel.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial value
R/W
Description
7
TTGE
0
R/W
A/D Conversion Start Request Enable
Enables or disables generation of A/D conversion
start requests by TGRA input capture/compare
match.
0: A/D conversion start request generation disabled
1: A/D conversion start request generation enabled
6

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
5
TCIEU
0
R/W
Underflow Interrupt Enable
Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIU) by the
TCFU flag when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 in
channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always
read as 0 and cannot be modified.
0: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU enabled
4
TCIEV
0
R/W
Overflow Interrupt Enable
Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by the
TCFV flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1.
0: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled
3
TGIED
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable D
Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGID) by the
TGFD bit when the TGFD bit in TSR is set to 1 in
channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is
always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
0: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit enabled
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 198 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial value
R/W
Description
2
TGIEC
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable C
Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIC) by the
TGFC bit when the TGFC bit in TSR is set to 1 in
channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is
always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
0: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit enabled
1
TGIEB
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable B
Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the
TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1.
0: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit enabled
0
TGIEA
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable A
Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the
TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1.
0: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit enabled
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 199 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.5
Timer Status Register (TSR)
The TSR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that indicate the status of each channel. The
TPU has six TSR registers, one for each channel.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial value
R/W
Description
7
TCFD
1
R
Count Direction Flag
Status flag that shows the direction in which TCNT
counts in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 7 is reserved. It is always
read as 1 and cannot be modified.
0: TCNT counts down
1: TCNT counts up
6

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
5
TCFU
0
R/(W)
Underflow Flag
Status flag that indicates that TCNT underflow has
occurred when channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 are set to
phase counting mode. Only 0 can be written, for flag
clearing.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always
read as 0 and cannot be modified.
[Setting condition]
•
When the TCNT value underflows (changes from
H'0000 to H'FFFF)
[Clearing condition]
•
4
TCFV
0
R/(W)
When 0 is written to TCFU after reading
TCFU = 1
Overflow Flag
Status flag that indicates that TCNT overflow has
occurred. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
[Setting condition]
•
When the TCNT value overflows (changes from
H'FFFF to H'0000 )
[Clearing condition]
•
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 200 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
When 0 is written to TCFV after reading
TCFV = 1
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial value
R/W
Description
3
TGFD
0
R/(W)
Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRD
input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3.
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. In channels 1,
2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0
and cannot be modified.
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRD and TGRD is functioning
as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRD by
input capture signal and TGRD is functioning as
input capture register
[Clearing conditions]
2
TGFC
0
R/(W)
•
When DTC is activated by TGID interrupt and the
DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFD after reading
TGFD = 1
Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRC
input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3.
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. In channels 1,
2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0
and cannot be modified.
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRC and TGRC is functioning
as output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRC by
input capture signal and TGRC is functioning as
input capture register
[Clearing conditions]
•
When DTC is activated by TGIC interrupt and the
DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFC after reading
TGFC = 1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 201 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial value
R/W
Description
1
TGFB
0
R/(W)
Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRB
input capture or compare match. Only 0 can be
written, for flag clearing.
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRB and TGRB is functioning as
output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by
input capture signal and TGRB is functioning as
input capture register
[Clearing conditions]
0
TGFA
0
R/(W)
•
When DTC is activated by TGIB interrupt and the
DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFB after reading
TGFB = 1
Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRA
input capture or compare match. Only 0 can be
written, for flag clearing.
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRA and TGRA is functioning as
output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by
input capture signal and TGRA is functioning as
input capture register
[Clearing conditions]
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 202 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
•
When DTC is activated by TGIA interrupt and the
DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFA after reading
TGFA = 1
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.6
Timer Counter (TCNT)
The TCNT registers are 16-bit readable/writable counters. The TPU has six TCNT counters, one
for each channel.
The TCNT counters are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode.
The TCNT counters cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit
unit.
10.3.7
Timer General Register (TGR)
The TGR registers are dual function 16-bit readable/writable registers, functioning as either output
compare or input capture registers. The TPU has 16 TGR registers, four each for channels 0 and 3
and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be
designated for operation as buffer registers. The TGR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units;
they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. TGR buffer register combinations are TGRA–
TGRC and TGRB–TGRD.
10.3.8
Timer Start Register (TSTR)
TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects operation/stoppage for channels 0 to 5.
When setting the operating mode in TMDR or setting the count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT
counter.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
5
4
3
2
1
0
CST5
CST4
CST3
CST2
CST1
CST0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Counter Start 5 to 0 (CST5 to CST0)
These bits select operation or stoppage for TCNT.
If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the
TIOC pin designated for output, the counter stops but
the TIOC pin output compare output level is retained.
If TIOR is written to when the CST bit is cleared to 0,
the pin output level will be changed to the set initial
output value.
0: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 count operation is stopped
1: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 performs count operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 203 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.9
Timer Synchro Register (TSYR)
TSYR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects independent operation or synchronous
operation for the channel 0 to 5 TCNT counters. A channel performs synchronous operation when
the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to 1.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 0
R/W
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
5
4
3
2
1
0
SYNC5
SYNC4
SYNC3
SYNC2
SYNC1
SYNC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Timer Synchro 0 to 5
These bits are used to select whether operation is
independent of or synchronized with other channels.
When synchronous operation is selected, the TCNT
synchronous presetting of multiple channels, and
synchronous clearing by counter clearing on another
channel, are possible.
To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at
least two channels must be set to 1. To set
synchronous clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit ,
the TCNT clearing source must also be set by means
of bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in TCR.
0: TCNT_0 to TCNT_5 operates independently
(TCNT presetting/clearing is unrelated to
other channels)
1: TCNT_0 to TCNT_5 performs synchronous
operation
TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous
clearing is possible
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 204 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4
Operation
10.4.1
Basic Functions
Each channel has a TCNT and TGR register. TCNT performs up-counting, and is also capable of
free-running operation, periodic counting, and external event counting.
Each TGR can be used as an input capture register or output compare register.
Counter Operation: When one of bits CST5 to CST0 is set to 1 in TSTR, the TCNT counter for
the corresponding channel begins counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic
counter, for example.
1. Example of count operation setting procedure
Figure 10.2 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure.
Operation selection
Select counter clock
[1]
Periodic counter
Select counter clearing source
Free-running counter
[2]
[3]
Select output compare register
Set period
[4]
Start count operation
[5]
<Periodic counter>
Start count operation
<Free-running counter>
[1] Select the counter
clock with bits
TPSC2 to TPSC0 in
TCR. At the same
time, select the
input clock edge
with bits CKEG1
and CKEG0 in TCR.
[2] For periodic counter
operation, select the
TGR to be used as
the TCNT clearing
source with bits
CCLR2 to CCLR0 in
TCR.
[3] Designate the TGR
selected in [2] as an
output compare
register by means of
TIOR.
[4] Set the periodic
counter cycle in the
TGR selected in [2].
[5] Set the CST bit in
TSTR to 1 to start
the counter
operation.
Figure 10.2 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 205 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
2. Free-running count operation and periodic count operation
Immediately after a reset, the TPU’s TCNT counters are all designated as free-running
counters. When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1 the corresponding TCNT counter starts upcount operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000),
the TCFV bit in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at
this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from
H'0000.
Figure 10.3 illustrates free-running counter operation.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'0000
Time
CST bit
TCFV
Figure 10.3 Free-Running Counter Operation
When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the
relevant channel performs periodic count operation. The TGR register for setting the period is
designated as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected
by means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts
up-count operation as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When
the count value matches the value in TGR, the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared
to H'0000.
If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an
interrupt. After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000.
Figure 10.4 illustrates periodic counter operation.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 206 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Counter cleared by TGR
compare match
TCNT value
TGR
H'0000
Time
CST bit
Flag cleared by software or
DTC activation
TGF
Figure 10.4 Periodic Counter Operation
Waveform Output by Compare Match: The TPU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the
corresponding output pin using compare match.
1. Example of setting procedure for waveform output by compare match
Figure 10.5 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare
match.
Output selection
Select waveform output mode
[1]
Set output timing
[2]
Start count operation
[3]
[1] Select initial value 0 output or 1 output, and
compare match output value 0 output, 1 output,
or toggle output, by means of TIOR. The set
initial value is output at the TIOC pin unit the
first compare match occurs.
[2] Set the timing for compare match generation in
TGR.
[3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Waveform output>
Figure 10.5 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 207 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
2. Examples of waveform output operation
Figure 10.6 shows an example of 0 output/1 output.
In this example TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been
made such that 1 is output by compare match A, and 0 is output by compare match B. When
the set level and the pin level coincide, the pin level does not change.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
TGRA
TGRB
Time
H'0000
No change
No change
1 output
TIOCA
No change
TIOCB
No change
0 output
Figure 10.6 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation
Figure 10.7 shows an example of toggle output.
In this example, TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing on
compare match B), and settings have been made such that the output is toggled by both
compare match A and compare match B.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGRB compare match
H'FFFF
TGRB
TGRA
Time
H'0000
Toggle output
TIOCB
Toggle output
TIOCA
Figure 10.7 Example of Toggle Output Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 208 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC
pin input edge.
Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge. For channels 0, 1, 3,
and 4, it is also possible to specify another channel’s counter input clock or compare match signal
as the input capture source.
Note: When another channel’s counter input clock is used as the input capture input for channels
0 and 3, φ/1 should not be selected as the counter input clock used for input capture input.
Input capture will not be generated if φ/1 is selected.
1. Example of input capture operation setting procedure
Figure 10.8 shows an example of the input capture operation setting procedure.
Input selection
Select input capture input
Start count
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register by
means of TIOR, and select rising edge, falling
edge, or both edges as the input capture source
and input signal edge.
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
[1]
[2]
<Input capture operation>
Figure 10.8 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 209 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
2. Example of input capture operation
Figure 10.9 shows an example of input capture operation.
In this example both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input
capture input edge, the falling edge has been selected as the TIOCB pin input capture input
edge, and counter clearing by TGRB input capture has been designated for TCNT.
Counter cleared by TIOCB
input (falling edge)
TCNT value
H'0180
H'0160
H'0010
H'0005
Time
H'0000
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0005
H'0160
H'0010
TIOCB
TGRB
H'0180
Figure 10.9 Example of Input Capture Operation
10.4.2
Synchronous Operation
In synchronous operation, the values in a number of TCNT counters can be rewritten
simultaneously (synchronous presetting). Also, a number of TCNT counters can be cleared
simultaneously by making the appropriate setting in TCR (synchronous clearing).
Synchronous operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base.
Channels 0 to 5 can all be designated for synchronous operation.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 210 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.10 shows an example of the
synchronous operation setting procedure.
Synchronous operation
selection
Set synchronous
operation
[1]
Synchronous presetting
Set TCNT
Synchronous clearing
[2]
Clearing
source generation
channel?
No
Yes
<Synchronous presetting>
Select counter
clearing source
[3]
Set synchronous
counter clearing
[4]
Start count
[4]
Start count
[5]
<Counter clearing>
<Synchronous clearing>
[1] Set to 1 the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous
operation.
[2] When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is
written to, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters.
[3] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare,
etc.
[4] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing
source.
[5] Set to 1 the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels, to start the count operation.
Figure 10.10 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 211 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of Synchronous Operation: Figure 10.11 shows an example of synchronous operation.
In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 0 to
2, TGRB_0 compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and
synchronous clearing has been set for the channel 1 and 2 counter clearing sources.
Three-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins TIOCA0, TIOCA1, and TIOCA2. At this
time, synchronous presetting, and synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match, are
performed for channel 0 to 2 TCNT counters, and the data set in TGRB_0 is used as the PWM
cycle.
For details of PWM modes, see section 10.4.5, PWM Modes.
Synchronous clearing by TGRB_0 compare match
TCNT0 to TCNT2 values
TGRB_0
TGRB_1
TGRA_0
TGRB_2
TGRA_1
TGRA_2
Time
H'0000
TIOCA_0
TIOCA_1
TIOCA_2
Figure 10.11 Example of Synchronous Operation
10.4.3
Buffer Operation
Buffer operation, provided for channels 0 and 3, enables TGRC and TGRD to be used as buffer
registers.
Buffer operation differs depending on whether TGR has been designated as an input capture
register or as a compare match register.
Table 10.28 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 212 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.28 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation
Channel
0
3
Timer General Register
Buffer Register
TGRA_0
TGRC_0
TGRB_0
TGRD_0
TGRA_3
TGRC_3
TGRB_3
TGRD_3
• When TGR is an output compare register
When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is
transferred to the timer general register.
This operation is illustrated in figure 10.12.
Compare match signal
Timer general
register
Buffer register
Comparator
TCNT
Figure 10.12 Compare Match Buffer Operation
• When TGR is an input capture register
When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to TGR and the value previously
held in the timer general register is transferred to the buffer register.
This operation is illustrated in figure 10.13.
Input capture
signal
Buffer register
Timer general
register
TCNT
Figure 10.13 Input Capture Buffer Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 213 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.14 shows an example of the buffer
operation setting procedure.
Buffer operation
Select TGR function
[1]
Set buffer operation
[2]
Start count
[3]
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register or
output compare register by means of TIOR.
[2] Designate TGR for buffer operation with bits
BFA and BFB in TMDR.
[3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 start the count
operation.
<Buffer operation>
Figure 10.14 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 214 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Buffer Operation:
1. When TGR is an output compare register
Figure 10.15 shows an operation example in which PWM mode 1 has been designated for
channel 0, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. The settings used
in this example are TCNT clearing by compare match B, 1 output at compare match A, and 0
output at compare match B.
As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs the output changes and the
value in buffer register TGRC is simultaneously transferred to timer general register TGRA.
This operation is repeated each time that compare match A occurs.
For details of PWM modes, see section 10.4.5, PWM Modes.
TCNT value
TGRB_0
H'0520
H'0450
H'0200
TGRA_0
Time
H'0000
TGRC_0 H'0200
H'0450
H'0520
Transfer
TGRA_0
H'0200
H'0450
TIOCA
Figure 10.15 Example of Buffer Operation (1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 215 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
2. When TGR is an input capture register
Figure 10.16 shows an operation example in which TGRA has been designated as an input
capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC.
Counter clearing by TGRA input capture has been set for TCNT, and both rising and falling
edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge.
As buffer operation has been set, when the TCNT value is stored in TGRA upon the
occurrence of input capture A, the value previously stored in TGRA is simultaneously
transferred to TGRC.
TCNT value
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0532
TGRC
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0F07
Figure 10.16 Example of Buffer Operation (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 216 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.4
Cascaded Operation
In cascaded operation, two 16-bit counters for different channels are used together as a 32-bit
counter.
This function works by counting the channel 1 (channel 4) counter clock upon overflow/underflow
of TCNT_2 (TCNT_5) as set in bits TPSC0 to TPSC2 in TCR.
Underflow occurs only when the lower 16-bit TCNT is in phase-counting mode.
Table 10.29 shows the register combinations used in cascaded operation.
Note: When phase counting mode is set for channel 1 or 4, the counter clock setting is invalid
and the counters operates independently in phase counting mode.
Table 10.29 Cascaded Combinations
Combination
Upper 16 Bits
Lower 16 Bits
Channels 1 and 2
TCNT_1
TCNT_2
Channels 4 and 5
TCNT_4
TCNT_5
Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 10.17 shows an example of the
setting procedure for cascaded operation.
Cascaded operation
Set cascading
[1]
Start count
[2]
[1] Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in the channel 1
(channel 4) TCR to B'111 to select TCNT_2
(TCNT_5) overflow/underflow counting.
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR for the upper and lower
channel to 1 to start the count operation.
<Cascaded operation>
Figure 10.17 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 217 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of Cascaded Operation: Figure 10.18 illustrates the operation when TCNT_2
overflow/underflow counting has been set for TCNT_1, when TGRA_1 and TGRA_2 have been
designated as input capture registers, and when TIOC pin rising edge has been selected.
When a rising edge is input to the TIOCA1 and TIOCA2 pins simultaneously, the upper 16 bits of
the 32-bit data are transferred to TGRA_1, and the lower 16 bits to TGRA_2.
TCNT_1
clock
TCNT_1
H'03A1
H'03A2
TCNT_2
clock
TCNT_2
H'FFFF
H'0001
H'0000
TIOCA2,
TIOCA1
TGRA_1
H'03A2
TGRA_2
H'0000
Figure 10.18 Example of Cascaded Operation (1)
Figure 10.19 illustrates the operation when TCNT_2 overflow/underflow counting has been set for
TCNT_1 and phase counting mode has been designated for channel 2.
TCNT_1 is incremented by TCNT_2 overflow and decremented by TCNT_2 underflow.
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCNT_2
TCNT_1
FFFD
FFFE
FFFF
0000
0000
0001
0002
0001
0000
0001
Figure 10.19 Example of Cascaded Operation (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 218 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
FFFF
0000
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.5
PWM Modes
In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. The output level can be selected
as 0, 1, or toggle output in response to a compare match of each TGR.
TGR registers settings can be used to output a PWM waveform in the range of 0% to 100% duty
cycle.
Designating TGR compare match as the counter clearing source enables the period to be set in that
register. All channels can be designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is
also possible.
There are two PWM modes, as described below.
• PWM mode 1
PWM output is generated from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins by pairing TGRA with TGRB and
TGRC with TGRD. The output specified by bits IOA3 to IOA0 and IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR is
output from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins at compare matches A and C, and the output
specified by bits IOB3 to IOB0 and IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR is output at compare matches B
and D. The initial output value is the value set in TGRA or TGRC. If the set values of paired
TGRs are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs.
In PWM mode 1, a maximum 8-phase PWM output is possible.
• PWM mode 2
PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty cycle
registers. The output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon
counter clearing by a duty cycle register compare match, the output value of each pin is the
initial value set in TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty cycle registers are identical, the
output value does not change when a compare match occurs.
In PWM mode 2, a maximum 15-phase PWM output is possible in combination use with
synchronous operation.
The correspondence between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 10.30.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 219 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.30 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins
Output Pins
Channel
0
Registers
PWM Mode 1
PWM Mode 2
TGRA_0
TIOCA0
TIOCA0
TGRB_0
TGRC_0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TGRD_0
1
TGRA_1
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
TGRB_1
2
TGRA_2
TGRA_3
TIOCA2
TIOCA3
TGR4A_4
TIOCC3
TGRA_5
TGRB_5
Note:
*
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
TGR4B_4
5
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TGRD_3
4
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
TGRB_3
TGRC_3
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
TGRB_2
3
TIOCC0
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for the TGR register in which the period is
set.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 220 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10.20 shows an example of the PWM mode
setting procedure.
PWM mode
Select counter clock
[1]
Select counter clearing source
[2]
Select waveform output level
[3]
Set TGR
[4]
Set PWM mode
[5]
Start count
[6]
[1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to
TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the
input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0
in TCR.
[2] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to select the
TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source.
[3] Use TIOR to designate the TGR as an output
compare register, and select the initial value and
output value.
[4] Set the cycle in the TGR selected in [2], and set
the duty in the other the TGR.
[5] Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR.
[6] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 start the count
operation.
<PWM mode>
Figure 10.20 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 221 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Examples of PWM Mode Operation: Figure 10.21 shows an example of PWM mode 1
operation.
In this example, TGRA compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA
initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value.
In this case, the value set in TGRA is used as the period, and the values set in the TGRB registers
are used as the duty cycle levels.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by
TGRA compare match
TGRA
TGRB
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
Figure 10.21 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 222 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10.22 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation.
In this example, synchronous operation is designated for channels 0 and 1, TGRB_1 compare
match is set as the TCNT clearing source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the
output value of the other TGR registers (TGRA_0 to TGRD_0, TGRA_1), outputting a 5-phase
PWM waveform.
In this case, the value set in TGRB_1 is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs are
used as the duty cycle levels.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by
TGRB_1 compare match
TGRB_1
TGRA_1
TGRD_0
TGRC_0
TGRB_0
TGRA_0
H'0000
Time
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
TIOCC0
TIOCD0
TIOCA1
Figure 10.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 223 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10.23 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty cycle and 100% duty cycle
in PWM mode.
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
rewritten
H'0000
Time
0% duty
TIOCA
Output does not change when cycle register and duty register
compare matches occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB rewritten
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
H'0000
Time
100% duty
TIOCA
Output does not change when cycle register and duty
register compare matches occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
TGRB rewritten
Time
H'0000
100% duty
TIOCA
0% duty
Figure 10.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 224 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.6
Phase Counting Mode
In phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and
TCNT is incremented/decremented accordingly. This mode can be set for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
When phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and
TCNT operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 and bits
CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. However, the functions of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR, and of
TIOR, TIER, and TGR, are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be
used.
This can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input.
If overflow occurs when TCNT is counting up, the TCFV flag in TSR is set; if underflow occurs
when TCNT is counting down, the TCFU flag is set.
The TCFD bit in TSR is the count direction flag. Reading the TCFD flag reveals whether TCNT is
counting up or down.
Table 10.31 shows the correspondence between external clock pins and channels.
Table 10.31 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins
External Clock Pins
Channels
A-Phase
B-Phase
When channel 1 or 5 is set to phase counting mode
TCLKA
TCLKB
When channel 2 or 4 is set to phase counting mode
TCLKC
TCLKD
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 225 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10.24 shows an example of the
phase counting mode setting procedure.
[1] Select phase counting mode with bits MD3 to
MD0 in TMDR.
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
Phase counting mode
Select phase counting mode
[1]
Start count
[2]
<Phase counting mode>
Figure 10.24 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure
Examples of Phase Counting Mode Operation: In phase counting mode, TCNT counts up or
down according to the phase difference between two external clocks. There are four modes,
according to the count conditions.
1. Phase counting mode 1
Figure 10.25 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 10.32
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10.25 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 226 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.32 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
Up-count
High level
Low level
Low level
High level
Down-count
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
[Legend]
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
2. Phase counting mode 2
Figure 10.26 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 10.33
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10.26 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 227 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.33 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Up-count
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
[Legend]
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 228 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Down-count
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
3. Phase counting mode 3
Figure 10.27 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 10.34
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Down-count
Up-count
Time
Figure 10.27 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation
Table 10.34 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Up-count
High level
Down-count
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Don’t care
Low level
Don’t care
[Legend]
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 229 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
4. Phase counting mode 4
Figure 10.28 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 10.35
summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Down-count
Up-count
Time
Figure 10.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation
Table 10.35 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
Up-count
High level
Low level
Low level
Don’t care
High level
Down-count
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
[Legend]
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 230 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Don’t care
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Phase Counting Mode Application Example: Figure 10.29 shows an example in which channel
1 is in phase counting mode, and channel 1 is coupled with channel 0 to input servo motor 2-phase
encoder pulses in order to detect position or speed.
Channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse A-phase and B-phase are input
to TCLKA and TCLKB.
Channel 0 operates with TCNT counter clearing by TGRC_0 compare match; TGRA_0 and
TGRC_0 are used for the compare match function and are set with the speed control period and
position control period. TGRB_0 is used for input capture, with TGRB_0 and TGRD_0 operating
in buffer mode. The channel 1 counter input clock is designated as the TGRB_0 input capture
source, and the pulse widths of 2-phase encoder 4-multiplication pulses are detected.
TGRA_1 and TGRB_1 for channel 1 are designated for input capture, and channel 0 TGRA_0 and
TGRC_0 compare matches are selected as the input capture source and store the up/down-counter
values for the control periods.
This procedure enables the accurate detection of position and speed.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 231 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel 1
TCLKA
TCLKB
Edge
detection
circuit
TCNT_1
TGRA_1
(speed period capture)
TGRB_1
(speed period capture)
TCNT_0
TGRA_0
(speed control period)
+
-
TGRC_0
(position control period)
+
-
TGRB_0 (pulse width capture)
TGRD_0 (buffer operation)
Channel 0
Figure 10.29 Phase Counting Mode Application Example
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 232 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.5
Interrupt Sources
There are three kinds of TPU interrupt source; TGR input capture/compare match, TCNT
overflow, and TCNT underflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disabled
bit, allowing the generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually.
When an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the
corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The
interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0.
Relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller, however the priority order
within a channel is fixed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Table 10.36 lists the TPU interrupt sources.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 233 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.36 TPU Interrupts
Channel
Name
Interrupt Source
DTC
Interrupt Flag Activation
0
TGIA_0
TGRA_0 input capture/compare match
TGFA_0
Possible
TGIB_0
TGRB_0 input capture/compare match
TGFB_0
Possible
TGIC_0
TGRC_0 input capture/compare match
TGFC_0
Possible
TGID_0
TGRD_0 input capture/compare match
TGFD_0
Possible
TCIV_0
TCNT_0 overflow
TCFV_0
Not possible
TGIA_1
TGRA_1 input capture/compare match
TGFA_1
Possible
TGIB_1
TGRB_1 input capture/compare match
TGFB_1
Possible
TCIV_1
TCNT_1 overflow
TCFV_1
Not possible
TCIU_1
TCNT_1 underflow
TCFU_1
Not possible
TGIA_2
TGRA_2 input capture/compare match
TGFA_2
Possible
TGIB_2
TGRB_2 input capture/compare match
TGFB_2
Possible
TCIV_2
TCNT_2 overflow
TCFV_2
Not possible
TCIU_2
TCNT_2 underflow
TCFU_2
Not possible
TGIA_3
TGRA_3 input capture/compare match
TGFA_3
Possible
TGIB_3
TGRB_3 input capture/compare match
TGFB_3
Possible
TGIC_3
TGRC_3 input capture/compare match
TGFC_3
Possible
TGID_3
TGRD_3 input capture/compare match
TGFD_3
Possible
TCIV_3
TCNT_3 overflow
TCFV_3
Not possible
TGIA_4
TGRA_4 input capture/compare match
TGFA_4
Possible
TGIB_4
TGRB_4 input capture/compare match
TGFB_4
Possible
TCIV_4
TCNT_4 overflow
TCFV_4
Not possible
TCIU_4
TCNT_4 underflow
TCFU_4
Not possible
1
2
3
4
5
TGIA_5
TGRA_5 input capture/compare match
TGFA_5
Possible
TGIB_5
TGRB_5 input capture/compare match
TGFB_5
Possible
TCIV_5
TCNT_5 overflow
TCFV_5
Not possible
TCIU_5
TCNT_5 underflow
TCFU_5
Not possible
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 234 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is
set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare
match on a particular channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The
TPU has 16 input capture/compare match interrupts, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each
for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Overflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the
TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt
request is cleared by clearing the TCFV flag to 0. The TPU has six overflow interrupts, one for
each channel.
Underflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEU bit in TIER is set to 1 when the
TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT underflow on a channel. The interrupt
request is cleared by clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The TPU has four underflow interrupts, one
each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
10.6
DTC Activation
The DTC can be activated by the TGR input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel. For
details, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
A total of 16 TPU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DTC activation sources,
four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
10.7
A/D Converter Activation
The A/D converter can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match for a channel.
If the TTGE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGFA flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a
TGRA input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to begin A/D conversion is
sent to the A/D converter. If the TPU conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D
converter side at this time, A/D conversion is begun.
In the TPU, a total of six TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as A/D
converter conversion start sources, one for each channel.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 235 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.8
Operation Timing
10.8.1
Input/Output Timing
TCNT Count Timing: Figure 10.30 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and
figure 10.31 shows TCNT count timing in external clock operation.
φ
Internal clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N-1
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 10.30 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation
φ
External clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N-1
N
N+1
Figure 10.31 Count Timing in External Clock Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 236 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
N+2
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Output Compare Output Timing: A compare match signal is generated in the final state in
which TCNT and TGR match (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated).
When a compare match signal is generated, the output value set in TIOR is output at the output
compare output pin. After a match between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not
generated until the TCNT input clock is generated.
Figure 10.32 shows output compare output timing.
φ
TCNT
input clock
N+1
N
TCNT
N
TGR
Compare
match signal
TIOC pin
Figure 10.32 Output Compare Output Timing
Input Capture Signal Timing: Figure 10.33 shows input capture signal timing.
φ
Input capture
input
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
N
N+1
N+2
N
N+2
Figure 10.33 Input Capture Input Signal Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 237 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture: Figure 10.34 shows the
timing when counter clearing on compare match is specified, and figure 10.35 shows the timing
when counter clearing on input capture is specified.
φ
Compare
match signal
Counter
clear signal
TCNT
N
TGR
N
H'0000
Figure 10.34 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match)
φ
Input capture
signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
N
TGR
Figure 10.35 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 238 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Buffer Operation Timing: Figures 10.36 and 10.37 show the timing in buffer operation.
φ
TCNT
n
n+1
Compare
match signal
TGRA,
TGRB
n
TGRC,
TGRD
N
N
Figure 10.36 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)
φ
Input capture
signal
TCNT
N
TGRA,
TGRB
n
TGRC,
TGRD
N+1
N
N+1
n
N
Figure 10.37 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)
10.8.2
Interrupt Signal Timing
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match: Figure 10.38 shows the timing for
setting of the TGF flag in TSR on compare match, and TGI interrupt request signal timing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 239 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
TGR
N
N+1
Compare
match signal
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10.38 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match)
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture: Figure 10.39 shows the timing for setting
of the TGF flag in TSR on input capture, and TGI interrupt request signal timing.
φ
Input capture
signal
TCNT
N
TGR
N
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10.39 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 240 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TCFV Flag/TCFU Flag Setting Timing: Figure 10.40 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV
flag in TSR on overflow, and TCIV interrupt request signal timing.
Figure 10.41 shows the timing for setting of the TCFU flag in TSR on underflow, and TCIU
interrupt request signal timing.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
(overflow)
H'FFFF
H'0000
Overflow
signal
TCFV flag
TCIV interrupt
Figure 10.40 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
(underflow)
H'0000
H'FFFF
Underflow
signal
TCFU flag
TCIU interrupt
Figure 10.41 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 241 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Status Flag Clearing Timing: After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing
0 to it. When the DTC is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. Figure 10.42 shows the
timing for status flag clearing by the CPU, and figure 10.43 shows the timing for status flag
clearing by the DTC.
TSR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TSR address
Address
Write signal
Status flag
Interrupt
request
signal
Figure 10.42 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU
DTC
read cycle
T1
T2
DTC
write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
Source address
Destination
address
Status flag
Interrupt
request
signal
Figure 10.43 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC Activation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 242 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9
Usage Notes
10.9.1
Module Stop Mode Setting
TPU operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial
setting is for TPU operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop
mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.
10.9.2
Input Clock Restrictions
The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of single-edge detection, and at
least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The TPU will not operate properly at narrower
pulse widths.
In phase counting mode, the phase difference and overlap between the two input clocks must be at
least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. Figure 10.44 shows the input clock
conditions in phase counting mode.
Overlap
Phase
Phase
differdifference Overlap ence
Pulse width
Pulse width
TCLKA
(TCLKC)
TCLKB
(TCLKD)
Pulse width
Pulse width
Notes: Phase difference and overlap : 1.5 states or more
Pulse width : 2.5 states or more
Figure 10.44 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 243 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.3
Caution on Period Setting
When counter clearing on compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in the final state in which it
matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated).
Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula:
φ
f=
(N + 1)
Where
10.9.4
f : Counter frequency
φ : Operating frequency
N : TGR set value
Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear Operations
If the counter clear signal is generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing takes
precedence and the TCNT write is not performed.
Figure 10.45 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
Figure 10.45 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear Operations
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 244 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.5
Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment Operations
If incrementing occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence
and TCNT is not incremented.
Figure 10.46 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
M
TCNT write data
Figure 10.46 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment Operations
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 245 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.6
Conflict between TGR Write and Compare Match
If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write takes precedence
and the compare match signal is inhibited. A compare match does not occur even if the previous
value is written.
Figure 10.47 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TGR address
Address
Write signal
Compare
match signal
Prohibited
TCNT
N
N+1
TGR
N
M
TGR write data
Figure 10.47 Conflict between TGR Write and Compare Match
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 246 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.7
Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match
If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the data that is transferred to TGR
by the buffer operation will be that in the buffer prior to the write.
Figure 10.48 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T2
T1
φ
Buffer register
address
Address
Write signal
Compare
match signal
Buffer register write data
Buffer
register
TGR
N
M
N
Figure 10.48 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 247 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.8
Conflict between TGR Read and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is generated in the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, the data that is read will
be that in the buffer after input capture transfer.
Figure 10.49 shows the timing in this case.
TGR read cycle
T2
T1
φ
TGR address
Address
Read signal
Input capture
signal
TGR
X
Internal
data bus
M
M
Figure 10.49 Conflict between TGR Read and Input Capture
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 248 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.9
Conflict between TGR Write and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture
operation takes precedence and the write to TGR is not performed.
Figure 10.50 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TGR address
Address
Write signal
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
M
M
Figure 10.50 Conflict between TGR Write and Input Capture
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 249 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.10 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a buffer register write cycle, the buffer
operation takes precedence and the write to the buffer register is not performed.
Figure 10.51 shows the timing in this case.
Buffer register write cycle
T2
T1
φ
Buffer register
address
Address
Write signal
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
Buffer
register
N
M
N
M
Figure 10.51 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 250 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.11 Conflict between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing
If overflow/underflow and counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is
not set and TCNT clearing takes precedence.
Figure 10.52 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified as the clearing
source, and when H'FFFF is set in TGR.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
H'FFFF
H'0000
Counter
clear signal
TGF
Prohibited
TCFV
Figure 10.52 Conflict between Overflow and Counter Clearing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 251 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.12 Conflict between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow
If there is an up-count or down-count in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, and
overflow/underflow occurs, the TCNT write takes precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is
not set.
Figure 10.53 shows the operation timing when there is conflict between TCNT write and
overflow.
TCNT write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
TCNT
TCNT write data
H'FFFF
M
Prohibited
TCFV flag
Figure 10.53 Conflict between TCNT Write and Overflow
10.9.13 Multiplexing of I/O Pins
In this LSI, the TCLKA input pin is multiplexed with the TIOCC0 I/O pin, the TCLKB input pin
with the TIOCD0 I/O pin, the TCLKC input pin with the TIOCB1 I/O pin, and the TCLKD input
pin with the TIOCB2 I/O pin. When an external clock is input, compare match output should not
be performed from a multiplexed pin.
10.9.14 Interrupts in Module Stop Mode
If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to
clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be
disabled before entering module stop mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 252 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
This LSI has an on-chip 8-bit timer module with four channels operating on the basis of an 8-bit
counter.
The 8-bit timer module can be used to count external events and be used as a multifunction timer
in a variety of applications, such as generation of counter reset, interrupt requests, and pulse
output with an arbitrary duty cycle using a compare-match signal with two registers.
11.1
Features
• Selection of clock sources
Selected from three internal clocks (φ/8, φ/64, and φ/8192) and an external clock.
• Selection of three ways to clear the counters
The counters can be cleared on compare-match A or B, or by an external reset signal.
• Timer output controlled by two compare-match signals
The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by two independent compare-match
signals, enabling the timer to be used for various applications, such as the generation of pulse
output or PWM output with an arbitrary duty cycle.
• Cascading of the two channels
 Cascading of TMR_1 and TMR_0
The module can operate as a 16-bit timer using TMR_0 as the upper half and TMR_1 as
the lower half (16-bit count mode).
TMR_1 can be used to count TMR_0 compare-match occurrences (compare-match count
mode).
 Cascading of TMR_3 and TMR_2
The module can operate as a 16-bit timer using TMR_2 as the upper half and TMR_3 as
the lower half (16-bit count mode).
TMR_3 can be used to count TMR_2 compare-match occurrences (compare-match count
mode).
• Multiple interrupt sources for each channel
Two compare-match interrupts and one overflow interrupt can be requested independently.
• Generation of A/D conversion start trigger
Channel 0 compare-match A signal can be used as the A/D conversion start trigger.
• Module stop mode can be set
At initialization, the 8-bit timer operation is halted. Register access is enabled by canceling the
module stop mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 253 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the 8-bit timer module (TMR_1 and TMR_0).
External clock
sources
Internal clock
sources
φ/8
φ/64
φ/8192
TMCI01
Clock 1
Clock 0
Clock select
Compare-match A1
Compare-match A0 Comparator A_0
Overflow 1
Overflow 0
TMO0
TMRI01
TCNT_0
TCORA_1
Comparator A_1
TCNT_1
Clear 0
Clear 1
Compare-match B1
Compare-match B0 Comparator B_0
TMO1
Comparator B_1
Control logic
TCORB_0
TCORB_1
TCSR_0
TCSR_1
TCR_0
TCR_1
A/D conversion start
request signal
CMIA0
CMIB0
OVI0
CMIA1
CMIB1
OVI1
Interrupt signals
[Legend]
TCORA_0:
TCORB_0:
TCNT_0:
TCSR_0:
TCR_0:
Time constant register A_0
Time constant register B_0
Timer counter_0
Timer control/status register_0
Timer control register_0
TCORA_1:
TCORB_1:
TCNT_1:
TCSR_1:
TCR_1:
Time constant register A_1
Time constant register B_1
Timer counter_1
Timer control/status register_1
Timer control register_1
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 254 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Internal bus
TCORA_0
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 11.1 summarizes the input and output pins of the 8-bit timer module.
Table 11.1 Pin Configuration
Channel
0
1
2
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Timer output0
TMO0
Output
Compare-match output
Timer clock input01 TMCI01
Input
External clock input for the counter
Timer reset input01 TMRI01
Input
External reset input for the counter
Timer output1
Output
Compare-match output
Timer clock input23 TMCI23
Input
External clock input for the counter
Timer reset input23 TMRI23
Input
External reset input for the counter
Timer output2
Output
Compare-match output
Input
External clock input for the counter
TMO1
TMO2
Timer clock input23 TMCI23
3
11.3
Timer reset input23 TMRI23
Input
External reset input for the counter
Timer output3
Output
Compare-match output
Timer clock input01 TMCI01
Input
External clock input for the counter
Timer reset input01 TMRI01
Input
External reset input for the counter
TMO3
Register Descriptions
The 8-bit timer has the following registers. For details on the module stop register, refer to section
20.1.2, Module Stop Control Registers A to C (MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0)
Time constant register A_0 (TCORA_0)
Time constant register B_0 (TCORB_0)
Timer control register_0 (TCR_0)
Timer control/status register_0 (TCSR_0)
Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1)
Time constant register A_1 (TCORA_1)
Time constant register B_1 (TCORB_1)
Timer control register_1 (TCR_1)
Timer control/status register_1 (TCSR_1)
Timer counter_2 (TCNT_2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 255 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Time constant register A_2 (TCORA_2)
Time constant register B_2 (TCORB_2)
Timer control register_2 (TCR_2)
Timer control/status register_2 (TCSR_2)
Timer counter_3 (TCNT_3)
Time constant register A_3 (TCORA_3)
Time constant register B_3 (TCORB_3)
Timer control register_3 (TCR_3)
Timer control/status register_3 (TCSR_3)
11.3.1
Timer Counters (TCNT)
Each TCNT is an 8-bit up-counter. TCNT_1 and TCNT_0, or TCNT_3 and TCNT_2 comprise a
single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access.
This clock source is selected by clock select bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR. TCNT can be cleared by
an external reset input signal or compare-match signals A and B. Counter clear bits CCLR1 and
CCLR0 in TCR select the method of clearing.
When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00, the overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1.
The initial value of TCNT is H'00.
11.3.2
Time Constant Registers A (TCORA)
TCORA is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORA_3, TCORA_2, TCORA_1 and TCORA_0
comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access.
TCORA is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the
corresponding compare-match flag A (CMFA) in TCSR is set. Note, however, that comparison is
disabled during the T2 state of a TCORA write cycle.
The timer output from the TMO pin can be freely controlled by the compare-match signal A and
the settings of output select bits OS1 and OS0 in TCSR.
The initial value of TCORA is H'FF.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 256 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.3.3
Time Constant Registers B (TCORB)
TCORB is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORB_3, TCORB_2, TCORB_1 and TCORB_0
comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access.
TCORB is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the
corresponding compare-match flag B (CMFB) in TCSR is set. Note, however, that comparison is
disabled during the T2 state of a TCORB write cycle.
The timer output from the TMO pin can be freely controlled by the compare-match signal B and
the settings of output select bits OS1 and OS0 in TCSR.
The initial value of TCORB is H'FF.
11.3.4
Timer Control Registers (TCR)
TCR selects the TCNT clock source and the time at which TCNT is cleared, and controls interrupt
requests.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
CMIEB
0
R/W
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B
Selects whether the CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is
enabled or disabled when the CMFB flag in TCSR is set
to 1.
0: CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is disabled
1: CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is enabled
6
CMIEA
0
R/W
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A
Selects whether the CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is
enabled or disabled when the CMFA flag in TCSR is set
to 1.
0: CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is disabled
1: CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is enabled
5
OVIE
0
R/W
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
Selects whether the OVF interrupt request (OVI) is
enabled or disabled when the OVF flag in TCSR is set to
1.
0: OVF interrupt request (OVI) is disabled
1: OVF interrupt request (OVI) is enabled
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 257 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
Bit
Bit Name
4
CCLR1
3
CCLR0
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
0
0
R/W
R/W
Counter Clear 1 and 0
These bits select the method by which TCNT is cleared
00: Clearing is disabled
01: Cleared on compare-match A
10: Cleared on compare-match B
11: Cleared on rising edge of external reset input
2
CKS2
0
R/W
Clock Select 2 to 0
1
CKS1
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
The input clock can be selected from three clocks divided
from the system clock (φ). When use of an external clock
is selected, three types of count can be selected: at the
rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling
edges.
000: Clock input disabled
001: φ/8 internal clock source, counted on the falling
edge
010: φ/64 internal clock source, counted on the falling
edge
011: φ/8192 internal clock source, counted on the falling
edge
100: For channel 0: Counted on TCNT1 overflow signal*
For channel 1: Counted on TCNT0 overflow signal*
For channel 2: Counted on TCNT3 overflow signal*
For channel 3: Counted on TCNT2 overflow signal*
101: External clock source, counted at rising edge
110: External clock source, counted at falling edge
111: External clock source, counted at both rising and
falling edges
Note:
*
If the count input of channel 0 (channel 2) is the TCNT1 (TCNT3) overflow signal and
that of channel 1 (channel 3) is the TCNT1 (TCNT3) compare-match signal, no
incrementing clock will be generated. Do not use this setting.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 258 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.3.5
Timer Control/Status Registers (TCSR)
TCSR indicates status flags and controls compare-match output.
• TCSR_0
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
CMFB
0
R/(W)*
Compare-Match Flag B
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT = TCORB
[Clearing conditions]
6
CMFA
0
R/(W)*
•
Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB.
•
DTC is activated by the CMIB interrupt and the DISEL
bit = 0 in MRB of TDC.
Compare-match Flag A
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT = TCORA
[Clearing conditions]
5
OVF
0
R/(W)*
•
Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA.
•
DTC is activated by the CMIA interrupt and DISEL bit
= 0 in MRB of DTC.
Timer Overflow Flag
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00
[Clearing condition]
•
4
ADTE
0
R/W
Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
A/D Trigger Enable
Enables or disables A/D converter start requests by
compare-match A.
0: A/D converter start requests by compare-match A are
disabled
1: A/D converter start requests by compare-match A are
enabled
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 259 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
OS3
0
R/W
Output Select 3 and 2
2
OS2
0
R/W
These bits specify how the timer output level is to be
changed by a compare-match B of TCORB and TCNT.
00: No change when compare-match B occurs
01: 0 is output when compare-match B occurs
10: 1 is output when compare-match B occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare-match B occurs
(toggle output)
1
OS1
0
R/W
Output Select 1 and 0
0
OS0
0
R/W
These bits specify how the timer output level is to be
changed by a compare-match A of TCORA and TCNT.
00: No change when compare-match A occurs
01: 0 is output when compare-match A occurs
10: 1 is output when compare-match A occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare-match A occurs
(toggle output)
Note:
*
Only a 0 can be written to this bit, to clear the flag
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 260 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
• TCSR_3 and TCSR_1
Bit
7
Bit Name
CMFB
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
0
R/(W)*
Compare-Match Flag B
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT = TCORB
[Clearing conditions]
6
CMFA
0
R/(W)*
•
Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB
•
DTC is activated by the CMIB interrupt and the DISEL
bit = 0 in MRB of DTC.
Compare-match Flag A
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT = TCORA
[Clearing conditions]
5
OVF
0
R/(W)*
•
Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA
•
DTC is activated by the CMIA interrupt and the DISEL
bit = 0 in MRB of DTC.
Timer Overflow Flag
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00
[Clearing condition]
•
4

1

Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
3
OS3
0
R/W
Output Select 3 and 2
2
OS2
0
R/W
These bits specify how the timer output level is to be
changed by a compare-match B of TCORB and TCNT.
00: No change when compare-match B occurs
01: 0 is output when compare-match B occurs
10: 1 is output when compare-match B occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare-match B occurs
(toggle output)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 261 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
OS1
0
R/W
Output Select 1 and 0
0
OS0
0
R/W
These bits specify how the timer output level is to be
changed by a compare-match A of TCORA and TCNT.
00: No change when compare-match A occurs
01: 0 is output when compare-match A occurs
10: 1 is output when compare-match A occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare-match A occurs
(toggle output)
Note:
*
Only a 0 can be written to this bit, to clear the flag.
• TCSR_2
Bit
7
Bit Name
CMFB
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
0
R/(W)*
Compare-Match Flag B
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT = TCORB
[Clearing conditions]
6
CMFA
0
R/(W)*
•
Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB
•
DTC is activated by the CMIB interrupt and the DISEL
bit = 0 in MRB of DTC.
Compare-match Flag A
[Setting condition]
When TCNT = TCORA
[Clearing conditions]
5
OVF
0
R/(W)*
•
Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA
•
DTC is activated by the CMIA interrupt and the DISEL
bit = 0 in MRB of DTC.
Timer Overflow Flag
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00
[Clearing condition]
•
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 262 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
4

0
R/W
Reserved
This bit is a readable/writable bit, but the write value
should always be 0.
3
OS3
0
R/W
Output Select 3 and 2
2
OS2
0
R/W
These bits specify how the timer output level is to be
changed by a compare-match B of TCORB and TCNT.
00: No change when compare-match B occurs
01: 0 is output when compare-match B occurs
10: 1 is output when compare-match B occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare-match B occurs
(toggle output)
1
OS1
0
R/W
Output Select 1 and 0
0
OS0
0
R/W
These bits specify how the timer output level is to be
changed by a compare-match A of TCORA and TCNT.
00: No change when compare-match A occurs
01: 0 is output when compare-match A occurs
10: 1 is output when compare-match A occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare-match A occurs
(toggle output)
Note:
*
Only a 0 can be written to this bit, to clear the flag.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 263 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.4
Operation
11.4.1
Pulse Output
Figure 11.2 shows an example of arbitrary duty cycle pulse output.
1.
2.
Set TCR in CCR1 to 0 and CCLR0 to 1 to clear TCNT by a TCORA compare-match.
Set OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR to B'0110 to output 1 by a compare-match A and 0 by comparematch B.
By the above settings, waveforms with the cycle of TCORA and the pulse width of TCRB can be
output without software intervention.
TCNT
H'FF
Counter clear
TCORA
TCORB
H'00
TMO
Figure 11.2 Example of Pulse Output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 264 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.5
Operation Timing
11.5.1
TCNT Incrementation Timing
Figure 11.3 shows the TCNT count timing with internal clock source. Figure 11.4 shows the
TCNT incrementation timing with external clock source. The pulse width of the external clock for
incrementation at signal edge must be at least 1.5 system clock (φ) periods, and at least 2.5 states
for incrementation at both edges. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is less
than these values.
φ
Internal clock
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
Figure 11.3 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input
φ
External clock
input pin
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
Figure 11.4 Count Timing for External Clock Input
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 265 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.5.2
Timing of CMFA and CMFB Setting When a Compare-Match Occurs
The CMFA and CMFB flags in TCSR are set to 1 by a compare-match signal generated when the
TCOR and TCNT values match. The compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which
the match is true, just before the timer counter is updated. Therefore, when TCOR and TCNT
match, the compare-match signal is not generated until the next incrementation clock input. Figure
11.5 shows the timing of CMF flag setting.
φ
TCNT
N
TCOR
N
N+1
Compare-match
signal
CMF
Figure 11.5 Timing of CMF Setting
11.5.3
Timing of Timer Output When a Compare-Match Occurs
When a compare-match occurs, the timer output changes as specified by the output select bits
(OS3 to OS0) in TCSR. Figure 11.6 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle at comparematch A.
φ
Compare-match A
signal
Timer output
pin
Figure 11.6 Timing of Timer Output
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 266 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.5.4
Timing of Compare-Match Clear When a Compare-Match Occurs
TCNT is cleared when compare-match A or B occurs, depending on the setting of the CCLR1 and
CCLR0 bits in TCR. Figure 11.7 shows the timing of this operation.
φ
Compare-match
signal
N
TCNT
H'00
Figure 11.7 Timing of Compare-Match Clear
11.5.5
TCNT External Reset Timing
TCNT is cleared at the rising edge of an external reset input, depending on the settings of the
CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. The width of the clearing pulse must be at least 1.5 states. Figure
11.8 shows the timing of this operation.
φ
External reset
input pin
Clear signal
TCNT
N–1
N
H'00
Figure 11.8 Timing of Clearing by External Reset Input
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 267 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.5.6
Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting
OVF in TCSR is set to 1 when the timer count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00). Figure
11.9 shows the timing of this operation.
φ
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
OVF
Figure 11.9 Timing of OVF Setting
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 268 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.6
Operation with Cascaded Connection
If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in one of TCR_1 and TCR_0, or TCR_3 and TCR_2 are set to B'100, the 8bit timers of the two channels are cascaded. With this configuration, a single 16-bit timer can be
used (16-bit timer mode) or compare-matches of 8-bit channel 0 (Channel 2) can be counted by
the timer of channel 1 (Channel 3) (compare-match count mode). In the case that channel 0 is
connected to channel 1 in cascade, the timer operates as described below.
11.6.1
16-Bit Count Mode
When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_0 are set to B'100, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer
with channel 0 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 1 occupying the lower 8 bits.
• Setting of compare-match flags
 The CMF flag in TCSR_0 is set to 1 when a 16-bit compare-match occurs.
 The CMF flag in TCSR_1 is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare-match occurs.
• Counter clear specification
 If the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_0 have been set for counter clear at compare-match,
the 16-bit counter (TCNT_1 and TCNT_0 together) is cleared when a 16-bit comparematch occurs. The 16-bit counter (TCNT_1 and TCNT_0 together) is cleared even if
counter clear by the TMRI01 pin has also been set.
 The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_1 are ignored. The lower 8 bits cannot
be cleared independently.
• Pin output
 Control of output from the TMO0 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_0 is in accordance with
the 16-bit compare-match conditions.
 Control of output from the TMO1 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_1 is in accordance with
the lower 8-bit compare-match conditions.
11.6.2
Compare-Match Count Mode
When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_1 are B'100, TCNT_1 counts compare-match A for channel 0.
Channels 0 and 1 are controlled independently. Conditions such as setting of the CMF flag,
generation of interrupts, output from the TMO pin, and counter clearing are in accordance with the
settings for each channel.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 269 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.7
Interrupt Sources
11.7.1
Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation
The 8-bit timer can generate three types of interrupt: CMIA, CMIB, and OVI. Table 11.2 shows
the interrupt sources and priority. Each interrupt source can be enabled or disabled independently
by interrupt enable bits in TCR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each
interrupt. It is also possible to activate the DTC by means of CMIA and CMIB interrupts.
Table 11.2 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources
Interrupt
source
Description
Flag
DTC Activation
Interrupt
Priority
CMIA0
TCORA_0 compare-match
CMFA
Possible
High
CMIB0
TCORB_0 compare-match
CMFB
Possible
OVI0
TCNT_0 overflow
OVF
Not possible
CMIA1
TCORA_1 compare-match
CMFA
Possible
CMIB1
TCORB_1 compare-match
CMFB
Possible
OVI1
TCNT_1 overflow
OVF
Not possible
CMIA2
TCORA_2 compare-match
CMFA
Possible
CMIB2
TCORB_2 compare-match
CMFB
Possible
OVI2
TCNT_2 overflow
OVF
Not possible
CMIA3
TCORA_3 compare-match
CMFA
Possible
CMIB3
TCORB_3 compare-match
CMFB
Possible
OVI3
TCNT_3 overflow
OVF
Not possible
11.7.2
Low
A/D Converter Activation
The A/D converter can be activated only by channel 0 compare match A.
If the ADTE bit in TCSR0 is set to 1 when the CMFA flag is set to 1 by the occurrence of channel
0 compare match A, a request to start A/D conversion is sent to the A/D converter. If the 8-bit
timer conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D converter side at this time, A/D
conversion is started.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 270 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.8
Usage Notes
11.8.1
Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear
If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the clear
takes priority, so that the counter is cleared and the write is not performed. Figure 11.10 shows
this operation.
TCNT write cycle by CPU
T1
T2
φ
Address
TCNT address
Internal write signal
Counter clear signal
TCNT
N
H'00
Figure 11.10 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 271 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.8.2
Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment
If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write
takes priority and the counter is not incremented. Figure 11.11 shows this operation.
TCNT write cycle by CPU
T1
T2
φ
Address
TCNT address
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 11.11 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 272 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.8.3
Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare-Match
During the T2 state of a TCOR write cycle, the TCOR write has priority even if a compare-match
occurs and the compare-match signal is disabled. Figure 11.12 shows this operation.
TCOR write cycle by CPU
T1
T2
φ
Address
TCOR address
Internal write signal
TCNT
N
N+1
TCOR
N
M
TCOR write data
Compare-match signal
Prohibited
Figure 11.12 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare-Match
11.8.4
Conflict between Compare-Matches A and B
If compare-matches A and B occur at the same time, the 8-bit timer operates in accordance with
the priorities for the output states set for compare-match A and compare-match B, as shown in
table 11.3.
Table 11.3 Timer Output Priorities
Output Setting
Priority
Toggle output
High
1 output
0 output
No change
Low
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 273 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
11.8.5
Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation
TCNT may increment erroneously when the internal clock is switched over. Table 11.4 shows the
relationship between the timing at which the internal clock is switched (by writing to the CKS1
and CKS0 bits) and the TCNT operation.
When the TCNT clock is generated from an internal clock, the falling edge of the internal clock
pulse is detected. If clock switching causes a change from high to low level, as shown in no. 3 in
table 11.4, a TCNT clock pulse is generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling
edge. This increments TCNT.
Erroneous incrementation can also happen when switching between internal and external clocks.
Table 11.4 Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation
No.
1
Timing of Switchover
by Means of CKS1
and CKS0 Bits
Switching from low
1
to low*
TCNT Clock Operation
Clock before
switchover
Clock after
switchover
TCNT clock
TCNT
N
N+1
CKS bit rewrite
2
Switching from low
to high*2
Clock before
switchover
Clock after
switchover
TCNT clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS bit rewrite
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 274 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
No.
3
Timing of Switchover
by Means of CKS1
and CKS0 Bits
Switching from high
3
to low*
TCNT Clock Operation
Clock before
switchover
Clock after
switchover
*4
TCNT clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS bit rewrite
4
Switching from high
to high
Clock before
switchover
Clock after
switchover
TCNT clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS bit rewrite
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
11.8.6
Includes switching from low to stop, and from stop to low.
Includes switching from stop to high.
Includes switching from high to stop.
Generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; TCNT is
incremented.
Conflict between Interrupts and Module Stop Mode
If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to
clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be
disabled before entering module stop mode.
11.8.7
Notes on Cascaded Connection
If 16-bit count mode and compare-match count mode are set simultaneously, the counter stops and
does not operate since input clocks of TCNT_1 and TCNT_0 (TCNT_3 and TCNT_2) are not
generated. This setting is prohibited.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 275 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 11 8-Bit Timers
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 276 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
The programmable pulse generator provides pulse outputs using the 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU)
as a time base. The PPG pulse outputs are divided into 4-bit groups (group 3 and group 2) that can
operate both simultaneously and independently. The block diagram of the PPG is shown in figure
12.1.
12.1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Features
8-bit output data
Two output groups
Selectable output trigger signals
Non-overlap mode
Can operate in tandem with the data transfer controller (DTC)
Settable inverted output
Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 277 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Compare match signals
Control logic
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
NDERH
NDERL
PMR
PCR
Pulse output
pins, group 3
PODRH
NDRH
PODRL
NDRL
Pulse output
pins, group 2
Pulse output
pins, group 1
Pulse output
pins, group 0
[Legend]
PMR:
PCR:
NDERH:
NDERL:
NDRH:
NDRL:
PODRH:
PODRL:
PPG output mode register
PPG output control register
Next data enable register H
Next data enable register L
Next data register H
Next data register L
Output data register H
Output data register L
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of PPG
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 278 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Internal
data bus
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 12.1 summarizes the pin configuration of the PPG.
Table 12.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
I/O
Function
PO15
Output
Group 3 pulse output
PO14
Output
PO13
Output
PO12
Output
PO11
Output
PO10
Output
PO9
Output
PO8
Output
12.3
Group 2 pulse output
Register Descriptions
The PPG has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PPG output control register (PCR)
PPG output mode register (PMR)
Next data enable register H (NDERH)
Next data enable register L (NDERL)
Output data register H (PODRH)
Output data register L (PODRL)
Next data register H (NDRH)
Next data register L (NDRL)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 279 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.3.1
Next Data Enable Registers H, L (NDERH, NDERL)
NDERH and NDERL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that enable or disable pulse output on a
bit-by-bit basis. The corresponding DDR also needs to be set to 1 in order to enable pulse output
by the PPG.
• NDERH
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
NDER15
0
R/W
Next Data Enable 15 to 8
6
NDER14
0
R/W
5
NDER13
0
R/W
4
NDER12
0
R/W
3
NDER11
0
R/W
When a bit is set to 1 for pulse output by NDRH,
the value in the corresponding NDRH bit is
transferred to the PODRH bit by the selected
output trigger. Values are not transferred from
NDRH to PODRH for cleared bits.
2
NDER10
0
R/W
1
NDER9
0
R/W
0
NDER8
0
R/W
• NDERL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
NDER7
0
R/W
Next Data Enable 7 to 0
6
NDER6
0
R/W
5
NDER5
0
R/W
4
NDER4
0
R/W
3
NDER3
0
R/W
When a bit is set to 1 for pulse output by NDRL, the
value in the corresponding NDRL bit is transferred
to the PODRL bit by the selected output trigger.
Values are not transferred from NDRL to PODRL
for cleared bits.
2
NDER2
0
R/W
1
NDER1
0
R/W
0
NDER0
0
R/W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 280 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.3.2
Output Data Registers H, L (PODRH, PODRL)
PODRH and PODRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store output data for use in pulse
output. A bit that has been set for pulse output by NDER is read-only and cannot be modified.
• PODRH
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
POD15
0
R/W
Output Data Register 15 to 8
6
POD14
0
R/W
5
POD13
0
R/W
4
POD12
0
R/W
3
POD11
0
R/W
2
POD10
0
R/W
For bits that have been set to pulse output by
NDERH, the output trigger transfers NDRH values
to this register during PPG operation. While
NDERH is set to 1, the CPU cannot write to this
register. While NDERH is cleared, the initial output
value of the pulse can be set.
1
POD9
0
R/W
0
POD8
0
R/W
• PODRL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
POD7
0
R/W
Output Data Register 7 to 0
6
POD6
0
R/W
5
POD5
0
R/W
4
POD4
0
R/W
3
POD3
0
R/W
2
POD2
0
R/W
For bits which have been set to pulse output by
NDERL, the output trigger transfers NDRL values
to this register during PPG operation. While
NDERL is set to 1, the CPU cannot write to this
register. While NDERL is cleared, the initial output
value of the pulse can be set.
1
POD1
0
R/W
0
POD0
0
R/W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 281 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.3.3
Next Data Registers H, L (NDRH, NDRL)
NDRH and NDRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store the data for the next pulse output.
The NDR addresses differ depending on whether pulse output groups have the same output trigger
or different output triggers.
• NDRH
If pulse output groups 3 and 2 have the same output trigger, all eight bits are mapped to the
same address and can be accessed at one time, as shown below.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
NDR15
0
R/W
Next Data Register 15 to 8
6
NDR14
0
R/W
5
NDR13
0
R/W
4
NDR12
0
R/W
The register contents are transferred to the
corresponding PODRH bits by the output trigger
specified with PCR.
3
NDR11
0
R/W
2
NDR10
0
R/W
1
NDR9
0
R/W
0
NDR8
0
R/W
If pulse output groups 3 and output pulse groups 2 have different output triggers, the upper 4
bits and the lower 4 bits are mapped to different addresses, as shown below.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
NDR15
0
R/W
Next Data Register 15 to 12
6
NDR14
0
R/W
5
NDR13
0
R/W
4
NDR12
0
R/W
The register contents are transferred to the
corresponding PODRH bits by the output trigger
specified with PCR.
All 1

3 to 0 
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 282 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Bit
Bit Name
7 to 4 
Initial Value
R/W
Description
All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
3
NDR11
0
R/W
Next Data Register 11 to 8
2
NDR10
0
R/W
1
NDR9
0
R/W
0
NDR8
0
R/W
The register contents are transferred to the
corresponding PODRH bits by the output trigger
specified with PCR.
• NDRL
If pulse output groups 1 and 0 have the same output trigger, all eight bits are mapped to the
same address and can be accessed at one time, as shown below.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
NDR7
0
R/W
Next Data Register 7 to 0
6
NDR6
0
R/W
5
NDR5
0
R/W
4
NDR4
0
R/W
The register contents are transferred to the
corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger
specified with PCR.
3
NDR3
0
R/W
2
NDR2
0
R/W
1
NDR1
0
R/W
0
NDR0
0
R/W
If pulse output groups 1 and output pulse groups 0 have different output triggers, upper 4 bits
and lower 4 bits are mapped to the different addresses as shown below.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
NDR7
0
R/W
Next Data Register 7 to 4
6
NDR6
0
R/W
5
NDR5
0
R/W
4
NDR4
0
R/W
The register contents are transferred to the
corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger
specified with PCR.
All 1

3 to 0 
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 283 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Bit
Bit Name
7 to 4 
Initial Value
R/W
Description
All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
3
NDR3
0
R/W
Next Data Register 3 to 0
2
NDR2
0
R/W
1
NDR1
0
R/W
0
NDR0
0
R/W
The register contents are transferred to the
corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger
specified with PCR.
12.3.4
PPG Output Control Register (PCR)
PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals on a group-by-group
basis. For details on output trigger selection, refer to section 12.3.5, PPG Output Mode Register
(PMR).
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
G3CMS1
1
R/W
Group 3 Compare Match Select 1 and 0
6
G3CMS0
1
R/W
Select output trigger of pulse output group 3.
00: Compare match in TPU channel 0
01: Compare match in TPU channel 1
10: Compare match in TPU channel 2
11: Compare match in TPU channel 3
5
4
G2CMS1
1
R/W
Group 2 Compare Match Select 1 and 0
G2CMS0
1
R/W
Select output trigger of pulse output group 2.
00: Compare match in TPC channel 0
01: Compare match in TPC channel 1
10: Compare match in TPC channel 2
11: Compare match in TPC channel 3
3
G1CMS1
1
R/W
2
G1CMS0
1
R/W
1
G0CMS1
1
R/W
0
G0CMS0
1
R/W
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 284 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Reserved
Reserved
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.3.5
PPG Output Mode Register (PMR)
The PMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the pulse output mode of the PPG for
each group. If inverted output is selected, a low-level pulse is output when PODRH is 1 and a
high-level pulse is output when PODRH is 0. If non-overlapping operation is selected, PPG
updates its output values on compare match A or B of the TPU that becomes the output trigger.
For details, refer to section 12.4.5, Non-Overlapping Pulse Output.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
G3INV
1
R/W
Group 3 Inversion
Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse
output group 3.
0: Inverted output
1: Direct output
6
G2INV
1
R/W
Group 2 Inversion
Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse
output group 2.
0: Inverted output
1: Direct output
5, 4

All 1
R/W
Reserved
3
G3NOV
0
R/W
Group 3 Non-Overlap
Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for
pulse output group 3.
0: Normal operation (output values updated at
compare match A in the selected TPU channel)
1: Non-overlapping operation (output values at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU
channel)
2
G2NOV
0
R/W
Group 2 Non-Overlap
Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for
pulse output group 2.
0: Normal operation (output values updated at
compare match A in the selected TPU channel)
1: Non-overlapping operation (output values at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU
channel)
1, 0

All 0
R/W
Reserved
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 285 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.4
Operation
12.4.1
Overview
Figure 12.2 shows a block diagram of the PPG. PPG pulse output is enabled when the
corresponding bits in P1DDR and NDER are set to 1. An initial output value is determined by its
corresponding PODR initial setting. When the compare match event specified by PCR occurs, the
corresponding NDR bit contents are transferred to PODR to update the output values.
The sequential output of up to 8 bits of data is possible by writing new output data to NDR before
the next compare match.
NDER
DDR
Q
Output trigger signal
C
Q PODR D
Q NDR D
Pulse output pin
Normal output/inverted output
Figure 12.2 PPG Output Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 286 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Internal data bus
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.4.2
Output Timing
If pulse output is enabled, the contents of NDR contents are transferred to PODR and output when
the specified compare match event occurs. Figure 12.3 shows the timing of these operations for
the case of normal output in groups 3 and 2, triggered by compare match A.
φ
N
TCNT
TGRA
N+1
N
Compare match
A signal
n
NDRH
PODRH
PO15 to PO8
m
n
m
n
Figure 12.3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 287 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.4.3
Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output
Figure 12.4 shows a sample procedure for setting up normal pulse output.
Normal PPG output
[1] Set TIOR to make TGRA an output
compare register (with output
disabled).
Select TGR functions
[1]
Set TGRA value
[2]
Set counting operation
[3]
Select interrupt request
[4]
Set initial output data
[5]
[4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER.
The DTC can also be set up to
transfer data to NDR.
Enable pulse output
[6]
[5] Set the initial output values in
PODR.
Select output trigger
[7]
[6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the
pins to be used for pulse output to 1.
Set next pulse
output data
[8]
[7] Select the TPU compare match
event to be used as the output
trigger in PCR.
Start counter
[9]
[8] Set the next pulse output values in
NDR.
[2] Set the PPG output trigger period.
TPU setup
Port and
PPG setup
TPU setup
Compare match?
No
Yes
Set next pulse
output data
[10]
[3] Select the counter clock source with
bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Select the counter clear source with
bits CCLR1 and CCLR0.
[9] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start
the TCNT counter.
[10] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next
output values in NDR.
Figure 12.4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 288 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.4.4
Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output)
Figure 12.5 shows an example in which pulse output is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output.
TCNT value
Compare match
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
Time
80
NDRH
PODRH
00
C0
80
40
C0
60
40
20
60
30
20
10
30
18
10
08
18
88
08
80
88
C0
80
40
C0
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
Figure 12.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output)
1. Set up TGRA of the TPU that is used as the output trigger to be an output compare register.
Set a frequency in TGRA so the counter will be cleared on compare match A. Set the TGIEA
bit of TIER to 1 to enable the compare match/input capture A (TGIA) interrupt.
2. Write H'F8 in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0
bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the
output trigger. Write output data H'80 in NDRH.
3. When compare match A occurs, the NDRH contents are transferred to PODRH and output.
The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the next output data (H'C0) in NDRH.
4. Five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained
subsequently by writing H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30. H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88... at successive TGIA
interrupts. If the DTC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained
without imposing a load on the CPU.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 289 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.4.5
Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
During non-overlapping operation, transfer from NDR to PODR is performed as follows:
• NDR bits are always transferred on PODR bits on compare match A.
• On compare match B, NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. Bits are not transferred
if their value is 1.
Figure 12.6 illustrates the non-overlapping pulse output operation.
NDER
DDR
Q
Compare match A
Compare match B
C
Q PODR D
Pulse
output
pin
Q NDR D
Internal data bus
Normal output/inverted output
Figure 12.6 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before
compare match A. The NDR contents should not be altered during the interval between compare
match B and compare match A (the non-overlap margin).
This can be accomplished by having the TGIA interrupt handling routine write the next data in
NDR, or by having the TGIA interrupt activate the DTC. Note, however, that the next data must
be written before the next compare match B occurs.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 290 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Figure 12.7 shows the timing of this operation.
Compare match A
Compare match B
Write to NDR
Write to NDR
NDR
PODR
0 output
0/1 output
Write to NDR
Do not write here
to NDR here
0 output 0/1 output
Do not write
to NDR here
Write to NDR
here
Figure 12.7 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 291 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.4.6
Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
Figure 12.8 shows a sample procedure for setting up non-overlapping pulse output.
Non-overlapping
PPG output
[1] Set TIOR to make TGRA and
TGRB an output compare registers
(with output disabled).
Select TGR functions
[1]
Set TGR values
[2]
Set counting operation
[3]
Select interrupt request
[4]
Set initial output data
[5]
Enable pulse output
[6]
Select output trigger
[7]
Set non-overlapping groups
[8]
Set next pulse
output data
[9]
[7] Select the TPU compare match
event to be used as the pulse
output trigger in PCR.
Start counter
[10]
[8] In PMR, select the groups that will
operate in non-overlap mode.
TPU setup
PPG setup
TPU setup
Compare match A?
No
Yes
Set next pulse
output data
[2] Set the pulse output trigger period
in TGRB and the non-overlap
margin in TGRA.
[3] Select the counter clock source
with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Select the counter clear source
with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0.
[4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER.
The DTC can also be set up to
transfer data to NDR.
[5] Set the initial output values in
PODR.
[6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the
pins to be used for pulse output to
1.
[9] Set the next pulse output values in
NDR.
[10] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to
start the TCNT counter.
[11]
[11] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next
output values in NDR.
Figure 12.8 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 292 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.4.7
Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example of Four-Phase
Complementary Non-Overlapping Output)
Figure 12.9 shows an example in which pulse output is used for four-phase complementary nonoverlapping pulse output.
TCNT value
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
NDRH
PODRH
Time
95
00
65
95
59
05
65
56
41
59
95
50
56
65
14
95
05
65
Non-overlap margin
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
Figure 12.9 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 293 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
1. Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel such that TGRA and TGRB
are output compare registers. Set the trigger period in TGRB and the non-overlap margin in
TGRA, and set the counter to be cleared on compare match B. Set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1
to enable the TGIA interrupt.
2. Write H'FF in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0
bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the
output trigger. Set the G3NOV and G2NOV bits in PMR to 1 to select non-overlapping output.
Write output data H'95 in NDRH.
3. The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When a compare match with TGRB occurs,
outputs change from 1 to 0. When a compare match with TGRA occurs, outputs change from 0
to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value set in TGRA). The TGIA interrupt
handling routine writes the next output data (H'65) in NDRH.
4. Four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained subsequently by
writing H'59, H'56, H'95, ... at successive TGIA interrupts. If the DTC is set for activation by
this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without imposing a load on the CPU.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 294 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.4.8
Inverted Pulse Output
If the G3INV, G2INV, G1INV, and G0INV bits in PMR are cleared to 0, values that are the
inverse of the PODR contents can be output.
Figure 12.10 shows the outputs when G3INV and G2INV are cleared to 0, in addition to the
settings of figure 12.9.
TCNT value
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
NDRH
PODRL
Time
95
00
65
95
59
05
65
56
41
59
95
50
56
65
14
95
05
65
PO15
PO14
PO13
PO12
PO11
PO10
PO9
PO8
Figure 12.10 Inverted Pulse Output (Example)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 295 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.4.9
Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture
Pulse output can be triggered by TPU input capture as well as by compare match. If TGRA
functions as an input capture register in the TPU channel selected by PCR, pulse output will be
triggered by the input capture signal.
Figure 12.11 shows the timing of this output.
φ
TIOC pin
Input capture
signal
NDR
N
PODR
M
PO
M
N
N
Figure 12.11 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 296 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
12.5
Usage Notes
12.5.1
Module Stop Mode Setting
PPG operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial
setting is for PPG operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode.
For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.
12.5.2
Operation of Pulse Output Pins
Pins PO15 to PO8 are also used for other peripheral functions such as the TPU. When output by
another peripheral function is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for pulse output.
Note, however, that data transfer from NDR bits to PODR bits takes place, regardless of the usage
of the pins.
Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not
occur.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 297 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 298 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer (WDT) is an 8-bit timer that can generate an internal reset signal for this LSI,
if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow.
When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval
timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows.
The block diagram of the WDT is shown in figure 13.1.
13.1
Features
• Selectable from eight counter input clocks.
• Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode
In watchdog timer mode:
• If the counter overflows, it is possible to select whether this LSI is internally reset or not.
In interval timer mode:
• If the counter overflows, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 299 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
Internal reset signal*
Interrupt
control
Clock
Clock
select
Reset
control
RSTCSR
TCNT
φ/2
φ/64
φ/128
φ/512
φ/2048
φ/8192
φ/32768
φ/131072
Internal clock
sources
TSCR
Module bus
Bus
interface
Internal bus
Overflow
WOVI
(interrupt request
signal)
WDT
[Legend]
TCSR:
Timer control/status register
TCNT:
Timer counter
RSTCSR: Reset control/status register
Note: * The type of internal reset signal depends on a register setting.
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of WDT
13.2
Register Descriptions
The WDT has the following three registers. To prevent accidental overwriting, TCSR, TCNT, and
RSTCSR have to be written to by a different method to normal registers. For details, refer to
section 13.5.1, Notes on Register Access.
• Timer control/status register (TCSR)
• Timer counter (TCNT)
• Reset control/status register (RSTCSR)
13.2.1
Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, when the
TME bit in TCSR is cleared to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 300 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
13.2.2
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be
input to TCNT, and selecting the timer mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
OVF
0
R/(W)*
Overflow Flag
Indicates that TCNT has overflowed. Only a write
of 0 is permitted, to clear the flag.
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to
H'00)
When internal reset request generation is
selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is
cleared automatically by the internal reset.
[Clearing condition]
•
6
WT/IT
0
R/W
Cleared by reading TCSR when OVF = 1, then
writing 0 to OVF
Timer Mode Select
Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog
timer or an interval timer.
0: Interval timer mode
1: Watchdog timer mode
5
TME
0
R/W
Timer Enable
When this bit is set to 1, TCNT starts counting.
When this bit is cleared, TCNT stops counting and
is initialized to H'00.
4, 3

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 301 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
2
CKS2
0
R/W
Clock Select 2 to 0
1
CKS1
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
Selects the clock source to be input to TCNT. The
overflow frequency for φ = 20 MHz is enclosed in
parentheses.
000: Clock φ/2 (frequency: 25.6 µs)
001: Clock φ/64 (frequency: 819.2 µs)
010: Clock φ/128 (frequency: 1.6 ms)
011: Clock φ/512 (frequency: 6.6 ms)
100: Clock φ/2048 (frequency: 26.2 ms)
101: Clock φ/8192 (frequency: 104.9 ms)
110: Clock φ/32768 (frequency: 419.4 ms)
111: Clock φ/131072 (frequency: 1.68 s)
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 302 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
13.2.3
Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)
RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the generation of the internal reset
signal when TCNT overflows, and selects the type of internal reset signal. RSTCSR is initialized
to H'1F by a reset signal from the RES pin, and not by the WDT internal reset signal caused by
overflows.
Bit
7
Bit Name
WOVF
Initial Value
R/W
0
R/(W)*
Description
Watchdog Overflow Flag
This bit is set when TCNT overflows in watchdog
timer mode. This bit cannot be set in interval timer
mode, and only 0 can be written.
[Setting condition]
•
Set when TCNT overflows (changed from
H'FF to H'00) in watchdog timer mode
[Clearing condition]
•
6
RSTE
0
R/W
Cleared by reading RSTCSR when WOVF =
1, and then writing 0 to WOVF
Reset Enable
Specifies whether or not a reset signal is generated
in the chip if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer
operation.
0: Reset signal is not generated even if TCNT
overflows
(Though this LSI is not reset, TCNT and TCSR in
WDT are reset)
1: Reset signal is generated if TCNT overflows
5
RSTS
0
R/W
Reset Select
Selects the type of internal reset generated if TCNT
overflows during watchdog timer operation.
0: Power-on reset
1: Setting prohibited
4 to 0 
All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 303 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
13.3
Operation
13.3.1
Watchdog Timer Mode Operation
To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT bit in TCSR and the TME bit to 1. Software
must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before
overflow occurs. This ensures that TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating
normally. If TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system malfunction or other
error, the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is set to 1. If the RSTE bit in RSTCSR is set to 1, an internal
reset is issued. This is shown in figure 13.2. At this time, select the power-on reset by clearing the
RSTS bit in RSTCSR to 0. The internal reset signal is output for 518 states.
If a reset caused by a signal input to the RES pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a
WDT overflow, the reset by the RES pin has priority and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to
0.
TCNT value
Overflow
H'FF
Time
H'00
WT/IT=1
TME=1
Write H'00
to TCNT
WOVF=1
WT/IT=1
TME=1
Write H'00
to TCNT
internal reset is
generated
Internal reset signal*
518 states
[Legend]
WT/IT: Timer mode select bit
TME: Timer enable bit
Note: * The internal reset signal is generated only if the RSTE bit is set to 1.
Figure 13.2 Example of WDT0 Watchdog Timer Operation
13.3.2
Interval Timer Mode
When the WDT is used as an interval timer, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each
time the TCNT overflows. Therefore, an interrupt can be generated at intervals.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 304 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
When the TCNT overflows in interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested
at the time the OVF bit of the TCSR is set to 1.
13.4
Interrupts
During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).
The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be
cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine.
Table 13.1 WDT Interrupt Source
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag
DTC Activation
WOVI
TCNT overflow
WOVF
Impossible
13.5
Usage Notes
13.5.1
Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer’s TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being
more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given
below.
Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR: To write to TCNT and TCSR, execute a word transfer
instruction. They cannot be written to by a byte transfer instruction.
TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. Therefore, the relative condition shown in
figure 13.3 needs to be satisfied in order to write to TCNT or TCSR. The transfer instruction
writes the lower byte data to TCNT or TCSR according to the satisfied condition.
To write to RSTCSR, execute a word transfer instruction for address H'FF76. A byte transfer
instruction cannot write to RSTCSR.
The method of writing 0 to the WOVF bit differs from that of writing to the RSTE and RSTS bits.
To write 0 to the WOVF bit, satisfy the condition shown in figure 13.3. If satisfied, the transfer
instruction clears the WOVF bit to 0, but has no effect on the RSTE and RSTS bits. To write to
the RSTE and RSTS bits, satisfy the condition shown in figure 13.3. If satisfied, the transfer
instruction writes the values in bits 6 and 5 of the lower byte into the RSTE and RSTS bits,
respectively, but has no effect on the WOVF bit.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 305 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
TCNT write
Writing to RSTE and RSTS bits
Address: H'FF74
H'FF76
15
8
H'A5
7
0
Write data
TCSR write
Writing 0 to WOVF bit
Address: H'FF74
H'FF76
15
8
H'A5
7
0
Write data or H'00
Figure 13.3 Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR (Example for WDT0)
Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR (WDT0): These registers are read in the same way as
other registers. The read addresses are H'FF74 for TCSR, H'FF75 for TCNT, and H'FF77 for
RSTCSR.
13.5.2
Conflict between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment
If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write
takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 13.4 shows this operation.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 13.4 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 306 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
13.5.3
Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0
If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in
the incrementation. Software must be used to stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to
0) before changing the value of bits CKS2 to CKS0.
13.5.4
Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer while the WDT is operating, errors
could occur in the incrementation. Software must be used to stop the watchdog timer (by clearing
the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode.
13.5.5
Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode
This LSI is not reset internally if TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit is cleared to 0 during
watchdog timer operation, however TCNT and TCSR of the WDT are reset.
TCNT, TCSR, or RSTCR cannot be written to for 132 states following an overflow. During this
period, any attempt to read the WOVF flag is not acknowledged. Accordingly, wait 132 states
after overflow to write 0 to the WOVF flag for clearing.
13.5.6
OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode
When the OVF flag setting conflicts with the OVF flag reading in interval timer mode, writing 0
to the OVF bit may not clear the flag even though the OVF bit has been read while it is 1. If there
is a possibility that the OVF flag setting and reading will conflict, such as when the OVF flag is
polled with the interval timer interrupt disabled, read the OVF bit while it is 1 at least twice before
writing 0 to the OVF bit to clear the flag.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 307 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 308 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
This LSI has three independent serial communication interface (SCI) channels. The SCI can
handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. Serial data
communication can be carried out using standard asynchronous communication chips such as a
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or an Asynchronous Communication
Interface Adapter (ACIA). A function is also provided for serial communication between
processors (multiprocessor communication function). The SCI also supports an IC card (Smart
Card) interface conforming to ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) as a serial communication
interface extension function.
Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI.
14.1
Features
• Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode
• Full-duplex communication capability
The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to
be executed simultaneously.
Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous
transmission and continuous reception of serial data.
• On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
External clock can be selected as a transfer clock source (except for in Smart Card interface
mode).
• Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer (except in the case of asynchronous mode 7-bit data)
• Four interrupt sources
Transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and receive error  that can issue
requests.
The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive-data-full interrupt can be used to activate the
data transfer controller (DTC).
• Module stop mode can be set
Asynchronous mode:
•
•
•
•
Data length: 8 or 7 bits
Stop bit length: 2 or 1 bits
Parity: Even, odd, or none
Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 309 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in the case of a
framing error
Clocked synchronous mode:
• Data length: 8 bits
• Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected
Smart Card interface:
Bus interface
• Automatic transmission of error signal (parity error) in receive mode
• Error signal detection and automatic data retransmission in transmit mode
• Direct convention and inverse convention both supported
Module data bus
RDR
TDR
BRR
SCMR
SSR
RxD
TxD
SCR
RSR
TSR
SMR
Baud rate
generator
Transmission/
reception control
Parity generation
φ
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
Clock
Parity check
External clock
SCK
[Legend]
RSR: Receive shift register
RDR: Receive data register
TSR: Transmit shift register
TDR: Transmit data register
SMR: Serial mode register
SCR: Serial control register
SSR: Serial status register
SCMR: Smart Card mode register
BRR: Bit rate register
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of SCI
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 310 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
Internal
data bus
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 14.1 shows the serial pins for each SCI channel.
Table 14.1 Pin Configuration
Channel
Pin Name*
I/O
Function
0
SCK0
I/O
SCI0 clock input/output
RxD0
Input
SCI0 receive data input
TxD0
Output
SCI0 transmit data output
SCK1
I/O
SCI1 clock input/output
1
2
Note:
14.3
*
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
SCK2
I/O
SCI2 clock input/output
RxD2
Input
SCI2 receive data input
TxD2
Output
SCI2 transmit data output
Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the
channel designation.
Register Descriptions
The SCI has the following registers for each channel. The serial mode register (SMR), serial status
register (SSR), and serial control register (SCR) are described separately for normal serial
communication interface mode and Smart Card interface mode because their bit functions differ in
part.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive shift register (RSR)
Receive data register (RDR)
Transmit data register (TDR)
Transmit shift register (TSR)
Serial mode register (SMR)
Serial control register (SCR)
Serial status register (SSR)
Smart card mode register (SCMR)
Bit rate register (BRR)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 311 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.3.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
RSR is a shift register that is used to receive serial data input to the RxD pin and convert it into
parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically.
RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
14.3.2
Receive Data Register (RDR)
RDR is an 8-bit register that stores received data. When the SCI has received one byte of serial
data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR, where it is stored. After this, RSR is
receive-enabled. As RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive
operations are possible. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR only
once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU.
14.3.3
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for transmission. When the SCI detects that TSR is empty,
it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-buffered
structure of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit data has
already been written to TDR during serial transmission, the SCI transfers the written data to TSR
to continue transmission. Although TDR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times, to
achieve reliable serial transmission, write transmit data to TDR only once after confirming that the
TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1.
14.3.4
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first
transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then sends the data to the TxD pin. TSR cannot be
directly accessed by the CPU.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 312 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.3.5
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
SMR is used to set the SCI’s serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source.
Some bit functions of SMR differ between normal serial communication interface mode and Smart
Card interface mode.
• Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
C/A
0
R/W
Communication Mode
0: Asynchronous mode
1: Clocked synchronous mode
6
CHR
0
R/W
Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous
mode)
0: Selects 8 bits as the data length
1: Selects 7 bits as the data length. LSB-first is
fixed and the MSB of TDR is not transmitted in
transmission
In clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length
of 8 bits is used.
5
PE
0
R/W
Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous
mode)
When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to
transmit data before transmission, and the parity
bit is checked in reception. For a multiprocessor
format, parity bit addition and checking are not
performed regardless of the PE bit setting.
4
O/E
0
R/W
Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in
asynchronous mode)
0: Selects even parity
1: Selects odd parity
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 313 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
3
STOP
0
R/W
Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous
mode)
Selects the stop bit length in transmission.
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
In reception, only the first stop bit is checked. If
the second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit
of the next transmit character.
2
MP
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Mode (enabled only in
asynchronous mode)
When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor
communication function is enabled. The PE bit
and O/E bit settings are invalid in multiprocessor
mode.
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Clock Select 1 and 0
0
CKS0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock source for the baud
rate generator.
00: φ clock (n = 0)
01: φ/4 clock (n = 1)
10: φ/16 clock (n = 2)
11: φ/64 clock (n = 3)
For the relationship between the bit rate register
setting and the baud rate, see section 14.3.9, Bit
Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal
representation of the value of n in BRR (see
section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 314 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
GM
0
R/W
GSM Mode
When this bit is set to 1, the SCI operates in GSM
mode. In GSM mode, the timing of the TEND
setting is advanced by 11.0 etu (Elementary Time
Unit: the time for transfer of one bit), and clock
output control mode addition is performed. For
details, refer to section 14.7.8, Clock Output
Control.
6
BLK
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, the SCI operates in block
transfer mode. For details on block transfer mode,
refer to section 14.7.3, Block Transfer Mode.
5
PE
0
R/W
Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous
mode)
When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to
transmit data in transmission, and the parity bit is
checked in reception. In Smart Card interface
mode, this bit must be set to 1.
4
O/E
0
R/W
Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in
asynchronous mode)
0: Selects even parity
1: Selects odd parity
For details on setting this bit in Smart Card
interface mode, refer to section 14.7.2, Data
Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode).
3
BCP1
0
R/W
Basic Clock Pulse 2 and 1
2
BCP0
0
R/W
These bits specify the number of basic clock
periods in a 1-bit transfer interval on the Smart
Card interface.
00: 32 clock (S = 32)
01: 64 clock (S = 64)
10: 372 clock (S = 372)
11: 256 clock (S = 256)
For details, refer to section 14.7.4, Receive Data
Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Smart
Card Interface Mode. S stands for the value of S
in BRR (see section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register
(BRR)).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 315 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Clock Select 1 and 0
0
CKS0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock source for the baud
rate generator.
00: φ clock (n = 0)
01: φ/4 clock (n = 1)
10: φ/16 clock (n = 2)
11: φ/64 clock (n = 3)
For the relationship between the bit rate register
setting and the baud rate, see section 14.3.9, Bit
Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal
representation of the value of n in BRR (see
section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 316 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.3.6
Serial Control Register (SCR)
SCR is a register that enables or disables SCI transfer operations and interrupt requests, and is also
used to selection of the transfer clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section
14.8, Interrupt Sources. Some bit functions of SCR differ between normal serial communication
interface mode and Smart Card interface mode.
• Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
TIE
0
R/W
Transmit Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, the TXI interrupt request
is enabled.
6
RIE
0
R/W
Receive Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt
requests are enabled.
5
TE
0
R/W
Transmit Enable
When this bit s set to 1, transmission is enabled.
4
RE
0
R/W
Receive Enable
When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled.
3
MPIE
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only
when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous
mode)
When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the
multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of
the RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in SSR is
prohibited. On receiving data in which the
multiprocessor bit is 1, this bit is automatically
cleared and normal reception is resumed. For
details, refer to section 14.5, Multiprocessor
Communication Function.
2
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
This bit is set to 1, TEI interrupt request is
enabled.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 317 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Clock Enable 0 and 1
0
CKE0
0
R/W
Selects the clock source and SCK pin function.
Asynchronous mode:
00: Internal baud rate generator
SCK pin functions as I/O port
01: Internal baud rate generator
Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit
rate from the SCK pin.
1×: External clock
Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit
rate from the SCK pin.
Clocked synchronous mode:
0×: Internal clock (SCK pin functions as clock
output)
1×: External clock (SCK pin functions as clock
input)
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 318 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
TIE
0
R/W
Transmit Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, TXI interrupt request is
enabled.
6
RIE
0
R/W
Receive Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt
requests are enabled.
5
TE
0
R/W
Transmit Enable
4
RE
0
R/W
Receive Enable
When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled.
When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled.
3
MPIE
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only
when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous
mode)
Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode.
2
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode.
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Clock Enable 1 and 0
0
CKE0
0
R/W
Enables or disables clock output from the SCK
pin. The clock output can be dynamically switched
in GSM mode. For details, refer to section 14.7.8,
Clock Output Control.
When the GM bit in SMR is 0
00: Output disabled (SCK pin can be used as an
I/O port pin)
01: Clock output
1×: Reserved
When the GM bit in SMR is 1
00: Output fixed low
01: Clock output
10: Output fixed high
11: Clock output
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 319 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.3.7
Serial Status Register (SSR)
SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot
be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared. Some bit
functions of SSR differ between normal serial communication interface mode and Smart Card
interface mode.
• Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 0)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
TDRE
1
R/W
Transmit Data Register Empty
Displays whether TDR contains transmit data.
[Setting conditions]
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When data is transferred from TDR to TSR
and data can be written to TDR
[Clearing conditions]
6
RDRF
0
R/W
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading
TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt
request and writes data to TDR
Receive Data Register Full
Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.
[Setting condition]
•
When serial reception ends normally and
receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR
[Clearing conditions]
•
When 0 is written to RDRF after reading
RDRF = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt
and transferred data from RDR
The RDRF flag is not affected and retains their
previous values when the RE bit in SCR is cleared
to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 320 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
5
ORER
0
R/W
Overrun Error
[Setting condition]
•
When the next serial reception is completed
while RDRF = 1
[Clearing condition]
•
4
FER
0
R/W
When 0 is written to ORER after reading
ORER = 1
Framing Error
[Setting condition]
•
When the stop bit is 0
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to FER after reading
FER = 1
In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is
checked.
3
PER
0
R/W
Parity Error
[Setting condition]
•
When a parity error is detected during
reception
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to PER after reading
PER = 1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 321 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
2
TEND
1
R
Transmit End
[Setting conditions]
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit
of a 1-byte serial transmit character
[Clearing conditions]
1
MPB
0
R
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading
TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt
and writes data to TDR
Multiprocessor Bit
MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive
data. When the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 its
previous state is retained.
0
MPBT
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer
MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to
the transmit data.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 322 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR is 1)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
TDRE
1
R/W
Transmit Data Register Empty
Displays whether TDR contains transmit data.
[Setting conditions]
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When data is transferred from TDR to TSR
and data can be written to TDR
[Clearing conditions]
6
RDRF
0
R/W
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading
TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt
request and writes data to TDR
Receive Data Register Full
Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.
[Setting condition]
•
When serial reception ends normally and
receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR
[Clearing conditions]
•
When 0 is written to RDRF after reading
RDRF = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt
and transferred data from RDR
The RDRF flag is not affected and retains their
previous values when the RE bit in SCR is cleared
to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 323 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
5
ORER
0
R/W
Overrun Error
[Setting condition]
•
When the next serial reception is completed
while RDRF = 1
[Clearing condition]
•
4
ERS
0
R/W
When 0 is written to ORER after reading
ORER = 1
Error Signal Status
[Setting condition]
•
When the low level of the error signal is
sampled
[Clearing condition]
•
3
PER
0
R/W
When 0 is written to ERS after reading
ERS =1
Parity Error
[Setting condition]
•
When a parity error is detected during
reception
[Clearing condition]
•
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 324 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
When 0 is written to PER after reading
PER = 1
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
2
TEND
1
R
Transmit End
This bit is set to 1 when no error signal has been
sent back from the receiving end and the next
transmit data is ready to be transferred to TDR.
[Setting conditions]
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0 and the ERS bit
is also 0
•
When the ERS bit is 0 and the TDRE bit is 1
after the specified interval following
transmission of 1-byte data.
The timing of bit setting differs according to
the register setting as follows:
When GM = 0 and BLK = 0, 2.5 etu after
transmission starts
When GM = 0 and BLK = 1, 1.5 etu after
transmission starts
When GM = 1 and BLK = 0, 1.0 etu after
transmission starts
When GM = 1 and BLK = 1, 1.0 etu after
transmission starts
[Clearing conditions]
1
MPB
0
R
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading
TDRE = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt
and writes data to TDR
Multiprocessor Bit
This bit is not used in Smart Card interface mode.
0
MPBT
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer
Write 0 to this bit in Smart Card interface mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 325 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.3.8
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)
SCMR is a register that selects Smart Card interface mode and its format.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4 
All 1

Reserved
3
0
R/W
These bits are always read as 1.
SDIR
Smart Card Data Transfer Direction
Selects the serial/parallel conversion format.
0: LSB-first in transfer
1: MSB-first in transfer
The bit setting is valid only when the transfer
data format is 8 bits. For 7-bit data, LSB-first is
fixed.
2
SINV
0
R/W
Smart Card Data Invert
Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The
SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the
parity bit. To invert the parity bit, invert the O/E bit
in SMR.
0: TDR contents are transmitted as they are.
Receive data is stored as it is in RDR
1: TDR contents are inverted before being
transmitted. Receive data is stored in inverted
form in RDR
1

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
0
SMIF
0
R/W
Smart Card Interface Mode Select
This bit is set to 1 to make the SCI operate in
Smart Card interface mode.
0: Normal asynchronous mode or clocked
synchronous mode
1: Smart card interface mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 326 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.3.9
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. As the SCI performs baud rate generator control
independently for each channel, different bit rates can be set for each channel. Table 14.2 shows
the relationships between the N setting in BRR and bit rate B for normal asynchronous mode,
clocked synchronous mode, and Smart Card interface mode. The initial value of BRR is H'FF, and
it can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
Table 14.2 The Relationships between The N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B
Mode
BRR Setting N
Asynchronous
Mode
N=
Clocked
Synchronous
Mode
N=
Smart Card
Interface Mode
N=
[Legend] B:
N:
φ:
n and S:
φ × 106
64 × 2 2n−1 × B
φ × 106
8 × 2 2n−1 × B
φ × 106
S × 2 2n+1 × B
Error
−1
Error (%) = {
φ × 106
B × 64 × 2 2n−1 × (N + 1)
− 1 } × 100
−1
− 1 Error (%) = {
φ × 106
B × S × 2 2n+1 × (N + 1)
− 1 } × 100
Bit rate (bit/s)
BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Operating frequency (MHz)
Determined by the SMR settings shown in the following tables.
SMR Setting
SMR Setting
CKS1
CKS0
n
BCP1
BCP0
S
0
0
0
0
0
32
0
1
1
0
1
64
1
0
2
1
0
372
1
1
3
1
1
256
Table 14.3 shows sample N settings in BRR in normal asynchronous mode. Table 14.4 shows the
maximum bit rate for each frequency in normal asynchronous mode. Table 14.6 shows sample N
settings in BRR in clocked synchronous mode. Table 14.8 shows sample N settings in BRR in
Smart Card interface mode. In Smart Card interface mode, S (the number of basic clock periods in
a 1-bit transfer interval) can be selected. For details, refer to section 14.7.4, Receive Data
Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Smart Card Interface Mode. Tables 14.5 and 14.7
show the maximum bit rates with external clock input.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 327 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
4
4.9152
5
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
2
70
0.03
2
86
0.31
2
88
–0.25
150
1
207
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
300
1
103
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
600
0
207
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
1200
0
103
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
2400
0
51
0.16
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
4800
0
25
0.16
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
9600
0
12
0.16
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
19200



0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
31250
0
3
0.00
0
4
–1.70
0
4
0.00
38400



0
3
0.00
0
3
1.73
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
6
6.144
7.3728
8
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
106
–0.44
2
108
0.08
2
130
–0.07
2
141
0.03
150
2
77
0.16
2
79
0.00
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
300
1
155
0.16
1
159
0.00
1
191
0.00
1
207
0.16
600
1
77
0.16
1
79
0.00
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.16
1200
0
155
0.16
0
159
0.00
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
2400
0
77
0.16
0
79
0.00
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
4800
0
38
0.16
0
39
0.00
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
9600
0
19
–2.34
0
19
0.00
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
19200
0
9
–2.34
0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
31250
0
5
0.00
0
5
2.40



0
7
0.00
38400
0
4
–2.34
0
4
0.00
0
5
0.00



Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 328 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
9.8304
10
12
12.288
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
174
–0.26
2
177
–0.25
2
212
0.03
2
217
0.08
150
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
2
155
0.16
2
159
0.00
300
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
2
77
0.16
2
79
0.00
600
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
1
155
0.16
1
159
0.00
1200
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
1
77
0.16
1
79
0.00
2400
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
0
155
0.16
0
159
0.00
4800
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
0
77
0.16
0
79
0.00
9600
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
0
38
0.16
0
39
0.00
19200
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
0
19
–2.34
0
19
0.00
31250
0
9
–1.70
0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
0
11
2.40
38400
0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
0
9
–2.34
0
9
0.00
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
14
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
14.7456
16
17.2032
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
248
–0.17
3
64
0.70
3
70
0.03
3
75
0.48
150
2
181
0.13
2
191
0.00
2
207
0.16
2
223
0.00
300
2
90
0.13
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
2
111
0.00
600
1
181
0.13
1
191
0.00
1
207
0.16
1
223
0.00
1200
1
90
0.13
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.16
1
111
0.00
2400
0
181
0.13
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
0
223
0.00
4800
0
90
0.13
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
0
111
0.00
9600
0
45
–0.93
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
0
55
0.00
19200
0
22
–0.93
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
0
27
0.00
31250
0
13
0.00
0
14
–1.70
0
15
0.00
0
13
1.20
38400



0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
0
13
0.00
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 329 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
18
19.6608
20
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
3
79
–0.12
3
86
0.31
3
88
–0.25
150
2
233
0.16
2
255
0.00
3
64
0.16
300
2
116
0.16
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
600
1
233
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
1200
1
116
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
2400
0
233
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
4800
0
116
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
9600
0
58
–0.69
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
19200
0
28
1.02
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
31250
0
17
0.00
0
19
–1.70
0
19
0.00
38400
0
14
–2.34
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
Table 14.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
n
N
φ (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
n
N
4
125000
0
0
12
375000
0
0
4.9152
153600
0
0
12.288
384000
0
0
5
156250
0
0
14
437500
0
0
6
187500
0
0
14.7456
460800
0
0
6.144
192000
0
0
16
500000
0
0
7.3728
230400
0
0
17.2032
537600
0
0
8
250000
0
0
18
562500
0
0
9.8304
307200
0
0
19.6608
614400
0
0
10
312500
0
0
20
625000
0
0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 330 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
External Input
Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
φ (MHz)
External Input
Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
4
1.0000
62500
12
3.0000
187500
4.9152
1.2288
76800
12.288
3.0720
192000
5
1.2500
78125
14
3.5000
218750
6
1.5000
93750
14.7456
3.6864
230400
6.144
1.5360
96000
16
4.0000
250000
7.3728
1.8432
115200
17.2032
4.3008
268800
8
2.0000
125000
18
4.5000
281250
9.8304
2.4576
153600
19.6608
4.9152
307200
10
2.5000
156250
20
5.0000
312500
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 331 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
4
n
N
8
10
16
n
N
n
N
n
N
20
n
N
110


250
2
249
3
124


3
249
500
2
124
2
249


3
124


1k
1
249
2
124


2
249


2.5 k
1
99
1
199
1
249
2
99
2
124
5k
0
199
1
99
1
124
1
199
1
249
10 k
0
99
0
199
0
249
1
99
1
124
25 k
0
39
0
79
0
99
0
159
0
199
50 k
0
19
0
39
0
49
0
79
0
99
100 k
0
9
0
19
0
24
0
39
0
49
250 k
0
3
0
7
0
9
0
15
0
19
500 k
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
7
0
9
1M
0
0*
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
0*
0
1
0*
2.5 M
5M
0
[Legend]
Blank: Setting prohibited.
:
Can be set, but there will be a degree of error.
*:
Continuous transfer is not possible.
Table 14.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
External Input
Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
φ (MHz)
External Input
Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
4
0.6667
666666.7
14
2.3333
2333333.3
6
1.0000
1.000000.0
16
2.6667
2666666.7
8
1.3333
1333333.3
18
3.0000
3000000.0
10
1.6667
1666666.7
20
3.3333
3333333.3
12
2.0000
2000000.0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 332 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.8 Examples of Bit Rate for Various BRR Settings (Smart Card Interface Mode)
(When n = 0 and S = 372)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
7.1424
10.00
10.7136
13.00
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
9600
0
0
0.00
0
1
30
0
1
25
0
1
8.99
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
14.2848
16.00
18.00
20.00
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
9600
0
1
0.00
0
1
12.01
0
2
15.99 0
2
6.60
Table 14.9 Maximum Bit Rate at Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode)
(When S = 372)
φ (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
n
N
φ (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
n
N
7.1424
9600
0
0
14.2848
19200
0
0
10.00
13441
0
0
16.00
21505
0
0
10.7136
14400
0
0
18.00
24194
0
0
13.00
17473
0
0
20.00
26882
0
0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 333 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.4
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
Figure 14.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One frame consists
of a start bit (low level), followed by transfer/receive data (in LSB-first order), a parity bit (high or
low level), and finally stop bits (high level). In asynchronous serial communication, the
transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the transmission
line. When the transmission line goes to the space state (low level), the SCI recognizes a start bit
and starts serial communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units,
enabling full-duplex. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure,
so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer.
1
Serial
data
LSB
D0
0
Idle state
(mark state)
1
MSB
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Start
bit
Transmit/receive data
1 bit
8 or 7 bits
D6
D7
0/1
Parity
bit
1 bit,
or none
1
1
Stop bit
2 or
1 bits
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 14.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)
14.4.1
Data Transfer Format
Table 14.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12
transfer formats can be selected according to the SMR setting. For details on the multiprocessor
bit, refer to section 14.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 334 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
SMR Settings
Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length
CHR
PE
MP
STOP
1
0
0
0
0
S
8-bit data
STOP
0
0
0
1
S
8-bit data
STOP STOP
0
1
0
0
S
8-bit data
P STOP
0
1
0
1
S
8-bit data
P STOP STOP
1
0
0
0
S
7-bit data
STOP
1
0
0
1
S
7-bit data
STOP STOP
1
1
0
0
S
7-bit data
P
STOP
1
1
0
1
S
7-bit data
P
STOP STOP
0
—
1
0
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP
0
—
1
1
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
1
—
1
0
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP
1
—
1
1
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
[Legend]
S:
Start bit
STOP: Stop bit
P:
Parity bit
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 335 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.4.2
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer
rate. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and
performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th
pulse of the basic clock as shown in figure 14.3. Thus, the reception margin in asynchronous mode
is given by formula (1) below.
M = { (0.5 –
D – 0.5
1
)–
N
2N
– (L – 0.5) F} × 100 [%]
... Formula (1)
Where N:
D:
L:
F:
Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16)
Clock duty cycle (D = 0.5 to 1.0)
Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
Absolute value of clock rate deviation
Assuming values of F (absolute value of clock rate deviation) = 0 and D (clock duty cycle) = 0.5
in formula (1), the reception margin can be given by the formula.
M = {0.5 – 1/(2 × 16)} × 100 [%] = 46.875%
However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 30% to 20% should be allowed for in
system design.
16 clocks
8 clocks
0
7
15 0
7
15 0
Internal basic
clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Start bit
D0
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 14.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 336 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
D1
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.4.3
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at
the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI’s serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in
SMR and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the
clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used.
When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The
frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the
rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 14.4.
SCK
TxD
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
1 frame
Figure 14.4 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 337 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.4.4
SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize
the SCI as described below. When the operating mode, or transfer format, is changed for example,
the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure.
When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does
not initialize the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR.
When the external clock is used in asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during
initialization.
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR.
Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE,
TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and
RE, to 0.
Start initialization
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE and RE bits are cleared to 0.)
[1]
Set data transfer format in
SMR and SCMR
[2]
Set value in BRR
[3]
When the clock is selected in
asynchronous mode, it is output
immediately after SCR settings are
made.
[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR
and SCMR.
[3] Write a value corresponding to the
bit rate to BRR. Not necessary if
an external clock is used.
Wait
No
1-bit interval elapsed?
Yes
Set TE and RE bits in
SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits
[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then
set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.
Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables
the TxD and RxD pins to be used.
[4]
<Initialization completion>
Figure 14.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 338 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.4.5
Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)
Figure 14.6 shows an example of operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In
transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. If the flag is cleared to 0, the SCI recognizes that
data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI)
is generated. Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine writes next
transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed.
3. Data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order: start bit, transmit data, parity bit or
multiprocessor bit (may be omitted depending on the format), and stop bit.
4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
5. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then
serial transmission of the next frame is started.
6. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the “mark
state” is entered, in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI
interrupt request is generated.
Figure 14.7 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode.
1
Start
bit
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
1
Idle state
(mark state)
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
Data written to TDR and
TXI interrupt
request generated TDRE flag cleared to 0 in
request generated
TXI interrupt service routine
TEI interrupt
request generated
1 frame
Figure 14.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 339 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[1]
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
[2] SCI status check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR and clear the
TDRE flag to 0.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR
and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted?
Yes
[3]
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
No
Break output?
Yes
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data
output pin.
After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame
of 1s is output, and transmission is
enabled.
[4]
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible,
then write data to TDR, and then
clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking
and clearing of the TDRE flag is
automatic when the DTC is
activated by a transmit data empty
interrupt (TXI) request, and data is
written to TDR.
[4] Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial
transmission, set DDR for the port
corresponding to the TxD pin to 1,
clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit
in SCR to 0.
Clear DR to 0 and
set DDR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 340 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.4.6
Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)
Figure 14.8 shows an example of operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial
reception, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the communication line. If a start bit is detected, the SCI performs internal
synchronization, receives receive data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit.
2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag
is still set to 1), the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an
ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF flag
remains to be set to 1.
3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to
RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated.
4. If a framing error is detected (when the stop bit is 0), the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive
data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt
request is generated.
5. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is
generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive
data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has been completed.
1
Start
bit
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
0
1
Idle state
(mark state)
RDRF
FER
RXI interrupt
request
generated
RDR data read and RDRF
flag cleared to 0 in RXI
interrupt service routine
ERI interrupt request
generated by framing
error
1 frame
Figure 14.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 341 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.11 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive
error is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving
data. Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the
ORER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 14.9 shows a sample
flowchart for serial data reception.
Table 14.11 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling
SSR Status Flag
RDRF*
ORER
FER
PER
Receive Data
Receive Error Type
1
1
0
0
Lost
Overrun error
0
0
1
0
Transferred to RDR
Framing error
0
0
0
1
Transferred to RDR
Parity error
1
1
1
0
Lost
Overrun error + framing error
1
1
0
1
Lost
Overrun error + parity error
0
0
1
1
Transferred to RDR
Framing error + parity error
1
1
1
1
Lost
Overrun error + framing error +
parity error
Note:
*
The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 342 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1]
Start reception
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data input
pin.
[2] [3] Receive error processing and break
detection:
[2]
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to
identify the error. After performing the
Yes
appropriate error processing, ensure
PER∨FER∨ORER = 1
that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are
[3]
all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be
No
Error processing
resumed if any of these flags are set to
1. In the case of a framing error, a
(Continued on next page)
break can be detected by reading the
value of the input port corresponding to
[4]
Read RDRF flag in SSR
the RxD pin.
Read ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR
[4] SCI status check and receive data read:
Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1,
then read the receive data in RDR and
clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of
the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be
identified by an RXI interrupt.
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
[5]
[5] Serial reception continuation procedure:
To continue serial reception, before the
stop bit for the current frame is
received, read the RDRF flag, read
RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0.
The RDRF flag is cleared automatically
when DTC is activated by an RXI
interrupt and the RDR value is read.
<End>
Figure 14.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 343 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[3]
Error processing
No
ORER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
Framing error processing
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
No
PER = 1
Yes
Parity error processing
Clear ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.9 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 344 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.5
Multiprocessor Communication Function
Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer between a number of
processors sharing communication lines by asynchronous serial communication using the
multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When
multiprocessor communication is performed, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID
code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles; an ID transmission cycle
that specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to
differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the
multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle; if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the
cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 14.10 shows an example of inter-processor
communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code
of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1
multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its
own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose IDs do not
match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received.
The SCI uses the MPIE bit in SCR to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1,
transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags,
RDRF, FER, and ORER to 1, are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On
reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1 and the
MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to
1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated.
When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is rendered invalid. All other bit
settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor
communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 345 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transmitting
station
Serial transmission line
Receiving
station A
Receiving
station B
Receiving
station C
Receiving
station D
(ID = 01)
(ID = 02)
(ID = 03)
(ID = 04)
Serial
data
H'01
H'AA
(MPB = 1)
(MPB = 0)
ID transmission cycle = Data transmission cycle =
receiving station
Data transmission to
specification
receiving station specified by ID
Legend:
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Figure 14.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)
14.5.1
Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission
Figure 14.11 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID
transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission
cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI operations are the same
as those in asynchronous mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 346 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[1]
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
No
[2] SCI status check and transmit
data write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR. Set the
MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1.
Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0.
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
set MPBT bit in SSR
Clear TDRE flag to 0
No
All data transmitted?
[3]
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
No
Break output?
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data
output pin.
After the TE bit is set to 1, a
frame of 1s is output, and
transmission is enabled.
[4]
Yes
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission,
be sure to read 1 from the TDRE
flag to confirm that writing is
possible, then write data to TDR,
and then clear the TDRE flag to
0. Checking and clearing of the
TDRE flag is automatic when the
DTC is activated by a transmit
data empty interrupt (TXI)
request, and data is written to
TDR.
[4] Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial
transmission, set the port DDR to
1, clear DR to 0, then clear the
TE bit in SCR to 0.
Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
14.5.2
Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 347 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Figure 14.13 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in
SCR is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On receiving data
with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request is
generated at this time. All other SCI operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure
14.12 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception.
1
Start
bit
0
Data (ID1)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
1
Stop
bit
Start
bit
1
0
Data (Data1)
D0
D1
Stop
MPB bit
D7
0
1
1 Idle state
(mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
MPIE = 0
RXI interrupt
request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
generated
If not this station’s ID,
MPIE bit is set to 1
again
RDR data read
and RDRF flag
cleared to 0 in
RXI interrupt
service routine
RXI interrupt request is
not generated, and RDR
retains its state
(a) Data does not match station’s ID
1
Start
bit
0
Data (ID2)
D0
D1
Stop
MPB bit
D7
1
1
Start
bit
0
Data (Data2)
D0
D1
D7
Stop
MPB bit
0
1
1 Idle state
(mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
MPIE = 0
Data2
ID2
RXI interrupt
request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
generated
RDR data read and
RDRF flag cleared
to 0 in RXI interrupt
service routine
Matches this station’s ID,
so reception continues, and
data is received in RXI
interrupt service routine
MPIE bit set to 1
again
(b) Data matches station’s ID
Figure 14.12 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 348 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically designated
as the receive data input pin.
[1]
Start reception
Read MPIE bit in SCR
[2] ID reception cycle:
Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1.
[2]
[3] SCI status check, ID reception and
comparison:
Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the receive
data in RDR and compare it with this
station’s ID.
If the data is not this station’s ID, set the
MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF
flag to 0.
If the data is this station’s ID, clear the
RDRF flag to 0.
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
FER ∨ ORER = 1
Yes
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[3]
No
RDRF = 1
[4] SCI status check and data reception:
Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the data in
RDR.
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
No
This station’s ID?
Yes
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
FER ∨ ORER = 1
Yes
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[5] Receive error processing and break
detection:
If a receive error occurs, read the ORER
and FER flags in SSR to identify the
error. After performing the appropriate
error processing, ensure that the ORER
and FER flags are all cleared to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if either
of these flags is set to 1.
In the case of a framing error, a break
can be detected by reading the RxD pin
[4]
value.
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
No
All data received?
[5]
Error processing
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
(Continued on
next page)
<End>
Figure 14.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 349 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[5]
Error processing
No
ORER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
Framing error processing
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
Clear ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 350 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.6
Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Figure 14.14 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked
synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received synchronous with clock pulses. Each character
of data transferred consists of 8 bits. In clocked synchronous serial communication, data on the
transmission line is output from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. In clocked
synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronous with the rising edge of the serial clock.
After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state. In clocked synchronous
mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are
independent units, enabling full-duplex communication through the use of a common clock. Both
the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so data can be read or
written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer.
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
*
*
Synchronization
clock
MSB
LSB
Bit 0
Serial data
Bit 1
Don’t care
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Don’t care
Note: * High except in continuous transfer
Figure 14.14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication (For LSB-First)
14.6.1
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external
synchronization clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of CKE0 and
CKE1 bits in SCR. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from
the SCK pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no
transfer is performed the clock is fixed high.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 351 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.6.2
SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, the TE and RE bits in SCR should be cleared to 0, then the
SCI should be initialized as described in a sample flowchart in figure 14.15. When the operating
mode, or transfer format, is changed for example, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before
making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag
is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER,
FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR.
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure
to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, TE,
and RE, to 0.
Start initialization
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and
SCMR.
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE, RE bits 0)
[1]
Set data transfer format in
SMR and SCMR
[2]
Set value in BRR
[3]
Wait
[3] Write a value corresponding to the bit
rate to BRR. Not necessary if an
external clock is used.
[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set
the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.
Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE
bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables the
TxD and RxD pins to be used.
No
1-bit interval elapsed?
Yes
Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and
set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits
[4]
<Transfer start>
Note: * In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be
cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously.
Figure 14.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 352 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.6.3
Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Figure 14.16 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode.
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if the flag is 0, the SCI recognizes that data has
been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI)
is generated. Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine writes the
next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed.
3. 8-bit data is sent from the TxD pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock
mode has been specified, and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock
has been specified.
4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).
5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission
of the next frame is started.
6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TDRE flag maintains the
output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request
is generated. The SCK pin is fixed high.
Figure 14.17 shows a sample flow chart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is
cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (ORER, FER, or PER) is set to 1.
Make sure that the receive error flags are cleared to 0 before starting transmission. Note that
clearing the RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 353 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transfer direction
Synchronization
clock
Serial data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
request generated
Data written to TDR
and TDRE flag cleared
to 0 in TXI interrupt
service routine
TXI interrupt
request generated
TEI interrupt request
generated
1 frame
Figure 14.16 Sample SCI Transmission Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 354 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1]
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted?
[3]
Yes
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data output
pin.
[2] SCI status check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, then write transmit data
to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission, be
sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible, then
write data to TDR, and then clear the
TDRE flag to 0.
Checking and clearing of the TDRE
flag is automatic when the DTC is
activated by a transmit data empty
interrupt (TXI) request and data is
written to TDR.
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 355 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.6.4
Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Figure 14.18 shows an example of SCI operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In
serial reception, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI performs internal initialization synchronous with a synchronous clock input or output,
starts receiving data, and stores the received data in RSR.
2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag
in SSR is still set to 1), the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this
time, an ERI interrupt request is generated, receive data is not transferred to RDR, and the
RDRF flag remains to be set to 1.
3. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is
generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive
data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished.
Synchronization
clock
Serial data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
RDRF
ORER
RXI interrupt
request
generated
RDR data read and
RDRF flag cleared
to 0 in RXI interrupt
service routine
RXI interrupt
request generated
ERI interrupt request
generated by overrun
error
1 frame
Figure 14.18 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER,
FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 14.19 shows a sample flow
chart for serial data reception.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 356 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
[1]
Initialization
Start reception
[2]
Read ORER flag in SSR
Yes
[3]
ORER = 1
No
Error processing
(Continued below)
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[4]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
[5]
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data input
pin.
[2] [3] Receive error processing:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER flag in SSR, and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the ORER flag to 0.
Transfer cannot be resumed if the
ORER flag is set to 1.
[4] SCI status check and receive data
read:
Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the receive
data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag
to 0.
Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1
can also be identified by an RXI
interrupt.
[5] Serial reception continuation
procedure:
To continue serial reception, before
the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is
received, reading the RDRF flag,
reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF
flag to 0 should be finished. The
RDRF flag is cleared automatically
when the DTC is activated by a
receive data full interrupt (RXI) request
and the RDR value is read.
<End>
[3]
Error processing
Overrun error processing
Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 357 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.6.5
Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous
Mode)
Figure 14.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations.
The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive
operations after initializing the SCI. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and
receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND
flags are set to 1, clear TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction.
To switch from receive mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the
SCI has finished reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error
flags (ORER, FER, and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single
instruction.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 358 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Initialization
[1]
[1]
SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is designated as the
transmit data output pin, and the RxD
pin is designated as the receive data
input pin, enabling simultaneous
transmit and receive operations.
[2]
SCI status check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, then write transmit
data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag
to 0.
Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to
1 can also be identified by a TXI
interrupt.
Receive error processing:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER flag in SSR, and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the ORER flag to 0.
Transmission/reception cannot be
resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1.
Start transmission/reception
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2]
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
[3]
Read ORER flag in SSR
ORER = 1
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
Yes
[3]
Error processing
[4]
SCI status check and receive data
read:
Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the receive
data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag
to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from
0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI
interrupt.
[5]
Serial transmission/reception
continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission/
reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of
the current frame is received, finish
reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR,
and clearing the RDRF flag to 0.
Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the
current frame is transmitted, read 1
from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible. Then write data to
TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Checking and clearing of the TDRE
flag is automatic when the DTC is
activated by a transmit data empty
interrupt (TXI) request and data is
written to TDR. Also, the RDRF flag
is cleared automatically when the
DTC is activated by a receive data full
interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR
value is read.
[4]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
[5]
Yes
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
<End>
Note: * When switching from transmit or receive operation to simultaneous
transmit and receive operations, first clear the TE bit and RE bit to 0,
then set both these bits to 1 simultaneously.
Figure 14.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 359 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.7
Operation in Smart Card Interface
The SCI supports an IC card (Smart Card) interface that conforms to ISO/IEC 7816-3
(Identification Card) as a serial communication interface extension function. Switching between
the normal serial communication interface and the Smart Card interface mode is carried out by
means of a register setting.
14.7.1
Pin Connection Example
Figure 14.21 shows an example of connection with the Smart Card. In communication with an IC
card, as both transmission and reception are carried out on a single data transmission line, the TxD
pin and RxD pin should be connected to the LSI pin. The data transmission line should be pulled
up to the VCC power supply with a resistor. If an IC card is not connected, and the TE and RE bits
are both set to 1, closed transmission/reception is possible, enabling self-diagnosis to be carried
out. When the clock generated on the Smart Card interface is used by an IC card, the SCK pin
output is input to the CLK pin of the IC card. This LSI port output is used as the reset signal.
VCC
TxD
RxD
SCK
Rx (port)
This LSI
Data line
Clock line
Reset line
I/O
CLK
RST
IC card
Connected equipment
Figure 14.21 Schematic Diagram of Smart Card Interface Pin Connections
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 360 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.7.2
Data Format (Except for Block Transfer Mode)
Figure 14.22 shows the transfer data format in Smart Card interface mode.
• One frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit in asynchronous mode.
• In transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (Elementary Time Unit: the time for transfer of
one bit) is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame.
• If a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for one etu
period, 10.5 etu after the start bit.
• If an error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is retransmitted automatically
after a delay of 2 etu or longer.
When there is no parity error
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
D6
D7
Dp
Transmitting station output
When a parity error occurs
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
DE
Transmitting station output
[Legend]
DS:
D0 to D7:
Dp:
DE:
Receiving station
output
Start bit
Data bits
Parity bit
Error signal
Figure 14.22 Normal Smart Card Interface Data Format
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 361 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Data transfer with other types of IC cards (direct convention and inverse convention) are
performed as described in the following.
(Z)
A
Z
Z
A
Z
Z
Z
A
A
Z
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
(Z)
State
Figure 14.23 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0)
With the direction convention type IC and the above sample start character, the logic 1 level
corresponds to state Z and the logic 0 level to state A, and transfer is performed in LSB-first order.
The start character data above is H'3B. For the direct convention type, clear the SDIR and SINV
bits in SCMR to 0. According to Smart Card regulations, clear the O/E bit in SMR to 0 to select
even parity mode.
(Z)
A
Z
Z
A
A
A
A
A
A
Z
Ds
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Dp
(Z)
State
Figure 14.24 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1)
With the inverse convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state A and the logic 0 level to
state Z, and transfer is performed in MSB-first order. The start character data for the above is
H'3F. For the inverse convention type, set the SDIR and SINV bits in SCMR to 1. According to
Smart Card regulations, even parity mode is the logic 0 level of the parity bit, and corresponds to
state Z. In this LSI, the SINV bit inverts only data bits D7 to D0. Therefore, set the O/E bit in
SMR to 1 to invert the parity bit for both transmission and reception.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 362 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.7.3
Block Transfer Mode
Operation in block transfer mode is the same as that in SCI asynchronous mode, except for the
following points.
• In reception, though the parity check is performed, no error signal is output even if an error is
detected. However, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and must be cleared before receiving the
parity bit of the next frame.
• In transmission, a guard time of at least 1 etu is left between the end of the parity bit and the
start of the next frame.
• In transmission, because retransmission is not performed, the TEND flag is set to 1, 11.5 etu
after transmission start.
• As with the normal Smart Card interface, the ERS flag indicates the error signal status, but
since error signal transfer is not performed, this flag is always cleared to 0.
14.7.4
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Smart Card Interface
Mode
In Smart Card interface mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 32, 64, 372,
or 256 times the transfer rate (fixed at 16 times in normal asynchronous mode) as determined by
bits BCP1 and BCP0. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic
clock, and performs internal synchronization. As shown in figure 14.25, by sampling receive data
at the rising-edge of the 16th, 32nd, 186th, or 128th pulse of the basic clock, data can be latched at
the middle of the bit. The reception margin is given by the following formula.
M = | (0.5 –
| D – 0.5 |
1
) – (L – 0.5) F –
(1 + F) | × 100%
N
2N
Where M: Reception margin (%)
N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 32, 64, 372, and 256)
D: Clock duty cycle (D = 0 to 1.0)
L: Frame length (L = 10)
F: Absolute value of clock frequency deviation
Assuming values of F = 0, D = 0.5 and N = 372 in the above formula, the reception margin
formula is as follows.
M = (0.5 – 1/2 × 372) × 100%
= 49.866%
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 363 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
372 clocks
186 clocks
0
185
185
371 0
371 0
Internal
basic clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Start bit
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 14.25 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode
(Using Clock of 372 Times the Transfer Rate)
14.7.5
Initialization
Before transmitting and receiving data, initialize the SCI as described below. Initialization is also
necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0.
Clear the error flags ERS, PER, and ORER in SSR to 0.
Set the GM, BLK, O/E, BCP0, BCP1, CKS0, CKS1 bits in SMR. Set the PE bit to 1.
Set the SMIF, SDIR, and SINV bits in SCMR.
When the SMIF bit is set to 1, the TxD and RxD pins are both switched from ports to SCI pins,
and are placed in the high-impedance state.
5. Set the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR.
6. Set the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. Clear the TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, and TEIE bits to 0.
If the CKE0 bit is set to 1, the clock is output from the SCK pin.
7. Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits in SCR. Do not set the TE
bit and RE bit at the same time, except for self-diagnosis.
To switch from receive mode to transmit mode, after checking that the SCI has finished reception,
initialize the SCI, and set RE to 0 and TE to 1. Whether SCI has finished reception or not can be
checked with the RDRF, PER, or ORER flags. To switch from transmit mode to receive mode,
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 364 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
after checking that the SCI has finished transmission, initialize the SCI, and set TE to 0 and RE to
1. Whether SCI has finished transmission or not can be checked with the TEND flag.
14.7.6
Data Transmission (Except for Block Transfer Mode)
As data transmission in Smart Card interface mode involves error signal sampling and
retransmission processing, the operations are different from those in normal serial communication
interface mode (except for block transfer mode). Figure 14.26 illustrates the retransfer operation
when the SCI is in transmit mode.
1. If an error signal is sent back from the receiving end after transmission of one frame is
complete, the ERS bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an ERI
interrupt request is generated. The ERS bit in SSR should be kept cleared to 0 until the next
parity bit is sampled.
2. The TEND bit in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error signal indicating an abnormality
is received. Data is retransferred from TDR to TSR, and retransmitted automatically.
3. If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, the ERS bit in SSR is not set.
Transmission of one frame, including a retransfer, is judged to have been completed, and the
TEND bit in SSR is set to 1. If the TIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, a TXI interrupt
request is generated. Writing transmit data to TDR transfers the next transmit data.
Figure 14.28 shows a flowchart for transmission. The sequence of transmit operations can be
performed automatically by specifying the DTC to be activated with a TXI interrupt source. In a
transmit operation, the TDRE flag is set to 1 at the same time as the TEND flag in SSR is set, and
a TXI interrupt will be generated if the TIE bit in SCR has been set to 1. If the TXI request is
designated beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be activated by the TXI request,
and transfer of the transmit data will be carried out. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically
cleared to 0 when data is transferred by the DTC. In the event of an error, the SCI retransmits the
same data automatically. During this period, the TEND flag remains cleared to 0 and the DTC is
not activated. Therefore, the SCI and DTC will automatically transmit the specified number of
bytes in the event of an error, including retransmission. However, the ERS flag is not cleared
automatically when an error occurs, and so the RIE bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an
ERI request will be generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will be cleared.
When performing transfer using the DTC, it is essential to set and enable the DTC before carrying
out SCI setting. For details of the DTC setting procedures, refer to section 8, Data Transfer
Controller (DTC).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 365 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transfer
frame n+1
Retransferred frame
nth transfer frame
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
(DE)
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
TDRE
Transfer to TSR from TDR
Transfer to TSR
from TDR
Transfer to TSR from TDR
TEND
[7]
[9]
FER/ERS
[6]
[8]
Figure 14.26 Retransfer Operation in SCI Transmit Mode
The timing for setting the TEND flag depends on the value of the GM bit in SMR. The TEND flag
set timing is shown in figure 14.27.
I/O data
Ds
D0
D1
TXI
(TEND interrupt)
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
DE
Guard
time
12.5 etu
When GM = 0
11.0 etu
When GM = 1
[Legend]
Ds:
D0 to D7:
Dp:
DE:
Start bit
Data bits
Parity bit
Error signal
Figure 14.27 TEND Flag Generation Timing in Transmission Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 366 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Start
Initialization
Start transmission
ERS = 0?
No
Yes
Error processing
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
Write data to TDR,
and clear TDRE flag
in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted ?
Yes
No
ERS = 0?
Yes
Error processing
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
Clear TE bit to 0
End
Figure 14.28 Example of Transmission Processing Flow
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 367 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.7.7
Serial Data Reception (Except for Block Transfer Mode)
Data reception in Smart Card interface mode uses the same operation procedure as for normal
serial communication interface mode. Figure 14.29 illustrates the retransfer operation when the
SCI is in receive mode.
1. If an error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is
automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set at this time, an ERI interrupt request is
generated. The PER bit in SSR should be kept cleared to 0 until the next parity bit is sampled.
2. The RDRF bit in SSR is not set for a frame in which an error has occurred.
3. If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit in SSR is not set to 1,
the receive operation is judged to have been completed normally, and the RDRF flag in SSR is
automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is enabled at this time, an RXI interrupt request is
generated.
Figure 14.30 shows a flowchart for reception. A sequence of receive operations can be performed
automatically by specifying the DTC to be activated using an RXI interrupt source. In a receive
operation, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag is set to 1 if the RIE bit is set
to 1. If the RXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be
activated by the RXI request, and the receive data will be transferred. The RDRF flag is cleared to
0 automatically when data is transferred by the DTC. If an error occurs in receive mode and the
ORER or PER flag is set to 1, a transfer error interrupt (ERI) request will be generated. Hence, so
the error flag must be cleared to 0. In the event of an error, the DTC is not activated and receive
data is skipped. Therefore, receive data is transferred for only the specified number of bytes in the
event of an error. Even when a parity error occurs in receive mode and the PER flag is set to 1, the
data that has been received is transferred to RDR and can be read from there.
Note: For details on receive operations in block transfer mode, refer to section 14.4, Operation in
Asynchronous Mode.
Transfer
frame n+1
Retransferred frame
nth transfer frame
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
(DE)
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
RDRF
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
PER
Figure 14.29 Retransfer Operation in SCI Receive Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 368 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Start
Initialization
Start reception
ORER = 0 and
PER = 0
No
Yes
Error processing
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read RDR and clear
RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit to 0
Figure 14.30 Example of Reception Processing Flow
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 369 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.7.8
Clock Output Control
When the GM bit in SMR is set to 1, the clock output level can be fixed with bits CKE0 and
CKE1 in SCR. At this time, the minimum clock pulse width can be made the specified width.
Figure 14.31 shows the timing for fixing the clock output level. In this example, GM is set to 1,
CKE1 is cleared to 0, and the CKE0 bit is controlled.
CKE0
SCK
Specified pulse width
Specified pulse width
Figure 14.31 Timing for Fixing Clock Output Level
When turning on the power or switching between Smart Card interface mode and software
standby mode, the following procedures should be followed in order to maintain the clock duty
cycle.
Powering On: To secure clock duty cycle from power-on, the following switching procedure
should be followed.
1. The initial state is port input and high impedance. Use a pull-up resistor or pull-down
resistor to fix the potential.
2. Fix the SCK pin to the specified output level with the CKE1 bit in SCR.
3. Set SMR and SCMR, and switch to smart card mode operation.
4. Set the CKE0 bit in SCR to 1 to start clock output.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 370 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
When Changing from Smart Card Interface Mode to Software Standby Mode:
1. Set the data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) corresponding to the SCK pin
to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode.
2. Write 0 to the TE bit and RE bit in the serial control register (SCR) to halt transmit/receive
operation. At the same time, set the CKE1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in
software standby mode.
3. Write 0 to the CKE0 bit in SCR to halt the clock.
4. Wait for one serial clock period.
During this interval, clock output is fixed at the specified level, with the duty cycle
preserved.
5. Make the transition to the software standby state.
When Returning to Smart Card Interface Mode from Software Standby Mode:
1. Exit the software standby state.
2. Write 1 to the CKE0 bit in SCR and output the clock. Signal generation is started with the
normal duty cycle.
Software
standby
Normal operation
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5]
Normal operation
[6] [7]
Figure 14.32 Clock Halt and Restart Procedure
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 371 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.8
Interrupt Sources
14.8.1
Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode
Table 14.12 shows the interrupt sources in normal serial communication interface mode. A
different interrupt vector is assigned to each interrupt source, and individual interrupt sources can
be enabled or disabled using the enable bits in SCR.
When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag
in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt can activate the DTC to
perform data transfer. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data is transferred by the
DTC.
When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER,
PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt
request can activate the DTC to transfer data. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when
data is transferred by the DTC.
A TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 and the TEIE bit is set to 1. If a TEI
interrupt and a TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt has priority for
acceptance. However, if the TDRE and TEND flags are cleared simultaneously by the TXI
interrupt routine, the SCI cannot branch to the TEI interrupt routine later.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 372 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.12 SCI Interrupt Sources
Channel
Name
0
ERI_0
Receive Error
ORER, FER, PER
Not possible
RXI_0
Receive Data Full
RDRF
Possible
TXI_0
Transmit Data Empty
TDRE
Possible
TEI_0
Transmission End
TEND
Not possible
ERI_1
Receive Error
ORER, FER, PER
Not possible
RXI_1
Receive Data Full
RDRF
Possible
TXI_1
Transmit Data Empty
TDRE
Possible
TEI_1
Transmission End
TEND
Not possible
ERI_2
Receive Error
ORER, FER, PER
Not possible
RXI_2
Receive Data Full
RDRF
Possible
TXI_2
Transmit Data Empty
TDRE
Possible
TEI_2
Transmission End
TEND
Not possible
1
2
14.8.2
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag
DTC Activation
Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode
Table 14.13 shows the interrupt sources in Smart Card interface mode. The transmit end interrupt
(TEI) request cannot be used in this mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 373 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Table 14.13 SCI Interrupt Sources
Channel
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag
DTC Activation
0
ERI_0
Receive Error, error
signal detection
ORER, PER, ERS
Not possible
RXI_0
Receive Data Full
RDRF
Possible
TXI_0
Transmit Data Empty
TEND
Possible
ERI_1
Receive Error, error
signal detection
ORER, PER, ERS
Not possible
RXI_1
Receive Data Full
RDRF
Possible
TXI_1
Transmit Data Empty
TEND
Possible
ERI_2
Receive Error, error
signal detection
ORER, PER, ERS
Not possible
RXI_2
Receive Data Full
RDRF
Possible
TXI_2
Transmit Data Empty
TEND
Possible
1
2
In Smart Card interface mode, as in normal serial communication interface mode, transfer can be
carried out using the DTC. In transmit operations, the TDRE flag is also set to 1 at the same time
as the TEND flag in SSR is set, and a TXI interrupt is generated. If the TXI request is designated
beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be activated by the TXI request, and
transmit data will be transferred. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically cleared to 0 when
data is transferred by the DTC. In the event of an error, the SCI retransmits the same data
automatically. During this period, the TEND flag remains cleared to 0 and the DTC is not
activated. Therefore, the SCI and DTC will automatically transmit the specified number of bytes
in the event of an error, including retransmission. However, the ERS flag is not cleared
automatically when an error occurs. Hence, the RIE bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an
ERI request will be generated in the event of an error, and the ERS flag will be cleared.
When transferring using the DTC, it is essential to set and enable the DTC before carrying out SCI
setting. For details of the DTC setting procedures, refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller
(DTC).
In receive operations, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to
1. If the RXI request is designated beforehand as a DTC activation source, the DTC will be
activated by the RXI request, and the receive data will be transferred. The RDRF flag is cleared to
0 automatically when data is transferred by the DTC. If an error occurs, an error flag is set but the
RDRF flag is not. Consequently, the DTC is not activated, instead, an ERI interrupt request is sent
to the CPU. Therefore, the error flag should be cleared.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 374 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.9
Usage Notes
14.9.1
Module Stop Mode Setting
SCI operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting
is for SCI operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For
details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.
14.9.2
Break Detection and Processing
When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value
directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, setting the FER flag, and possibly
the PER flag. Note that as the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if
the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
14.9.3
Mark State and Break Detection
When TE is 0, the TxD pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level are
determined by DR and DDR. This can be used to set the TxD pin to mark state (high level) or send
a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state until TE
is set to 1, set both DDR and DR to 1. As TE is cleared to 0 at this point, the TxD pin becomes an
I/O port, and 1 is output from the TxD pin. To send a break during serial transmission, first set
DDR to 1 and DR to 0, and then clear TE to 0. When TE is cleared to 0, the transmitter is
initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is
output from the TxD pin.
14.9.4
Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if
the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting
transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared
to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 375 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.9.5
Restrictions on Using DTC
When the external clock source is used as a synchronization clock, update TDR by the DTC and
wait for at least five φ clock cycles before allowing the transmit clock to be input. If the transmit
clock is input within four clock cycles after TDR modification, the SCI may malfunction (figure
14.33).
When using the DTC to read RDR, be sure to set the receive end interrupt source (RXI) as a DTC
activation source.
SCK
t
TDRE
LSB
Serial data
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Note: When external clock is supplied, t must be more than four clock cycles.
Figure 14.33 Sample Transmission using DTC in Clocked Synchronous Mode
14.9.6
SCI Operations during Mode Transitions
Transmission: Before making the transition to module stop, software standby, watch, sub-active,
or sub-sleep mode, stop all transmit operations (TE = TIE = TEIE = 0). TSR, TDR, and SSR are
reset. The states of the output pins during each mode depend on the port settings, and the pins
output a high-level signal after mode is cancelled and then the TE is set to 1 again. If the transition
is made during data transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined.
To transmit data in the same transmission mode after mode cancellation, set TE to 1, read SSR,
write to TDR, clear TDRE in this order, and then start transmission. To transmit data in a different
transmission mode, initialize the SCI first.
Figure 14.34 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during transmission. Figures 14.35 and
14.36 show the pin states during transmission.
Before making the transition from the transmission mode using DTC transfer to module stop,
software standby, watch, sub-active, or sub-sleep mode, stop all transmit operations (TE = TIE =
TEIE = 0). Setting TE and TIE to 1 after mode cancellation generates a TXI interrupt request to
start transmission using the DTC.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 376 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transmission
No
All data transmitted?
[1]
[1] Data being transmitted is lost
halfway. Data can be normally
transmitted from the CPU by
setting TE to 1, reading SSR,
writing to TDR, and clearing
TDRE to 0 after mode
cancellation; however, if the DTC
has been initiated, the data
remaining in DTC RAM will be
transmitted when TE and TIE are
set to 1.
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
TE = 0
[2]
[2] Also clear TIE and TEIE to 0
when they are 1.
[3]
Make transition to software standby mode etc.
[3] Module stop, watch, sub-active,
and sub-sleep modes are
included.
Cancel software standby mode etc.
No
Change operating mode?
Yes
Initialization
TE = 1
Start transmission
Figure 14.34 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission
Transmission start
Transmission end
Transition to
Software standby
software standby
mode cancelled
mode
TE bit
SCK
output pin
TxD
output pin
Port
input/output
Port
input/output
Port
High output
Start
SCI TxD output
Stop
Port input/output
Port
High output
SCI
TxD output
Figure 14.35 Pin States during Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Internal Clock)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 377 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Transmission start
Transmission end
Transition to
Software standby
software standby mode cancelled
mode
TE bit
SCK
output pin
TxD
output pin
Port
input/output
Port
input/output
Marking output
Port
Last TxD bit retained
SCI TxD output
Port input/output
Port
High output*
SCI
TxD output
Note: * Initialized in software standby mode
Figure 14.36 Pin States during Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode
(Internal Clock)
Reception: Before making the transition to module stop, software standby, watch, sub-active, or
sub-sleep mode, stop reception (RE = 0). RSR, RDR, and SSR are reset. If transition is made
during data reception, the data being received will be invalid.
To receive data in the same reception mode after mode cancellation, set RE to 1, and then start
reception. To receive data in a different reception mode, initialize the SCI first.
Figure 14.37 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 378 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Reception
Read RDRF flag in SSR
RDRF = 1
No
[1]
[1] Data being received will be invalid.
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
[2] Module stop, watch, sub-active, and subsleep modes are included.
RE = 0
[2]
Make transition to software standby mode etc.
Cancel software standby mode etc.
Change operating mode?
No
Yes
Initialization
RE = 1
Start reception
Figure 14.37 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 379 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.9.7
Notes when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin
• Problem in Operation: When DDR and DR are set to 1, SCI clock output is used in clocked
synchronous mode, and the SCK pin is changed to the port pin while transmission is ended,
port output is enabled after low-level output occurs for one half-cycle.
When switching the SCK pin to the port pin by making the following settings while DDR = 1,
DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1, low-level output occurs for one halfcycle.
1. End of serial data transmission
2. TE bit = 0
3. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output
4. Occurrence of low-level output (see figure 14.38)
Half-cycle low-level output
SCK/port
1. End of transmission
Bit 6
Data
4. Low-level output
Bit 7
2. TE = 0
TE
3. C/A = 0
C/A
CKE1
CKE0
Figure 14.38 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 380 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
• Usage Note: To prevent low-level output occurred when switching the SCK pin to port pin,
follow the procedure described below.
As this sample procedure temporarily places the SCK pin in the input state, the SCK/port pin
should be pulled up beforehand with an external circuit.
With DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1, make the following
settings in the order shown.
1. End of serial data transmission
2. TE bit = 0
3. CKE1 bit = 1
4. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output
5. CKE1 bit = 0
High-level output
SCK/port
1. End of transmission
Data
TE
Bit 6
Bit 7
2. TE = 0
4. C/A = 0
C/A
3. CKE1 = 1
CKE1
5. CKE1 = 0
CKE0
Figure 14.39 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin to Port Pin
(Example of Preventing Low-Level Output)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 381 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 382 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
This LSI has two independent synchronous serial communication unit (SSU) channels. The SSU
has master mode in which this LSI outputs clocks as a master device for synchronous serial
communication and slave mode in which clocks are input from an external device for synchronous
serial communication. Synchronous serial communication can be performed with devices having
different clock polarity and clock phase. Figure 15.1 is a block diagram of the SSU.
15.1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Features
Choice of master mode or slave mode
Choice of standard mode or bidirectional mode
Synchronous serial communication with devices with different clock polarity and clock phase
Choice of 8/16/32-bit width of transmit/receive data
Full-duplex communication capability
The shift register is incorporated, enabling transmission and reception to be executed
simultaneously.
Continuous serial communication
Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer
Choice of a clock source
φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, φ/32, φ/64, φ/128, φ/256, or external clock
Five interrupt sources
Transmit-end, transmit-data-register-empty, receive-data-register-full, overrun-error, and
conflict error
Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 383 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Bus interface
Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the SSU.
Module data bus
Internal data bus
SSCRH
SSTDR 0
SSRDR 0
SSCRL
OEI
SSTDR 1
SSRDR 1
SSMR
CEI
SSTDR 2
SSRDR 2
SSER
RXI
SSTDR 3
SSRDR 3
SSSR
TXI
Control circuit
TEI
Clock
Clock
selector
Shift-in
Shift-out
SSTRSR
φ
φ/2
φ/4
φ/8
φ/16
φ/32
φ/64
φ/128
φ/256
Selector
SSI
[Legend]
SSCRH:
SSCRL:
SSMR:
SSER:
SSSR:
SSTDR3 to SSTDR0:
SSRDR3 to SSRDR0:
SSTRSR:
SSO
SCS
SSCK (External clock)
SS control register H
SS control register L
SS mode register
SS enable register
SS status register
SS transmit data register
SS receive data register
SS transmit/recive shift register
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of SSU
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 384 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 15.1 shows the SSU pin configuration.
Table 15.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
SSU clock
SSCK
I/O
SSU clock input/output
SSU receive data input
SSI
I/O
SSU receive data input/output
SSU transmit data output
SSO
I/O
SSU transmit data input/output
SSU chip select input/output
SCS
I/O
SSU chip select input/output
15.3
Register Descriptions
The SSU has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SS control register H (SSCRH)
SS control register L (SSCRL)
SS mode register (SSMR)
SS enable register (SSER)
SS status register (SSSR)
SS transmit data register 3 to 0 (SSTDR3 to SSTDR0)
SS receive data register 3 to 0 (SSRDR3 to SSRDR0)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 385 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.3.1
SS Control Register H (SSCRH)
SSCRH specifies master/slave device selection, bidirectional mode enable, SSO pin output value
selection, SSCK pin selection, and SCS pin selection.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
MSS
0
R/W
Master/Slave Device Selection
Selects that this module is used in master mode
or slave mode. When master mode is selected,
transfer clocks are output from the SSCK pin.
When the CE bit in SSSR is set, this bit is
automatically cleared.
0: Slave mode is selected
1: Master mode is selected
6
BIDE
0
R/W
Bidirectional Mode Enable
Selects that both serial data input pin and output
pin are used or one of them is used. However,
transmission and reception are not performed
simultaneously when bidirectional mode is
selected. For details, section 15.4.3, Relationship
between Data I/O Pins and Shift Register.
0: Standard mode (two pins are used as data
input and output)
1: Bidirectional mode (one pin is used for data
input and output)
5

0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
4
SOL
0
R/W
Serial Data Output Value Selection
The output level of serial data, which retains that
of the last bit, can be modified by operating this bit
before or after transmission. When modifying the
output level, use the MOV instruction after
clearing the SOLP bit to 0. Since writing to this bit
during data transmission causes malfunctions,
this bit should not be modified.
0: Serial data output is modified to low level
1: Serial data output is modified to high level
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 386 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
3
SOLP
1
R/W
SOL Bit Write Protect
When modifying the output level of serial data,
use the MOV instruction after setting SOL to 1
and clearing SOLP to 0, or by clearing SOL and
SOLP to 0.
0: Output level can be modified by the SOL value
1: Output level cannot be modified by the SOL
value. This bit is always read as 1
2
SCKS
0
R/W
SSCK Pin Selection
Selects that the SSCK pin functions as a port or a
serial clock pin. When MSS = 1, the SSCK pin
functions as a serial clock output pin regardless of
the setting of this bit.
0: Functions as an I/O port
1: Functions as a serial clock
1
CSS1
0
R/W
SCS Pin Selection
0
CSS0
0
R/W
Select that the SCS pin functions as a port or SCS
input or output. However, when MSS = 0, the SCS
pin functions as an input pin regardless of the
CSS1 and CSS0 settings.
00: I/O port
01: Functions as SCS input
10: Functions as SCS automatic input/output
(however, functions as SCS input before and
after transfer and outputs a low level during
transfer)
11: Functions as SCS automatic output (however,
outputs a high level before and after transfer
and outputs a low level during transfer)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 387 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.3.2
SS Control Register L (SSCRL)
SSCRL selects software reset and transmit/receive data width.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
5
SRES
0
R/W
Software Reset
Setting this bit to 1 forcibly resets the SSU internal
sequencer. After that, this bit is automatically
cleared. The ORER, TEND, TDRE, RDRF, and
CE bits in SSSR and the TE and RE bits in SSER
are also initialized. Values of other bits for SSU
registers are held.
To stop transfer, set this bit to 1 to reset the SSU
internal sequencer.
4 to 2

All 0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
1
DATS1
0
R/W
Transmit/Receive Data Length Selection
0
DATS0
0
R/W
Select serial data length from 8, 16, and 32 bits.
00: 8 bits
01: 16 bits
10: 32 bits
11: Setting invalid
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 388 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.3.3
SS Mode Register (SSMR)
SSMR selects the MSB first/LSB first, clock phase, clock polarity, and clock rate of synchronous
serial communication.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
MLS
0
R/W
MSB First/LSB First
Selects the serial data is transmitted in MSB first
or LSB first.
0: LSB first
1: MSB first
6
CPOS
0
R/W
Clock Polarity Selection
Selects SSCK clock polarity.
0: High output in idle mode, and low output in
active mode
1: Low output in idle mode, and high output in
active mode
5
CPHS
0
R/W
Clock Phase Selection
Selects SSCK clock phase.
0: Data changes at the first edge
1: Data is latched at the first edge
4, 3

All 0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
2
CKS2
0
R/W
Transfer Clock Rate Selection
1
CKS1
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
Select the transfer clock rate (prescaler division
rate) when a master mode is selected.
000: φ/2
001: φ/4
010: φ/8
011: φ/16
100: φ/32
101: φ/64
110: φ/128
111: φ/256
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 389 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.3.4
SS Enable Register (SSER)
SSER performs transfer/receive control of synchronous serial communication and setting of
interrupt enable.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
TE
0
R/W
Transmit Enable
6
RE
0
R/W
Receive Enable
When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled.
When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled.
5, 4

All 0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
3
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, TEI interrupt request is
enabled.
2
TIE
0
R/W
Transmit Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, TXI interrupt request is
enabled.
1
RIE
0
R/W
Receive Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, RXI interrupt request is
enabled.
0
CEIE
0
R/W
Conflict Error Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, CEI interrupt request is
enabled.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 390 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.3.5
SS Status Register (SSSR)
SSSR is a status flag register for interrupts.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7

0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
6
ORER
0
R/W
Overrun Error
If the next data is received while RDRF = 1, an
overrun error occurs, indicating abnormal
termination. SSRDR stores 1-frame receive data
before an overrun error occurs and loses data
received later. While ORER = 1, continuous serial
reception cannot be continued. Serial
transmission cannot be continued, either.
[Setting condition]
•
When the next reception data is transferred to
SSRDR while RDRF = 1
[Clearing condition]
•
5, 4

All 0

When 0 is written to ORER after reading
ORER = 1
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
3
TEND
1
R
Transmit End
[Setting condition]
•
When the last bit of transmit data is
transmitted with TDRE = 1
[Clearing conditions]
•
When 0 is written to the TEND bit after reading
TEND = 1
•
When data is written to SSTDR
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 391 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
2
TDRE
1
R/W
Transmit Data Register Empty
Indicates whether or not SSTDR contains transmit
data.
[Setting conditions]
•
When the TE bit in SSER is 0
•
When data is transferred from SSTDR to
SSTRSR and SSTDR is ready to be written to.
[Clearing conditions]
1
RDRF
0
R/W
•
When 0 is written to the TDRE bit after reading
TDRE = 1
•
When data is written to SSTDR with TE = 1
Receive Data Register Full
Indicates whether or not SSRDR contains
received data.
[Setting condition]
•
When receive data is transferred from
SSTRSR to SSRDR after successful data
reception
[Clearing conditions]
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 392 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
•
When 0 is written to RDRF after reading
RDRF = 1
•
When received data is read from SSRDR
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
0
CE
0
R/W
Conflict/Incomplete Error
Indicates that a conflict error has occurred when 0
is externally input via the SCS pin with MSS = 1.
If the SCS pin level changes to 1 during slave
operation, an incomplete error occurs because it
is determined that a master device has terminated
the transfer. Data reception does not continue
while the CE bit is set to 1. Reset the SSU internal
sequencer by setting the SRES bit in SSCRL to 1
before resuming transfer after incomplete error.
[Setting conditions]
•
When a low level is input to the SCS pin in
master device mode (MSS in SSCRH = 1)
•
When a 1 is input to the SCS pin during slave
device mode (MSS in SSCRH = 0) transfer
[Clearing condition]
•
15.3.6
When 0 is written to the CE bit after reading
CE = 1
SS Transmit Data Register 3 to 0 (SSTDR3 to SSTDR0)
SSTDR is an 8-bit register that stores transmit data. When 8-bit data length is selected by bits
DATS1 and DATS0 in SSCRL, SSTDR0 is valid. When 16-bit data length is selected, SSTDR0
and SSTDR1 are valid. When 32-bit data length is selected, SSTDR3 to SSTDR0 are valid. Do not
attempt to access invalid SS transmit data registers.
When the SSU detects that SSTRSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in SSTDR to
SSTRSR and starts transmission. If the next transmit data has already been written to SSTDR
during serial transmission, the SSU transfers the written data to SSTRSR to continue transmission.
Although SSTDR can be read or written to by the CPU and DTC at all times, to achieve reliable
serial transmission, write transmit data to SSTDR after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSSR is
set to 1. The initial value of this register is H'00.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 393 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.3.7
SS Receive Data Register 3 to 0 (SSRDR3 to SSRDR0)
SSRDR is an 8-bit register that stores receive data. When 8-bit data length is selected by bits
DATS1 and DATS0 in SSCRL, SSRDR0 is valid. When 16-bit data length is selected, SSRDR0
and SSRDR1 are valid. When 32-bit data length is selected, SSRDR3 to SSRDR0 are valid. Do
not attempt to access invalid SS receive data registers.
When the SSU has received 1-byte data, it transfers the received serial data from SSTRSR to
SSRDR where it is stored. After this, SSTRSR is receive-enabled. Since SSTRSR and SSRDR
function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive operations can be performed. Read
SSRDR after confirming that the RDRF bit in SSSR is set to 1. SSRDR cannot be written to by
the CPU. The initial value of this register is H'00.
15.3.8
SS Shift Register (SSTRSR)
SSTRSR is a shift register that transmits and receives serial data.
When data from SSTDR to SSTRSR is transferred with MLS = 0, bit 0 of transmit data is bit 0 in
the SSTDR contents (LSB first communication). When data from SSTDR to SSTRSR is
transferred with MLS = 1, bit 0 of transmit data is bit 7 in the SSTDR contents (MSB first
communication). To perform serial data transmission, the SSU transfers data starting from LSB
(bit 0) in SSTRSR to the SSO pin.
In reception, the SSU sets serial data that has been input from the SSI pin to SSTRSR starting
from LSB (bit 0) and converts it into parallel data. When 1-byte data has been received, the
SSTRSR contents are automatically transferred to SSRDR. SSTRSR cannot be directly accessed
by the CPU.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 394 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.4
Operation
15.4.1
Transfer Clock
A transfer clock can be selected from eight internal clocks and an external clock. When using this
module, set SCKS in SSCRH to 1 to select the SSCK pin as a serial clock. When MSS in SSCRH
is 1, an internal clock is selected and the SSCK pin is used as an output pin. When transfer is
started, the clock with the transfer rate set by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in SSMR is output from the
SSCK pin. When MSS = 0, an external clock is selected and the SSCK pin is used as an input pin.
15.4.2
Relationship of Clock Phase, Polarity, and Data
The relationship of clock phase, polarity, and transfer data depends on the combination of CPOS
and CPHS in SSMR. Figure 15.2 shows the relationship.
Setting the MLS bit specifies that MSB or LSB first communication. When MLS = 0, data is
transferred from the LSB to MSB. When MLS = 1, data is transferred from the MSB to LSB.
(1) When CPHS = 0
SCS
SSCK
(CPOS = 0)
SSCK
(CPOS = 1)
SSI, SSO
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
(2) When CPHS = 1
SCS
SSCK
(CPOS = 0)
SSCK
(CPOS = 1)
SSI, SSO
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Figure 15.2 Relationship of Clock Phase, Polarity, and Data
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 395 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.4.3
Relationship between Data I/O Pins and the Shift Register
The connection between data I/O pins and the shift register (SSTRSR) depends on the
combination of the MSS and BIDE bits in SSCRH. Figure 15.3 shows the connection.
The SSU transmits serial data from the SSO pin and receives serial data from the SSI pin when
operating with BIDE = 0 and MSS = 1 (standard, master mode) (see figure 15.3 (1)). The SSU
transmits serial data from the SSI pin and receives serial data from the SSO pin when operating
with BIDE = 0 and MSS = 0 (standard, slave mode) (see figure 15.3 (2)).
The SSU transmits and receives serial data from the SSO pin regardless of master or slave mode
when operating with BIDE = 1 (bidirectional mode) (see figure 15.3 (3) and (4)).
However, even if both the TE and RE bits are set to 1, transmission and reception are not
performed simultaneously. Either the TE or RE bit must be selected.
(1) When BIDE = 0 (standard mode), MSS = 1, TE = 1, and RE = 1
(2) When BIDE = 0 (standard mode), MSS = 0, TE = 1, and RE = 1
SSCK
Shift register
(SSTRSR)
SSO
SSCK
Shift register
(SSTRSR)
SSI
SSO
SSI
(3) When BIDE = 1 (bidirectional mode), MSS = 1, and TE or RE = 1 (4) When BIDE=1 (bidirectional mode), MSS = 0, and TE or RE = 1
SSCK
Shift register
(SSTRSR)
SSO
SSCK
Shift register
(SSTRSR)
SSI
Figure 15.3 Relationship between Data I/O Pins and the Shift Register
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 396 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
SSO
SSI
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.4.4
Data Transmission and Data Reception
The SSU performs data communications using the bus with four lines: the clock line (SSCK), data
input (SSI or SSO), data output (SSI or SSO), and chip select (SCS).
The SSU also supports bidirectional mode in which the data is output and input using one pin.
SSU Initialization:
Figure 15.4 shows an example of the SSU initialization. Before transmitting and receiving data,
first clear the TE and RE bits in SSER to 0, then initialize the SSU.
Note: When the operating mode or transfer format is changed for example, the TE and RE bits
must be cleared to 0. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE bit is set to 1. Note that
clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the values of the RDRF and ORER bits or the
contents of SSRDR.
Start initialization
Clear TE and RE bits in SSER to 0
[1] Specify master/slave device selection,
bidirectional mode enable, SSO pin
output value selection, SSCK pin selection,
and SCS pin selection.
[2] Specify transmit/receive data length.
[1]
Specify CSS1, CSS0, MSS, BIDE, SOL,
and SCKS bits
[2]
Specify bits DATS1 and DATS0
[3]
Specify CKS2 to CKS0, MLS, CPOS,
and CPHS bits
[4]
Specify TE, RE, TEIE, TIE, RIE,
and CEIE bits simultaneously
[3] Specify MSB first/LSB first selection, clock
polarity selection, clock phase selection,
and transfer clock rate selection.
[4] Specify enable/disable of interrupt request
to the CPU.
End
Figure 15.4 Example of SSU Initialization
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 397 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Data Transmission:
Figure 15.5 shows an example of transmission operation, and figure 15.6 shows an example of
data transmission flowchart.
When transmitting data, the SSU operates as shown below.
In master device mode, the SSU outputs a transfer clock and data. In slave device mode, when a
low level signal is input to the SCS pin and a transfer clock is input to the SSCK pin, the SSU
outputs data in synchronization with the transfer clock.
Writing transmit data to SSTDR after initialization of the SSU automatically clears the TDRE bit
in SSSR to 0, and the contents of SSTDR is transferred to SSTRSR. After that, the SSU sets the
TDRE bit to 1 and starts transmission. At this time, if the TIE bit in SSER is set to 1, a TXI
interrupt is generated.
When 1-frame data has been transferred with the TDRE bit cleared to 0, the SSTDR contents are
transferred to SSTRSR to start the next transmission. When the 8th bit of transmit data has been
transferred with the TDRE bit set to 1, the TEND bit in SSSR is set to 1 and the state is retained.
At this time, if the TEIE bit is set to 1, a TEI interrupt is generated. After transmission, the output
level of the SSCK pin is fixed at a high level when CPOS = 0 and at a low level when CPOS = 1.
While the ORER bit in SSSR is set to 1, transmission is not performed. Check that the ORER bit
is cleared to 0.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 398 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
(1) When 8-bit data length is selected (SSTDR0 is valid) with CPOS = 0 and CPHS = 0
1 frame
1 frame
SCS
SSCK
SSO
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSTDR0 (LSB first transmission)
SSTDR0 (MSB first transmission)
TDRE
TEND
LSI operation
User operation
TXI
interrupt
generated
TEI
interrupt
generated
TXI
interrupt
generated
TEI
interrupt
generated
Data written to
Data written to
SSTDR0
SSTDR0
(2) When 16-bit data length is selected (SSTDR0 and SSTDR1 are valid) with CPOS = 0 and CPHS = 0
1 frame
SCS
SSCK
SSO
(LSB first)
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SSO
(MSB first)
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SSTDR1
SSTDR0
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSTDR0
SSTDR1
TDRE
TEND
LSI operation
TEI interrupt generated
TXI interrupt generated
User operation Data written to
SSTDR1 to SSTDR0
(3) When 32-bit data length is selected (SSTDR0, SSTDR1, SSTDR2, and SSTDR3 are valid) with CPOS = 0 and CPHS = 0
1 frame
SCS
SSCK
SSO
(LSB first)
Bit
0
to
Bit Bit
0
7
SSTDR3
SSO
(MSB first)
Bit
7
to
Bit Bit
7
0
SSTDR0
to
Bit Bit
7
0
SSTDR2
to
Bit
0
SSTDR1
to
Bit
7
SSTDR1
Bit
7
to
Bit
0
to
Bit Bit
0
7
SSTDR2
Bit
7
SSTDR0
to
Bit
0
SSTDR3
TDRE
TEND
LSI operation
User operation Data written to
SSTDR3 to SSTDR0
TXI
interrupt
generated
TEI
interrupt
generated
Figure 15.5 Example of Transmission Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 399 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
[1] Initialization:
Specify the settings such as transmit
data format.
Start
[1]
Initialization
[2]
Read TDRE in SSR
TDRE = 1?
[2] Check the SSU state and write
transmit data:
Write transmit data to SSTDR after
reading and confirming that the TDRE bit
is 1. The TDRE bit is automatically cleared
to 0 and transmission is started by writing
data to SSTDR.
No
Yes
Write transmit data to SSTDR
TDRE automatically cleared
Yes
[3] Procedure for continuous data transmission:
To continue data transmission, confirm
that the TDRE bit is 1 meaning that SSTDR
is ready to be written to. After that, data can
be written to SSTDR. The TDRE bit is
automatically cleared to 0 by writing data to
SSTDR.
No
[4] Transmission end procedure:
To end transmission, confirm TEND = 1 and
wait until the last bit is surely transmitted,
then set TE to 0.
Data transferd from SSTDR to SSTRSR
Set TDRE to 1 to start transmission
[3]
Continuous data transmission?
No
Read TEND in SSSR
TEND = 1?
Yes
Clear TEND to 0
Wait
Confirm TEND = 0
[4]
1-bit interval elapsed ?
No
Yes
Clear TE in SSER to 0
End transmission
Note: Hatching boxes represent SSU internal operations.
Figure 15.6 Example of Data Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 400 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Data Reception:
Figure 15.7 shows an example of reception operation, and figure 15.8 shows an example of data
reception flowchart.
When receiving data, the SSU operates as shown below.
After initialization, the SSU dummy-reads SSRDR and data reception is started.
In master device mode, the SSU outputs a transfer clock and receives data. In slave device mode,
when a low level signal is input to the SCS pin and a transfer clock is input to the SSCK pin, the
SSU receives data in synchronization with the transfer clock.
When 1-frame data has been received, the received data is stored in SSRDR. At this time, if the
RIE bit is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is generated. The RDRF bit is automatically cleared to 0 by
reading SSRDR.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 401 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
(1) When 8-bit data length is selected (SSRDR0 is valid) with CPOS = 0 and CPHS = 0
1 frame
SCS
1 frame
SSCK
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SSI
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 0
SSTDR0 (LSB first transmission)
SSTDR0 (MSB first transmission)
RDRF
LSI operation
RXI
interrupt
generated
User operation
RXI
interrupt
generated
Read SSRDR0
Dummy-read
SSRDR0
(2) When 16-bit data length is selected (SSRDR0 and SSRDR1 are valid) with CPOS = 0 and CPHS = 0
1 frame
SCS
SSCK
SSI
(LSB first)
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SSI
(MSB first)
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
SSRDR1
SSRDR0
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SSRDR0
SSRDR1
RDRF
LSI operation
User operation
RXI
interrupt
generated
Dummy-read
SSRDR0
(3) When 32-bit data length is selected (SSRDR0, SSRDR1, SSRDR2, and SSRDR3 are valid) with CPOS = 0 and CPHS = 0
SCS
SSCK
SSI
(LSB first)
Bit
0
SSI
(MSB first)
Bit
7
to
Bit Bit
7
0
SSRDR3
to
Bit Bit
7
0
SSRDR2
Bit Bit
0
7
SSRDR0
to
to
Bit
0
SSRDR1
to
Bit
7
SSRDR1
Bit
7
to
Bit
0
Bit
7
SSRDR0
Bit Bit
0
7
SSRDR2
to
to
Bit
0
SSRDR3
RDRF
LSI operation
User operation
Dummy-read
SSRDR0
RXI
interrupt
generated
Figure 15.7 Example of Reception Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 402 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Start
[1]
Initialization
[2]
Dummy-read SSRDR
RDRF = 1?
Yes
ORER = 1?
Initialization:
Specify the settings such as receive data format.
[2]
Start reception:
When SSRDR is dummy-read with RE = 1,
reception is started.
[3], [6] Receive error processing:
When a receive error occurs execute the
designated error processing after reading the
ORER bit in SSSR. After that, clear the ORER
bit to 0. While the ORER bit is set to 1,
reception is not resumed.
Read SSRDR
No
[1]
Yes [3]
[4]
To continue single reception:
When continuing single reception, the next single
reception starts after reading received data in SSRDR.
[5]
To complete reception:
To complete reception, read received data after
clearing the RE bit to 0. When reading SSRDR without
clearing the RE bit, reception is resumed.
No
[4]
Continuous data reception?
No
Yes
Read received data in SSRDR
RDRF automatically cleared
[5]
RE = 0
Read received data in SSRDR
End reception
[6]
Overrun error processing
Clear ORER in SSSR
End reception
Note: Hatching boxes represent SSU internal operations.
Figure 15.8 Example of Data Reception Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 403 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Data Transmission/Reception:
Figure 15.9 shows an example of simultaneous transmission/reception operation. The data
transmission/reception is performed combining the data transmission and data reception as
mentioned above. The data transmission/reception is started by writing transmit data to SSTDR
with TE = RE = 1.
When the RDRF has been set to 1 at the 8th rising edge of the transfer clock (in a case of 8-bit
data length), the ORER bit in SSSR is set to 1. This indicates that an overrun error (OEI) has
occurred. At this time, data transmission/reception is stopped. While the ORER bit in SSSR is set
to 1, transmission/reception is not performed. To resume the transmission/reception, clear the
ORER bit to 0.
Before switching transmission mode (TE = 1) or reception mode (RE = 1) to
transmission/reception mode (TE = RE = 1), clear the TE and RE bits to 0. When starting the
transfer, confirm that the TEND, RDRF, and ORER bits are cleared to 0 before setting the TE and
RE bits to 1.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 404 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
[1] Initialization:
Specify the settings such as transmit/receive
data format.
Start
[1]
Initialization
[2]
Read TDRE in SSSR
No
TDRE = 1?
Yes
Write transmit data to SSTDR
[3] Check the SSU state:
Read SSSR and confirm that the RDRF bit is 1.
A change of the RDRF bit (from 0 to 1)
can be notified by RXI interrupt.
TDRE automatically cleared
Data transferred from SSTDR to SSTRSR
[4] Receive error processing:
When a receive error occurs, execute the
designated error processing after reading the
ORER bit in SSSR. After that, clear the ORER
bit to 0. While the ORER bit is set to 1,
transmission or reception is not resumed.
TDRE set to 1 to start transmission
Read SSSR
[3]
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
ORER = 1?
[2] Check the SSU state and write transmit data:
Write transmit data to SSTDR after reading
and confirming that the TDRE bit is 1. The
TDRE bit is automatically cleared to 0 and
transmission is started by writing data to
SSTDR.
Yes [4]
No
Read received data in SSRDR
RDRF automatically cleared
[5]
Continuous data
transmission/reception
Yes
[5] Procedure for continuous data transmission/
reception:
To continue serial data transmission/reception,
confirm that the TDRE bit 1meaning that SSTDR
is ready to be written to. After that, data can be
written to SSTDR. The TDRE bit is automatically
cleared to 0 by writing data to SSTDR.
No
Read TEND in SSSR
TEND = 1?
No
Yes
Clear TEND in SSSR to 0
1-bit internal elapsed?
Yes
No
Error processing
Clear TE and RE in SSER to 0
End transmission/reception
Note: Hatching boxes represent SSU internal operations.
Figure 15.9 Example of Simultaneous Transmission/Reception Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 405 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
15.4.5
SCS Pin Control and Conflict Error
When bits CSS1 and CSS0 in SSCRH are specified to B'10, the SCS pin functions as an input
(Hi-Z) to detect conflict error. The conflict detection period starts when setting the MSS bit in
SSCRH to 1 and ends when starting serial transfer. When a low level signal is input to the SCS pin
within the period, a conflict error occurs. At this time, the CE bit in SSSR is set to 1 and the MSS
bit is cleared to 0.
Note: While the CE bit is set to 1, transmission or reception is not resumed. Clear the CE bit to 0
before resuming the transmission or reception.
External input to SCS
Internal-clocked SCS
MSS
Transfer enabled
internal signal
Data written
to SSTDR
CE
SCS output
(Hi-Z)
Conflict error
detection period
Worst time for
internally clocking SCS
Figure 15.10 Conflict Error Detection Timing (Before Transfer Start)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 406 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
φ
SCS
(Hi-Z)
MSS
Transfer enabled
internal signal
CE
Transfer
end
Conflict error detection period
Figure 15.11 Conflict Error Detection Timing (After Transfer End)
15.5
Interrupt Requests
The SSU interrupt requests consist of transmit data register empty, transmit end, receive data
register full, overrun error, and conflict error. Of these interrupt sources, transmit data register
empty, transmit end, receive data register full can activate the DTC for data transfer.
The TDRE, TEND, and RDRF bits are automatically cleared to 0 by the DTC data transfer. Since
these interrupt requests are allocated to four vector addresses: SSEr_i0, SSRx_i0, SSTx_i0 and
SSERT_i1, the interrupt sources must be distinguished by flags. Table 15.2 lists interrupt sources.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 407 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 15 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit (SSU)
Table 15.2 Interrupt Souses
Channel
Abbreviation
0
SSEr_i0
1
Interrupt Request
Symbol
Interrupt Condition
Overrun error
OEI
RIE = 1, ORER = 1
Conflict error
CEI
CEIE = 1, CE = 1
SSRx_i0
Receive data register full
RXI
RIE = 1, RDRF = 1
SSTx_i0
Transmit data register empty
TXI
TIE = 1, TDRE = 1
Transmit end
TEI
TEIE = 1, TEND = 1
Overrun error
OEI
RIE = 1, ORER = 1
Conflict error
CEI
CEIE = 1, CE = 1
Receive data register full
RXI
RIE = 1, RDRF = 1
SSERT_i1
Transmit data register empty
TXI
TIE = 1, TDRE = 1
Transmit end
TEI
TEIE = 1, TEND = 1
When interrupt conditions shown in table 15.2 are satisfied and the I bit in CCR is 0, the CPU
executes interrupt exception processing. Clear each interrupt source in the exception processing.
15.6
Usage Note
15.6.1
Setting of Module Stop Mode
The SSU can be enabled/disabled by the module stop control register setting and is disabled by the
initial value. Canceling module stop mode enables to access the SSU registers. For details, see
section 20, Power-Down Modes.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 408 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
Section 16 A/D Converter
This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to sixteen
analog input channels to be selected. The block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure
16.1.
16.1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Features
10-bit resolution
Sixteen input channels
Conversion time: 13.3 µs per channel (at 20 MHz operation)
Two operating modes
 Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion
 Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels
Four data registers
 Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel
Sample and hold function
Three conversion start methods
 Software
 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) or 8-bit timer conversion start trigger
 External trigger signal
Interrupt request
 An A/D conversion end interrupt request (ADI) can be generated
Module stop mode can be set
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 409 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
Module data bus
Vref
10-bit D/A
AVSS
Bus interface
A
D
D
R
A
A
D
D
R
B
A
D
D
R
C
A
D
D
R
D
A
D
C
S
R
A
D
C
R
φ/2
+
φ/4
Comparator
Multiplexer
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
AN8
AN9
AN10
AN11
AN12
AN13
AN14
AN15
Successive approximations
register
AVCC
Internal data bus
Control circuit
φ/8
Sample-andhold circuit
φ/16
ADI
interrupt
Conversion start
trigger from TPU
or 8-bit timer
ADTRG
[Legend]
ADCR: A/D control register
ADCSR: A/D control/status register
ADDRA: A/D data register A
ADDRB: A/D data register B
ADDRC: A/D data register C
ADDRD: A/D data register D
Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 410 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 16.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. 12 analog input pins are divided
into three groups, each of which includes four channels; analog input pins 3 to 0 (AN3 to AN0)
comprising group 0, analog input pins 7 to 4 (AN7 to AN4) comprising group 1, analog input pins
11 to 8 (AN11 to AN8) comprising group 2, and analog input pins 15 to 12 (AN15 to AN12)
comprising group 3. The AVcc and AVss pins are the power supply pins for the A/D converter
analog section. The Vref pin is the A/D conversion reference voltage pin.
Table 16.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Analog power supply pin
AVCC
Input
Analog section power supply and reference
voltage
Analog ground pin
AVSS
Input
Analog section ground and reference
voltage
Reference voltage pin
Vref
Input
Reference voltage of A/D conversion
Analog input pin 0
AN0
Input
Group 0 analog input pins
Analog input pin 1
AN1
Input
Analog input pin 2
AN2
Input
Analog input pin 3
AN3
Input
Analog input pin 4
AN4
Input
Analog input pin 5
AN5
Input
Analog input pin 6
AN6
Input
Analog input pin 7
AN7
Input
Analog input pin 8
AN8
Input
Analog input pin 9
AN9
Input
Analog input pin 10
AN10
Input
Analog input pin 11
AN11
Input
Analog input pin 12
AN12
Input
Analog input pin 13
AN13
Input
Analog input pin 14
AN14
Input
Analog input pin 15
AN15
A/D external trigger input pin ADTRG
Group 1 analog input pins
Group 2 analog input pins
Group 3 analog input pins
Input
Input
External trigger input pin for starting A/D
conversion
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 411 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.3
Register Description
The A/D converter has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
A/D data register A (ADDRA)
A/D data register B (ADDRB)
A/D data register C (ADDRC)
A/D data register D (ADDRD)
A/D control/status register (ADCSR)
A/D control register (ADCR)
16.3.1
A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)
There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of
A/D conversion. The ADDR registers to store conversion results for each channel are shown in
table 16.2.
The converted 10-bit data is stored in bits 6 to 15 in ADDR. The lower 6 bits are always read as 0.
The data bus between the CPU and the A/D converter is 8 bits wide. The upper byte can be read
directly from the CPU, however the lower byte should be read via a temporary register. The
temporary register contents are transferred from the ADDR when the upper byte data is read.
When reading the ADDR, always read the upper byte first, and then read the lower byte, or read in
word unit. Otherwise, the read contents are not guaranteed.
Table 16.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers
Analog Input Channel
CH3 = 0
CH3 = 1
Group 0
(CH2 = 0)
Group 1
(CH2 = 1)
Group 2
(CH2 = 0)
Group 3
(CH2 = 1)
A/D Data Register to
Store the A/D
Conversion Results
AN0
AN4
AN8
AN12
ADDRA
AN1
AN5
AN9
AN13
ADDRB
AN2
AN6
AN10
AN14
ADDRC
AN3
AN7
AN11
AN15
ADDRD
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 412 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.3.2
A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
ADCSR controls A/D conversion operations.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
ADF
0
R/(W)
A/D End Flag
A status flag that indicates the end of A/D
conversion.
[Setting conditions]
•
When A/D conversion ends in single mode
•
When A/D conversion ends on all specified
channels selected in scan mode
[Clearing conditions]
6
ADIE
0
R/W
•
When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by an ADI interrupt
and ADDR is read
A/D Interrupt Enable
A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) is enabled
when this bit is set to 1.
5
ADST
0
R/W
A/D Start
Clearing this bit to 0 stops A/D conversion, and the
A/D converter enters the wait state.
Setting this bit to 1 starts A/D conversion. In single
mode, this bits is automatically cleared to 0 when
conversion on the specified channel is complete. In
scan mode, conversion continues sequentially on
the specified channels until this bit is cleared to 0
by software, a reset, or a transition to software
standby mode, hardware standby mode or module
stop mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 413 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
4
SCAN
0
R/W
Scan Mode
Selects the A/D conversion operating mode.
0: Single mode
1: Scan mode
3
CH3
0
R/W
Channel Select 0 to 3
2
CH2
0
R/W
Select analog input channels.
1
CH1
0
R/W
When SCAN = 0
When SCAN = 1
0
CH0
0
R/W
0000: AN0
0000: AN0
0001: AN1
0001: AN1, AN0
0010: AN2
0010: AN2 to AN0
0011: AN3
0011: AN3 to AN0
0100: AN4
0100: AN4
0101: AN5
0101: AN5, AN4
0110: AN6
0110: AN6 to AN4
0111: AN7
0111: AN7 to AN4
1000: AN8
1000: AN8
1001: AN9
1001: AN9, AN8
1010: AN10
1010: AN10 to AN8
1011: AN11
1011: AN11 to AN8
1100: AN12
1100: AN12
1101: AN13
1101: AN13, AN12
1110: AN14
1110: AN14 to AN12
1111: AN15
1111: AN15 to AN12
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 414 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.3.3
A/D Control Register (ADCR)
The ADCR enables A/D conversion started by an external trigger signal.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
TRGS1
0
R/W
Timer Trigger Select 1 and 0
6
TRGS0
0
R/W
Enable the start of A/D conversion by a trigger
signal. Bits TRGS0 and TRGS1 should be set
while A/D conversion is stopped (ADST = 0).
00: A/D conversion is started by software
01: A/D conversion is started by TPU conversion
start trigger
10: Start of A/D conversion by 8-bit timer
conversion start trigger is allowed
11: A/D conversion is started by the ADTRG pin
5, 4

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
3
CKS1
0
R/W
Clock Select 1 and 0
2
CKS0
0
R/W
Specify the A/D conversion time. The conversion
time should be changed only when ADST = 0.
Specify a value within the range shown in table
22.7.
00: Conversion time = 530 states (max.)
01: Conversion time = 266 states (max.)
10: Conversion time = 134 states (max.)
11: Conversion time = 68 states (max.)
1, 0

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 415 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.4
Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two
operating modes; single mode and scan mode. When changing the operating mode or analog input
channel, clear the ADST bit in ADCSR to 0 first in order to prevent incorrect operation. The
ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or analog input channel is changed.
16.4.1
Single Mode
In single mode, A/D conversion is performed only once on the specified single channel as follows.
1. A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software or external trigger input.
2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the A/D data register
corresponding to the channel.
3. On completion of conversion, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at
this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated.
4. The ADST bit retains 1 during A/D conversion. When A/D conversion ends, the ADST bit is
automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the wait state. If the ADST bit is
cleared to 0 during A/D conversion, the conversion is stopped and the A/D converter enters the
wait state.
16.4.2
Scan Mode
In scan mode, A/D conversion is to be performed sequentially on the specified channels up to four
channels as follows.
1. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, TPU or external trigger input, A/D conversion
starts on the first channel in the group (for example, AN0 when CH3 and CH2 = 00, AN4
when CH3 and CH2 = 01, AN8 when CH3 and CH2 = 10, or AN12 when CH3 and CH2 = 11).
2. When the A/D conversion is completed on one channel, the result is sequentially transferred to
the A/D data register corresponding to the channel.
3. When the conversion is completed on all the selected channels, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set
to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion
ends. Then, the A/D converter restarts the conversion from the first channel in the group.
4. Steps 2 to 3 are repeated as long as the ADST bit is set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to
0, the A/D conversion stops and the A/D converter enters the wait state.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 416 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.4.3
Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter includes the sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog
input when the A/D conversion start delay time (tD) has passed after the ADST bit is set to 1, and
then conversion is started. Figure 16.2 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 16.3 shows the
A/D conversion time.
As shown in figure 16.2, the A/D conversion time (tCONV) includes tD and input sampling time (tSPL).
The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. Therefore, the total
conversion time varies within the range shown in table 16.3.
In scan mode, the values given in table 16.3 indicate the first conversion time. The second and
subsequent conversion time is shown in table 16.4. In both cases, set bits CKS1 and CKS0 in
ADCR within the range shown in table 22.8 in section 22, Electrical Characteristics.
(1)
φ
Address
(2)
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
tD
tSPL
tCONV
[Legend]
(1):
ADCSR write cycle
(2):
ADCSR address
A/D conversion start delay
tD:
tSPL: Input sampling time
tCONV: A/D conversion time
Figure 16.2 A/D Conversion Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 417 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
Table 16.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS1 = 0
CKS0 = 0
Item
Symbol Min Typ Max
CKS1 = 1
CKS0 = 1
CKS0 = 0
CKS0 = 1
Min Typ Max
Min Typ Max
Min Typ Max
A/D conversion tD
start delay
18

33
10

17
6

9
4

5
Input sampling
time

127 

63


31


15

266
131 
134
67

68
tSPL
515 
A/D conversion tCONV
time
530
259 
Note: All values represent the number of states.
Table 16.4 A/D Conversion Time (Scan Mode)
CKS1
CKS0
Conversion Time (State)
0
0
512 (Fixed)
1
256 (Fixed)
1
0
128 (Fixed)
1
64 (Fixed)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 418 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.4.4
External Trigger Input Timing
A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When bits TRGS0 and TRGS1 in ADCR are set to
11, an external trigger is input on the ADTRG pin. At the falling edge of the ADTRG pin, the
ADST bit in ADCSR is set to 1, and the A/D conversion starts. Other operations are the same as
when the ADST bit has been set to 1 by software in both single and scan modes. Figure 16.3
shows the timing.
φ
ADTRG
Internal trigger signal
ADST
A/D conversion
Figure 16.3 External Trigger Input Timing
16.5
Interrupt Source
When A/D conversion is completed, the A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt
(ADI). The ADI interrupt request is enabled when the ADIE bit is set to 1 while the ADF bit in
ADCSR is set to 1 after A/D conversion is completed. The DTC can be activated by an ADI
interrupt. Having the converted data read by the DTC in response to an ADI interrupt enables
continuous conversion without imposing a load on software.
Table 16.5 A/D Converter Interrupt Source
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Source Flag
DTC Activation
ADI
A/D conversion completed
ADF
Possible
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 419 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.6
A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions
This LSI’s A/D conversion accuracy definitions are given below.
• Resolution
The number of A/D converter digital output codes
• Quantization error
The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 16.4).
• Offset error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'000) to
B'0000000001 (H'001) (see figure 16.5).
• Full-scale error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3FE) to B'1111111111 (H'3FF) (see
figure 16.5).
• Nonlinearity error
The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristic between zero voltage and fullscale voltage. Does not include offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error (see figure
16.5).
• Absolute accuracy
The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes offset error, fullscale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 420 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
111
110
101
100
011
010
Quantization error
001
000
1
2
1024 1024
1022 1023 FS
1024 1024
Analog
input voltage
Figure 16.4 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions
Full-scale error
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
Nonlinearity
error
Actual A/D conversion
characteristic
Offset error
FS
Analog
input voltage
Figure 16.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 421 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.7
Usage Notes
16.7.1
Module Stop Mode Setting
Operation of the A/D converter can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register.
The initial setting is for operation of the A/D converter to be halted. Register access is enabled by
clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes.
16.7.2
Permissible Signal Source Impedance
This LSI’s analog input is designed such that conversion accuracy is guaranteed for an input signal
for which the signal source impedance is 5 kΩ or less. This specification is provided to enable the
A/D converter’s sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling
time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 5 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not be
possible to guarantee A/D conversion accuracy. However, for A/D conversion in single mode with
a large capacitance provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal
input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored. However, as a low-pass
filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large
differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/µs or greater) (see figure 16.6). When converting a high-speed
analog signal or converting in scan mode, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 422 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.7.3
Influences on Absolute Accuracy
Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely
affect absolute accuracy. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND such as
AVss.
Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the
mounting board (i.e., acting as antennas).
This LSI
Sensor output
impedance
to 5 kΩ
A/D converter
equivalent circuit
10 kΩ
Sensor input
Low-pass
filter C
to 0.1 µF
Cin =
15 pF
20 pF
Figure 16.6 Example of Analog Input Circuit
16.7.4
Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pin Settings
If the conditions below are not met, the reliability of the device may be adversely affected.
• Analog input voltage range
The voltage applied to analog input pin ANn during A/D conversion should be in the range
AVss ≤ VNn ≤ AVcc.
• Relationship between AVcc, AVss and Vcc, Vss
Set AVss = Vss as the relationship between AVcc, AVss and Vcc, Vss. If the A/D converter is
not used, the AVcc and AVss pins must not be left open.
• Setting range of the Vref pin
The reference voltage set by the Vref pin should be in the range Vref ≤ AVcc.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 423 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
16.7.5
Notes on Board Design
In board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as mutually isolated as possible,
and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit signal lines cross or are in close
proximity should be avoided as far as possible. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation
of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting A/D conversion values. Also, digital
circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (AN15 to AN0) and analog power supply
(AVcc) by the analog ground (AVss). Also, the analog ground (AVss) should be connected at one
point to a stable digital ground (Vss) on the board.
16.7.6
Notes on Noise Countermeasures
A protection circuit should be connected in order to prevent damage due to abnormal voltage, such
as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN15 to AN0), between AVcc and AVss, as shown
in figure 16.7. Also, the bypass capacitors connected to AVcc and the filter capacitor connected to
AN15 to AN0 must be connected to AVss.
If a filter capacitor is connected, the input currents at the analog input pins (AN15 to AN0) are
averaged, and so an error may arise. Also, when A/D conversion is performed frequently, as in
scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the sample-and-hold circuit
in the A/D converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance (Rin), an error will arise in
the analog input pin voltage. Careful consideration is therefore required when deciding circuit
constants.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 424 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
AVCC
Rin*2
100 Ω
AN0 to AN15
*1
0.1 µF
AVSS
Notes: Values are reference values.
1.
10 µF
0.01 µF
2. Rin: Input impedance
Figure 16.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit
Table 16.6 Analog Pin Specifications
Item
Min
Max
Unit
Analog input capacitance

20
pF
Permissible signal source impedance

5
kΩ
10 kΩ
AN15 to AN0
To A/D converter
20 pF
Note: Values are reference values.
Figure 16.8 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 425 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 16 A/D Converter
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 426 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 17 RAM
Section 17 RAM
This LSI has 8 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static RAM. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a
16-bit data bus, enabling one-state access by the CPU to both byte data and word data.
The on-chip RAM can be enabled or disabled by means of the RAME bit in the system control
register (SYSCR). For details on SYSCR, refer to section 3.2.2, System Control Register
(SYSCR).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 427 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 17 RAM
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 428 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
Section 18 ROM
The features of the flash memory are summarized below.
The block diagram of the flash memory is shown in figure 18.1.
18.1
Features
• Size: 128 kbytes
• Programming/erase methods
 The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block
units. The flash memory is configured as follows: 32 kbytes × 2 blocks, 28 kbytes × 1
block, 16 kbytes × 1 block, 8 kbytes × 2 blocks, and 1 kbyte × 4 blocks. To erase the entire
flash memory, each block must be erased in turn.
• Reprogramming capability
 The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times.
• Three programming modes
 Boot mode
 User mode
 Programmer mode
 On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode, in which the boot program built
into the chip is started to erase or program of the entire flash memory. In normal user
program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed.
• Programmer mode
 Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode using a PROM
programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode.
• Automatic bit rate adjustment
 For data transfer in boot mode, this LSI’s bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match
the transfer bit rate of the host.
• Programming/erasing protection
 Sets software protection against flash memory programming/erasing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 429 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
Internal address bus
Module bus
Internal data bus (16 bits)
FLMCR1
FLMCR2
EBR1
Bus interface/controller
Operating
mode
FWE pin
Mode pins
EBR2
RAMER
Flash memory
(128 kbytes)
[Legend]
FLMCR1:
FLMCR2:
EBR1:
EBR2:
RAMER:
Flash memory control register 1
Flash memory control register 2
Erase block register 1
Erase block register 2
RAM emulation register
Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory
18.2
Mode Transitions
When the mode pins and the FWE pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, this
LSI enters an operating mode as shown in figure 18.2. In user mode, flash memory can be read but
not programmed or erased.
The boot, user program and programmer modes are provided as modes to write and erase the flash
memory.
The differences between boot mode and user program mode are shown in table 18.1.
Figure 18.3 shows the operation flow for boot mode and figure 18.4 shows that for user program
mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 430 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
MD1 = 1,
MD2 = 1,
FWE = 0
*1
User mode
(on-chip ROM
enabled)
FWE = 1
Reset state
RES = 0
RES = 0
MD1 = 1,
MD2 = 1,
FWE = 1
RES = 0
MD2 = 0,
MD1 = 1,
FWE = 1
FWE = 0
User
program mode
*2
RES = 0
Programmer
mode
*1
Boot mode
On-board programming mode
Notes: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is
not accessing the flash memory.
1. RAM emulation possible
2. This LSI transits to programmer mode by using the dedicated PROM programmer.
Figure 18.2 Flash Memory State Transitions
Table 18.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Boot Mode
User Program Mode
Yes
Yes
Block erase
No
Yes
Programming control program*
(2)
(1) (2) (3)
Total erase
(1) Erase/erase-verify
(2) Program/program-verify
(3) Emulation
Note: * To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 431 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
1. Initial state
The old program version or data remains written
in the flash memory. The user should prepare the
programming control program and new
application program beforehand in the host.
2. Programming control program transfer
When boot mode is entered, the boot program in
this LSI (originally incorporated in the chip) is
started and the programming control program in
the host is transferred to RAM via SCI
communication. The boot program required for
flash memory erasing is automatically transferred
to the RAM boot program area.
Host
Host
Programming control
program
New application
program
New application
program
This LSI
This LSI
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
SCI
Boot program
RAM
Flash memory
Boot program area
Application program
(old version)
Application program
(old version)
3. Flash memory initialization
The erase program in the boot program area (in
RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is
initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, total flash
memory erasure is performed, without regard to
blocks.
Programming control
program
4. Writing new application program
The programming control program transferred
from the host to RAM is executed, and the new
application program in the host is written into the
flash memory.
Host
Host
New application
program
This LSI
This LSI
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
Flash memory
Boot program area
Flash memory
preprogramming
erase
Programming control
program
SCI
Boot program
RAM
Boot program area
New application
program
Programming control
program
Program execution state
Figure 18.3 Boot Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 432 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
1. Initial state
The FWE assessment program that confirms that
user program mode has been entered, and the
program that will transfer the programming/erase
control program from flash memory to on-chip
RAM should be written into the flash memory by
the user beforehand. The programming/erase
control program should be prepared in the host
or in the flash memory.
2. Programming/erase control program transfer
When user program mode is entered, user
software confirms this fact, executes transfer
program in the flash memory, and transfers the
programming/erase control program to RAM.
Host
Host
Programming/
erase control program
New application
program
New application
program
This LSI
This LSI
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
FWE assessment
program
FWE assessment
program
Transfer program
Transfer program
Programming/
erase control program
Application program
(old version)
Application program
(old version)
3. Flash memory initialization
The programming/erase program in RAM is
executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to
H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units,
but not in byte units.
4. Writing new application program
Next, the new application program in the host is
written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do
not write to unerased blocks.
Host
Host
New application
program
This LSI
This LSI
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
FWE assessment
program
Flash memory
RAM
FWE assessment
program
Transfer program
Transfer program
Programming/
erase control program
Flash memory
erase
SCI
Boot program
Programming/
erase control program
New application
program
Program execution state
Figure 18.4 User Program Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 433 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.3
Block Configuration
Figure 18.5 shows the block configuration of 128-kbyte flash memory. The thick lines indicate
erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The flash
memory is divided into 32 kbytes (2 blocks), 28 kbytes (1 block), 16 kbytes (1 block), 8 kbytes (2
blocks), and 1 kbyte (4 blocks). Erasing is performed in these units. Programming is performed in
128-byte units starting from an address with lower eight bits H'00 or H'80.
EB0
Erase unit
1 kbyte
H'000000
H'000001
H'000002
H'000380
H'000381
H'000382
EB1
Erase unit
1 kbyte
H'000400
H'000401
H'000402
H'000780
H'000781
H'000782
EB2
Erase unit
1 kbyte
H'000800
H'000801
H'000B80
H'000B81
H'000B82
EB3
Erase unit
1 kbyte
H'000C00
H'000C01
H'000C02
H'000F80
H'000F81
H'000F82
EB4
Erase unit
28 kbytes
EB5
Erase unit
16 kbytes
EB6
Erase unit
8 kbytes
EB7
Erase unit
8 kbytes
EB8
Erase unit
32 kbytes
EB9
Erase unit
32 kbytes
H'000802
H'001000
H'001001
H'001002
H'007F80
H'007F81
H'007F82
H'008000
H'008001
H'008002
H'00BF80
H'00BF81
H'00BF82
H'00C000
H'00C001
H'00C002
H'00DF80
H'00DF81
H'00DF82
H'00E000
H'00E001
H'00E002
H'00FF80
H'00FF81
H'00FF82
H'010000
H'010001
H'010002
H'017F80
H'017F81
H'017F82
H'018000
H'018001
H'018002
H'01FF80
H'01FF81
H'01FF82
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'0003FF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
REJ09B0426-0100
H'00047F
H'0007FF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00087F
H'000BFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'000C7F
H'000FFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00107F
H'007FFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00807F
H'00BFFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00C07F
H'00DFFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00E07F
H'00FFFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'01007F
H'017FFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Figure 18.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 434 of 534
H'00007F
H'01807F
H'01FFFF
Section 18 ROM
18.4
Input/Output Pins
The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 18.2.
Table 18.2 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
I/O
Function
RES
Input
Reset
FWE
Input
Flash program/erase protection by hardware
MD2
Input
Sets this LSI’s operating mode
MD1
Input
Sets this LSI’s operating mode
MD0
Input
Sets this LSI’s operating mode
TxD2
Output
Serial transmit data output
RxD2
Input
Serial receive data input
18.5
Register Descriptions
The flash memory has the following registers.
Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1)
Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2)
Erase block register 1 (EBR1)
Erase block register 2 (EBR2)
RAM emulation register (RAMER)
18.5.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
FLMCR1 makes the flash memory enter program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, or
erase-verify mode. For details on the register setting, refer to section 18.8, Flash Memory
Programming/Erasing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 435 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
FWE
—
R
Reflects the input level at the FWE pin. It is set to 1
when a low level is input to the FWE pin, and
cleared to 0 when a high level is input.
6
SWE
0
R/W
Software Write Enable
When this bit is set to 1, flash memory
programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is
cleared to 0, other FLMCR1 register bits and all
EBR1 and EBR2 bits cannot be set.
5
ESU1
0
R/W
Erase Setup
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes
to the erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0,
the erase setup state is cancelled.
4
PSU1
0
R/W
Program Setup
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes
to the program setup state. When it is cleared to 0,
the program setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to
1 before setting the P1 bit in FLMCR1.
3
EV1
0
R/W
Erase-Verify
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes
to erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0,
erase-verify mode is cancelled.
2
PV1
0
R/W
Program-Verify
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes
to program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0,
program-verify mode is cancelled.
1
E1
0
R/W
Erase
When this bit is set to 1 while the SWE1 and ESU1
bits are 1, the flash memory changes to erase
mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase mode is
cancelled.
0
P1
0
R/W
Program
When this bit is set to 1 while the SWE1 and PSU1
bits are 1, the flash memory changes to program
mode. When it is cleared to 0, program mode is
cancelled.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 436 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.5.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
FLMCR2 indicates the state of flash memory programming/erasing. FLMCR2 is a read-only
register, and should not be written to.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
FLER
0
R
Indicates that an error has occurred during flash
memory programming or erasing. When the flash
memory enters the error-protection state, this bit is
set to 1.
All 0
—
See section 18.9.3, Error Protection, for details.
6 to 0 —
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
18.5.3
Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
EBR1 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit
in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, otherwise, all the bits in EBR1 are
automatically cleared to 0.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
EB7
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 8 kbytes of EB7
(H'00E000 to H'00FFFF) will be erased.
6
EB6
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 8 kbytes of EB6
(H'00C000 to H'00DFFF) will be erased.
5
EB5
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 16 kbytes of EB5
(H'008000 to H'00BFFF) will be erased.
4
EB4
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 28 kbytes of EB4
(H'001000 to H'007FFF) will be erased.
3
EB3
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB3 (H'000C00
to H'000FFF) will be erased.
2
EB2
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB2 (H'000800
to H'000BFF) will be erased.
1
EB1
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB1 (H'000400
to H'0007FF) will be erased.
0
EB0
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of EB0 (H'000000
to H'0003FF) will be erased.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 437 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.5.4
Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)
EBR2 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit
in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, otherwise, all the bits in EBR1 are be
automatically cleared to 0.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7 to 2 —
All 0
—
Reserved
1
EB9
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 32 kbytes of EB9
(H'018000 to H'01FFFF) will be erased.
0
EB8
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 32 kbytes of EB8
(H'010000 to H'017FFF) will be erased.
These bits are always read as 0.
18.5.5
RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)
RAMER specifies the area of flash memory to be overlapped with part of RAM when emulating
real-time flash memory programming. RAMER settings should be made in user mode or user
program mode. To ensure correct operation of the emulation function, the ROM for which RAM
emulation is performed should not be accessed immediately after this register has been modified.
If accessed, normal access execution is not guaranteed.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
—
0
—
Reserved
6
—
0
—
These bits are always read as 0.
5
—
0
R/W
Reserved
4
—
0
3
RAMS
0
Only 0 should be written to these bits.
R/W
RAM Select
Specifies selection or non-selection of flash
memory emulation in RAM. When RAMS = 1, the
flash memory is overlapped with part of RAM, and
all flash memory blocks are program/eraseprotected.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 438 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
2
1
0
RAM2
RAM1
RAM0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Flash Memory Area Selection
Specifies one of the following flash memory areas
to overlap the RAM area of H'FFE000 to H'FFE3FF
when the RAMS bit is set to 1. The areas
correspond with 1-kbyte erase blocks.
00×: H'000000 to H'0003FF (EB0)
01×: H'000400 to H'0007FF (EB1)
10×: H'000800 to H'000BFF (EB2)
11×: H'000C00 to H'000FFF (EB3)
[Legend] ×: Don’t care
18.6
On-Board Programming Modes
There are two modes for programming/erasing of the flash memory; boot mode enabling on-board
programming/erasing and programmer mode enabling programming/erasing with a PROM
programmer. On-board programming/erasing can also be performed in user program mode. At
reset-start in reset mode, this LSI changes to a mode depending on the MD pin settings and FWE
pin setting, as shown in table 18.3. The input level of each pin must be defined four states before
the reset ends.
When boot mode is entered, the boot program built into this LSI is initiated. The boot program
transfers the programming control program from the externally-connected host to on-chip RAM
via SCI_2. After erasing the entire flash memory, the programming control program is executed.
This can be used for programming initial values in the on-board state or for a forcible return in
case that programming/erasing cannot be performed in user program mode. In user program mode,
individual blocks can be erased and programmed by branching to the user program/erase control
program prepared by the user.
Table 18.3 Setting On-Board Programming Modes
MD2
MD1
MD0
FWE
LSI State after Reset End
1
1
1
1
User Mode
0
1
1
1
Boot Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 439 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.6.1
Boot Mode
Table 18.4 shows the boot mode operations from a reset end to a branch to the programming
control program.
1. In boot mode, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host
beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the description in
section 18.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
2. SCI_2 should be set to asynchronous mode with the transfer format of 8-bit data, 1 stop bit,
and no parity.
3. When the boot program is initiated, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous
SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then
calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI_2 bit rate to match
that of the host. The reset should end with the RxD pin high. The RxD and TxD pins should be
pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset is complete, it takes approximately 100
states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period.
4. When the bit rate matching is completed, the chip transmits 1-byte data H'00 to the host to
indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end
indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit 1-byte data H'55 to the chip. If
reception could not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on
the host’s transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy
between the bit rates of the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host’s
transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 18.5.
5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area is used by the boot program. The area H'FFE800
to H'FFEFBF is used to store the programming control program to be transferred from the
host. The boot program area cannot be used until the execution is shifted to the programming
control program.
6. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations
by SCI_2 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), however the adjusted bit rate value is
retained in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer of
write data or verify data with the host. At this time, the TxD pin is in the high level output
state. The contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to
the programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the
programming control program, since the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in
subroutine calls, etc.
7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. End the reset by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least
20 states, and then setting the mode (MD) pins. Boot mode is also cleared when a WDT
overflow occurs.
8. Do not change the MD pin input level in boot mode.
9. All interrupts are disabled during programming or erasing of the flash memory.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 440 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
Table 18.4 Boot Mode Operation
Item
Boot mode
start
Host Operation
Processing Contents
Communications Contents
LSI Operation
Processing Contents
Branches to boot program at reset-start
Boot program initiation
Bit rate
adjustment
Continuously transmits data H'00 at
specified bit rate
Transmits data H'55 when data H'00
is received error-free
H'00, H'00 ...... H'00
H'00
· Measures low-level period of receive data
H'00
· Calculates bit rate and sets it in BRR of
SCI_2
· Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment
end indication
H'55
H'AA
Transmits data H'AA to host when data
H'55 is received
Receives data H'AA
Transfer of
programming
control
program
Transmits number of bytes (N) of
programming control program to be
transferred as 2-byte data (low-order
byte following high-order byte)
Transmits 1-byte of programming
control program (repeated for
N times)
High-order byte and
low-order byte
Echobacks the 2-byte data received
Echoback
H'XX
Echoback
Flash memory
erase
Boot program
erase error
H'FF
H'AA
Receives data H'AA
Echobacks received data to host and also
transfers it to RAM (repeated for N times)
Checks flash memory data, erases all
flash memory blocks in case of written
data existing, and transmits data H'AA to
host (If erase could not be done,
transmits data H'FF to host and aborts
operation)
Branches to programming control program
transferred to on-chip RAM and starts
execution
Table 18.5 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is
Possible
Host Bit Rate
System Clock Frequency Range of LSI
19,200 bps
20 MHz
9,600 bps
8 to 20 MHz
4,800 bps
4 to 20 MHz
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 441 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.6.2
Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode
On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user
program mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching
conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must
contain the user program/erase control program or a program that provides the user program/erase
control program from external memory. Since the flash memory itself cannot be read during
programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip RAM, as in boot
mode. Figure 18.6 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode.
Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the description in section 18.8,
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 442 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
Reset-start
No
Program/erase?
Yes
Transfer user program/erase control
program to RAM
Branch to flash memory application
program
Branch to user program/erase control
program in RAM
FWE = high*
Execute user program/erase control
program (flash memory rewrite)
Clear FWE
Branch to flash memory application
program
Note: * Do not constantly apply a high level to the FWE pin. Only apply a high level to the FWE pin
when programming or erasing the flash memory. To prevent excessive programming or
erasing, while a high level is being applied to the FWE pin, activate the watchdog timer in
case of handling CPU runaways.
Figure 18.6 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 443 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.7
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
A setting in the RAM emulation register (RAMER) enables part of RAM to be overlapped onto
the flash memory area so that data to be written to flash memory can be emulated in RAM in real
time. Emulation can be performed in user mode or user program mode. Figure 18.7 shows an
example of emulation of real-time flash memory programming.
1. Set RAMER to overlap part of RAM onto the area for which real-time programming is
required.
2. Emulation is performed using the overlapping RAM.
3. After the program data has been confirmed, the RAMS bit is cleared, thus releasing the RAM
overlap.
4. The data written in the overlapping RAM is written into the flash memory space (EB0).
Start of emulation program
Set RAMER
Write tuning data to overlap
RAM
Execute application program
No
Tuning OK?
Yes
Clear RAMER
Write to flash memory
emulation block
End of emulation program
Figure 18.7 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 444 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
An example in which flash memory block area EB0 is overlapped is shown in figure 18.8.
1. The RAM area to be overlapped is fixed at a 1-kbyte area in the range H'FFE000 to H'FFE3FF.
2. The flash memory area to overlap is selected by RAMER from a 1-kbyte area of the EB0 to
EB3 blocks.
3. The overlapped RAM area can be accessed from both the flash memory addresses and RAM
addresses.
4. When the RAMS bit in RAMER is set to 1, program/erase protection is enabled for all flash
memory blocks (emulation protection). In this state, setting the P1 or E1 bit in FLMCR1 to 1
does not make a transition to program mode or erase mode.
5. A RAM area cannot be erased by execution of software in accordance with the erase
algorithm.
6. Block area EB0 contains the vector table. When performing RAM emulation, the vector table
is needed in the overlap RAM.
H'000000
Flash memory
(EB0)
Flash memory
(EB0)
(EB1)
On-chip RAM
(Shadow of
H'FFE000 to
H'FFE3FF)
(EB2)
Flash memory
(EB2)
(EB3)
(EB3)
H'0003FF
H'000400
H'0007FF
H'000800
H'000BFF
H'000C00
H'000FFF
H'FFE000
On-chip RAM
(1 kbyte)
On-chip RAM
(1 kbyte)
H'FFE3FF
Normal memory map
Memory map
with overlapped RAM
Figure 18.8 Example of RAM Overlap Operation
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 445 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.8
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing
The flash memory is programmed or erased in on-board programming mode by a software method
using the CPU. Depending on the FLMCR1 setting, the flash memory operates in one of the
following four modes: Program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, and erase-verify mode.
The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control program in
user program mode perform programming/erasing in combination with these modes. Flash
memory programming and erasing should be performed in accordance with the descriptions in
section 18.8.1, Program/Program-Verify, and section 18.8.2, Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively.
18.8.1
Program/Program-Verify
When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown
in figure 18.9 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart
will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting the chip to
voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability.
1. Programming must be done on erased addresses. Do not perform additional programming or
previously programmed addresses.
2. Programming should be performed in units of 128 bytes. A 128-byte data must be transferred
even if data to be written is fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the
extra addresses.
3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: A 128-byte programming data area, a 128byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform
reprogramming data computation and additional programming data computation according to
figure 18.9.
4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or
additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte
data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory
destination area must be H'00 or H'80.
5. The time during which the P1 bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Figure 18.9 shows the
allowable programming times.
6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc.
Set the overflow cycle to approximately 6.6 ms.
7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 2
bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write
was performed.
8. The number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence for the same bit should be
less than 1,000.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 446 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
Start of programming
Write pulse application subroutine
Perform programming in the erased state.
Do not perform additional programming
on previously programmed addresses.
START
Apply Write Pulse
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
WDT enable
Wait (tsswe) µs
Set PSU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tspsu) µs
*7
Set P bit in FLMCR1
*7
Store 128-byte program data in program
data area and reprogram data area
*4
n=1
Start of programming
m=0
Wait (tsp) µs
*5*7
Clear P bit in FLMCR1
Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram
data area consecutively to flash memory
End of programming
*1
Sub-Routine-Call
Wait (tcp) µs
*7
Apply Write pulse
Wait (tcpsu) µs
See Note 6 for pulse width
Set PV bit in FLMCR1
Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tspv) µs
*7
*7
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Disable WDT
End Sub
*7
Read verify data
*2
Write data =
verify data?
No
n←n+1
Increment address
Note 6: Write Pulse Width
Number of Writes n
Wait (tspvr) µs
Write Time (tsp) µs
30 *
30 *
30 *
30 *
30 *
30 *
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
No
6≥n?
Yes
Additional-programming data computation
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
998
999
1000
m=1
Yes
Transfer additional-programming data to
additional-programming data area
*4
*3
Reprogram data computation
Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area
No
200
200
200
*4
128-byte
data verification completed?
Yes
Clear PV bit in FLMCR1
Reprogram
Note: * Use a 10 µs write pulse for additional programming.
Wait (tcpv) µs
RAM
6 ≥ n?
*7
No
Yes
Successively write 128-byte data from additional*1
programming data area in RAM to flash memory
Program data storage
area (128 bytes)
Sub-Routine-Call
Reprogram data storage
area (128 bytes)
Apply Write Pulse (Additional programming)
Additional-programming
data storage area
(128 bytes)
m=0?
*7
No
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
n ≥ (N) ?
No
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tcswe) µs
Wait (tcswe) µs
*7
Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to
must be H'00 or H'80.
A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case,
End of programming
Programming failure
H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
3. Reprogram data is determined by the operation shown in the table below (comparison between the data stored in the program data area and the verify data). Bits for which the reprogram data is 0 are
programmed in the next reprogramming loop. Therefore, even bits for which programming has been completed will be subjected to programming once again if the result of the subsequent verify operation is NG.
4. A 128-byte area for storing program data, a 128-byte area for storing reprogram data, and a 128-byte area for storing additional data must be provided in RAM.
The contents of the reprogram data area and additional data area are modified as programming proceeds.
5. A write pulse of 30 µs or 200 µs is applied according to the progress of the programming operation. See Note 6 for details of the pulse widths. When writing of additional-programming data is executed,
a 10 µs write pulse should be applied. Reprogram data X' means reprogram data when the write pulse is applied.
7. The wait times and value of N are shown in section 22.5, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Additional-Programming Data Computation Table
Reprogram Data Computation Table
Original Data
Verify Data
Reprogram Data
(D)
0
(V)
0
(X)
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
Comments
Reprogram Data
(X')
Verify Data
Additional(V)
Programming Data (Y)
Comments
Programming completed
0
0
0
Additional programming to be executed
Programming incomplete; reprogram
0
1
1
Additional programming not to be executed
1
0
1
Additional programming not to be executed
1
1
1
Additional programming not to be executed
Still in erased state; no action
Figure 18.9 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 447 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.8.2
Erase/Erase-Verify
When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 18.10 should be
followed.
1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary.
2. Erasing is performed in block units. Specify a single block o be erased with the erase block
registers (EBR2 and EBR1). To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn.
3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time.
4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. Set the
overflow cycle to approximately 19.8 ms.
5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower two
bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write
was performed.
6. If the read data is not erased successfully, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/eraseverify sequence as before. Note that the number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify
sequence should be less than 100.
18.8.3
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
All interrupts, including the NMI interrupt, should be disabled while flash memory is being
programmed, erased, or the boot program is being executed, for the following three reasons:
1. Interrupt during programming/erasing may cause a violation of the programming or erasing
algorithm, with the result that normal operation cannot be assured.
2. If interrupt exception handling starts before the vector address is written or during
programming/erasing, a correct vector cannot be fetched and the CPU malfunctions.
3. If an interrupt occurs during boot program execution, normal boot mode sequence cannot be
carried out.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 448 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
Start
*1
Perform erasing in block units.
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsswe) µs
*5
n=1
*3 *4
Set EBR1 or EBR2
Enable WDT
Set ESU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsesu) µs
*5
Start of erase
Set E bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tse) ms
Clear E bit in FLMCR1
Erase halted
Wait (tce) µs
*5
Clear ESU bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tcesu) µs
*5
Disable WDT
Set EV bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tsev) µs
n←n+1
*5
Set block start address as verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait (tsevr) µs
*5
*2
Read verify data
Increment
address
Verify data = all 1s?
No
Yes
No
Last address of block?
Yes
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (tcev) µs
Wait (tcev) µs
*5
n ≥ (N)?
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
*5
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
*5
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (tcswe) µs
Wait (tcswe) µs
End of erasing
Erase failure
No
*5
Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary.
Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2). Two or more bits must not be set simultaneously.
Erasing is performed in block units. To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn.
The wait times and the value of N are shown in section 22.5, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Figure 18.10 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 449 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.9
Program/Erase Protection
There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection; hardware protection, software
protection, and error protection.
18.9.1
Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly
disabled or aborted because of a transition to reset or standby mode. Flash memory control register
1 (FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), and erase block register 1 (EBR1) are
initialized. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low
until oscillation settles after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin
low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC characteristics section.
18.9.2
Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks
by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1. When software protection is in effect, setting the P1 or E1
bit in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase
block register 1 (EBR1), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When EBR1 is set to
H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks.
18.9.3
Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when CPU runaway occurs during flash memory
programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase
algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation
prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.
When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER
bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered.
• When the flash memory of the relevant address area is read during programming/erasing
(including vector read and instruction fetch)
• Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 450 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
The FLMCR2, FLMCR1, and EBR1 settings are retained, however program mode or erase mode
is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be reentered by re-setting the P1 or E1 bit. However, PV1 and EV1 bit setting is enabled, and a
transition can be made to verify mode. Error protection can be cleared only by a power-on reset.
18.10
Programmer Mode
In programmer mode, a PROM programmer can be used to perform programming/erasing via a
socket adapter, just as for a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the
Renesas 128-kbyte flash memory on-chip MCU device type (FZTAT128V5A).
18.11
Power-Down States for Flash Memory
In user mode, the flash memory will operate in either of the following states:
• Normal operating mode
The flash memory can be read and written to.
• Standby mode
All flash memory circuits are halted.
Table 18.6 shows the correspondence between the operating modes of this LSI and the flash
memory. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state from standby mode, a
period to settle the power supply circuits that were stopped is needed. When the flash memory
returns to its normal operating state, bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR must be set to provide a wait
time of at least 20 µs, even when the external clock is being used.
Table 18.6 Flash Memory Operating States
LSI Operating State
Flash Memory Operating State
Active mode
Normal operating mode
Standby mode
Standby mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 451 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 18 ROM
18.12
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Masked ROM Version
The masked ROM version does not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are
provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 18.7 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT
version but not in the masked ROM version. If a register listed in table 18.7 is read in the masked
ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed
on the F-ZTAT version is switched to a masked ROM version product, it must be modified to
ensure that the registers in table 18.7 have no effect.
Table 18.7 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Masked ROM Version
Register
Abbreviation
Address
Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR1
H'FFA8
Flash memory control register 2
FLMCR2
H'FFA9
Erase block register 1
EBR1
H'FFAA
Erase block register 2
EBR2
H'FFAB
RAM emulation register
RAMER
H'FEDB
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 452 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
This LSI has an on-chip clock pulse generator that generates the system clock (φ), the bus master
clock, and internal clocks. The clock pulse generator consists of an oscillator, PLL circuit, clock
selection circuit, medium-speed clock divider, and bus master clock selection circuit. A block
diagram of the clock pulse generator is shown in figure19.1.
SCKCR
LPWRCR
SCK2 to SCK0
STC1, STC0
EXTAL
Clock
oscillator
PLL circuit
(×1, ×2, ×4)
XTAL
Clock
selection
circuit
Mediumspeed
clock divider
φ/32 to
φ/2
φ
System clock
to φ pin
Bus
master
clock
selection
circuit
Internal clock to
peripheral modules
Bus master clock
to CPU and DTC
[Legend]
LPWRCR: Low-power control register
SCKCR: System clock control register
Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator
The frequency can be changed by means of the PLL circuit. Frequency changes are performed by
software by settings in the low-power control register (LPWRCR) and system clock control
register (SCKCR).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 453 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
19.1
Register Descriptions
The on-chip clock pulse generator has the following registers.
• System clock control register (SCKCR)
• Low-power control register (LPWRCR)
19.1.1
System Clock Control Register (SCKCR)
SCKCR performs φ clock output control, selection of operation when the PLL circuit frequency
multiplication factor is changed, and medium-speed mode control.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
PSTOP
0
R/W
φ Clock Output Disable
Controls φ output.
High-speed Mode, Medium-Speed Mode
0: φ output
1: Fixed high
Sleep Mode
0: φ output
1: Fixed high
Software Standby Mode
0: Fixed high
1: Fixed high
Hardware Standby Mode
0: High impedance
1: High impedance
6 to 4 
All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
3
STCS
0
R/W
Frequency Multiplication Factor Switching Mode
Select
Selects the operation when the PLL circuit
frequency multiplication factor is changed.
0: Specified multiplication factor is valid after
transition to software standby mode
1: Specified multiplication factor is valid
immediately after STC1 bit and STC0 bit are
rewritten
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 454 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
2
SCK2
0
R/W
System Clock Select 2 to 0
1
SCK1
0
R/W
These bits select the bus master clock.
0
SCK0
0
R/W
000: High-speed mode
001: Medium-speed clock is φ/2
010: Medium-speed clock is φ/4
011: Medium-speed clock is φ/8
100: Medium-speed clock is φ/16
101: Medium-speed clock is φ/32
11×: Setting prohibited
[Legend]
×: Don’t care
19.1.2
Bit
Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
Bit Name
7 to 4 
Initial Value
R/W
Description
All 0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
3, 2

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits can be read from and write to, but
should not be set to 1.
1
STC1
0
R/W
Frequency Multiplication Factor
0
STC0
0
R/W
The STC bits specify the frequency multiplication
factor of the PLL circuit.
00: ×1
01: ×2
10: ×4
11: Setting prohibited
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 455 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
19.2
Oscillator
Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock. In
either case, the input clock should not exceed 20 MHz.
19.2.1
Connecting a Crystal Resonator
Circuit Configuration: A crystal resonator can be connected as shown in the example in figure
19.2. Select the damping resistance Rd according to table19.1. An AT-cut parallel-resonance
crystal should be used.
CL1
EXTAL
XTAL
CL1 = CL2 = 22 to 10 pF
CL2
Rd
Figure 19.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example)
Table19.1
Damping Resistance Value
Frequency (MHz)
4
8
10
12
16
20
Rd (Ω)
500
200
0
0
0
0
Figure19.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. Use a crystal resonator that has
the characteristics shown in table 19.2.
CL
XTAL
L
Rs
C0
EXTAL
AT-cut parallel-resonance type
Figure 19.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 456 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
Table19.2
Crystal Resonator Characteristics
Frequency (MHz)
4
8
10
12
16
20
RS max (Ω)
120
80
70
60
50
40
C0 max (pF)
7
7
7
7
7
7
19.2.2
External Clock Input
Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure
19.4. If the XTAL pin is left open, ensure that stray capacitance does not exceed 10 pF. When
complementary clock is input to the XTAL pin, the external clock input should be fixed high in
standby mode.
External clock input
EXTAL
XTAL
Open
(a) XTAL pin left open
EXTAL
External clock input
XTAL
(b) Complementary clock input at XTAL pin
Figure 19.4 External Clock Input (Examples)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 457 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
Table19.3 shows the input conditions for the external clock.
Table19.3
External Clock Input Conditions
VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
External clock input low
pulse width
tEXL
15

ns
Figure 19.5
External clock input high
pulse width
tEXH
15

ns
External clock rise time
tEXr

5
ns
External clock fall time
tEXf

5
ns
tEXH
tEXL
VCC × 0.5
EXTAL
tEXr
tEXf
Figure 19.5 External Clock Input Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 458 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
19.3
PLL Circuit
The PLL circuit multiplies the frequency of the clock from the oscillator by a factor of 1, 2, or 4.
The multiplication factor is set by the STC0 bit and the STC1 bit in LPWRCR. The phase of the
rising edge of the internal clock is controlled so as to match that at the EXTAL pin.
When the multiplication factor of the PLL circuit is changed, the operation varies according to the
setting of the STCS bit in SCKCR.
When STCS = 0, the setting becomes valid after a transition to software standby mode. The
transition time count is performed in accordance with the setting of bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR.
For details on SBYCR, refer to section 20.1.1, Standby Control Register (SBYCR).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The initial PLL circuit multiplication factor is 1.
STS2 to STS0 are set to give the specified transition time.
The target value is set in STC1 and STC0, and a transition is made to software standby mode.
The clock pulse generator stops and the value set in STC1 and STC0 becomes valid.
Software standby mode is cleared, and a transition time is secured in accordance with the
setting in STS2 to STS0.
6. After the set transition time has elapsed, this LSI resumes operation using the target
multiplication factor.
If a PC break is set for the SLEEP instruction, software standby mode is entered and break
exception handling is executed after the oscillation settling time. In this case, the instruction
following the SLEEP instruction is executed after execution of the RTE instruction. When STCS =
1, this LSI operates on the changed multiplication factor immediately after bits STC1 and STC0
are rewritten.
19.4
Medium-Speed Clock Divider
The medium-speed clock divider divides the system clock to generate φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, and
φ/32.
19.5
Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit
The bus master clock selection circuit selects the clock supplied to the bus master by setting the
bits SCK2 to SCK0 in SCKCR. The bus master clock can be selected from high-speed mode, or
medium-speed clocks (φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, φ/32).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 459 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
19.6
Usage Notes
19.6.1
Note on Crystal Resonator
As various characteristics related to the crystal resonator are closely linked to the user’s board
design, thorough evaluation is necessary on the user’s part, using the resonator connection
examples shown in this section as a guide. As the resonator circuit ratings will depend on the
floating capacitance of the resonator and the mounting circuit, the ratings should be determined in
consultation with the resonator manufacturer. The design must ensure that a voltage exceeding the
maximum rating is not applied to the oscillator pin.
19.6.2
Note on Board Design
When designing the board, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible
to the XTAL and EXTAL pins. Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator
circuit, as shown in figure 19.6. This is to prevent induction from interfering with correct
oscillation.
Signal A Signal B
Avoid
CL2
This LSI
XTAL
EXTAL
CL1
Figure 19.6 Note on Board Design of Oscillator Circuit
Figure 19.7 shows external circuitry recommended to be provided around the PLL circuit. Place
oscillation settling capacitor C1 and resistor R1 close to the PLLCAP pin, and ensure that no other
signal lines cross this line. Separate PLLVss from the other Vcc and Vss lines at the board power
supply source, and be sure to insert bypass capacitors CB close to the pins.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 460 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
R1 = 3 kΩ
C1 = 470 pF
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
VCL
VCC
CB = 0.1 µF*
CB = 0.1 µF
VSS
(Values are preliminary recommended values.)
Note: * CB is laminated ceramic.
Figure 19.7 External Circuitry Recommended for PLL Circuit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 461 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 462 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
In addition to the normal program execution state, this LSI has five power-down modes in which
operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power consumption is reduced. Low-power
operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip peripheral modules, and
so on.
This LSI’s operating modes are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
High-speed mode
Medium-speed mode
Sleep mode
Module stop mode
Software standby mode
Hardware standby mode
The above modes except the high-speed mode are power-down modes. Sleep mode is a CPU state,
medium-speed mode is a CPU and bus master state, and module stop mode is an internal
peripheral function (including bus masters other than the CPU) state. Some of these states can be
combined.
After a reset, the LSI is in high-speed mode.
Figure 21.1 shows possible transitions between modes. Table 21.1 shows the conditions of
transition made by the SLEEP instruction and recovery from power-down mode by an interrupt.
Table 21.2 shows the internal states in each mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 463 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
Program-halted state
STBY pin = Low
Reset state
Hardware
standby mode
STBY pin = High,
RES pin = Low
RES pin = High
Program execution state
SSBY = 0
Sleep mode
(main clock)
SLEEP command
High-speed mode
(main clock)
Any interrupt
SCK2 to
SCK0 = 0
SLEEP
command
SCK2 to
SCK0 ≠ 0
Software
standby mode
External
interrupt*
Medium-speed
mode
(main clock)
: Transition after exception processing
Notes:
SSBY = 1
: Low power dissipation mode
* NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0
• When a transition is made between modes by means of an interrupt, the transition cannot be
made on interrupt source generation alone. Ensure that interrupt handling is performed after
accepting the interrupt request.
• From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs when RES
is driven low.
• From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY is driven low.
Figure 20.1 Mode Transition Diagram
Table 20.1 Low Power Consumption Mode Transition Conditions
Pre-Transition
State
High-speed/
Medium-speed
Status of Control
Bit at Transition
SSBY
State after Transition
Invoked by SLEEP
Command
State after Transition Back
from Low Power Mode
Invoked by Interrupt
0
Sleep
High-speed/Medium-speed
1
Software standby
High-speed/Medium-speed
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 464 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
Table 20.2 LSI Internal States in Each Mode
MediumHigh-Speed Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby
System clock pulse
generator
Operate
Operate
Operate
Operate
Halted
Halted
CPU
Instructions
Registers
Operate
Mediumspeed
operation
Halted
(retained)
High/
mediumspeed
operation
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(undefined)
External
interrupts
NMI
Operate
Operate
Operate
Operate
Operate
Halted
Peripheral
functions
PBC
Operate
Mediumspeed
operation
Operate
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(reset)
I/O
Operate
Operate
Operate
Operate
Retained
High
impedance
TPU
Operate
Operate
Operate
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(reset)
WDT
Operate
Operate
Operate
Operate
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(reset)
SCI
Operate
Operate
Operate
Halted*
(reset/
retained)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
RAM
Operate
Mediumspeed
operation
Operate
(DTC)
Operate
Retained
Retained
SSU
Operate
Operate
Operate
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Function
IRQ5 to IRQ0
DTC
TMR
PPG
A/D
Notes: Halted (retained) means that internal register values are retained. The internal state is in the
operation suspended state.
Halted (reset) means that internal register values and internal states are initialized.
In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted
(reset or retained).
* The SCI’s TDR, RDR, and SSR are halted (reset), and the other registers are halted
(retained).
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 465 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
20.1
Register Descriptions
Registers related to the power down mode are shown below. For details on the system clock
control register (SCKCR), refer to section 19.1.1, System Clock Control Register (SCKCR).
•
•
•
•
•
System clock control register (SCKCR)
Standby control register (SBYCR)
Module stop control register A (MSTPCRA)
Module stop control register B (MSTPCRB)
Module stop control register C (MSTPCRC)
20.1.1
Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs software standby mode control.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
SSBY
0
R/W
Software Standby
This bit specifies the transition mode after
executing the SLEEP instruction
0: Shifts to sleep mode when the SLEEP
instruction is executed
1: Shifts to software standby mode when the
SLEEP instruction is executed
This bit does not change when clearing the
software standby mode by using external interrupts
and shifting to normal operation. This bit should be
written with 0 when clearing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 466 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
6
STS2
0
R/W
Standby Timer Select 2 to 0
5
STS1
0
R/W
4
STS0
0
R/W
These bits select the MCU wait time for clock
settling when software standby mode is cancelled
by an external interrupt. With a crystal oscillator
(table 21.3), select a wait time of 8 ms (oscillation
settling time) or more, depending on the operating
frequency. With an external clock, select a wait
time of 2 ms or more.
000: Standby time = 8,192 states
001: Standby time = 16,384 states
010: Standby time = 32,768 states
011: Standby time = 65,536 states
100: Standby time = 131,072 states
101: Standby time = 262,144 states
110: Reserved
111: Standby time = 16 states
3

1
R/W
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
2 to 0 
All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 467 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
20.1.2
Module Stop Control Registers A to C (MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC)
MSTPCR is comprised of three 8-bit readable/writable registers, and performs module stop mode
control. Setting a bit to 1 causes the corresponding module to enter module stop mode. Clearing
the bit to 0 clears the module stop mode.
• MSTPCRA
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Module
7
MSTPA7*
0
R/W
6
MSTPA6
0
R/W
Data transfer controller (DTC)
5
MSTPA5
1
R/W
16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU)
4
MSTPA4
1
R/W
8-bit timer (TMR_1, TMR_0)
3
MSTPA3
1
R/W
Programmable pulse generator (PPG)
2
MSTPA2*
1
R/W
1
MSTPA1
1
R/W
A/D converter
0
MSTPA0
1
R/W
8-bit timer (TMR_3, TMR_2)
• MSTPCRB
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Module
7
MSTPB7
1
R/W
Serial communication interface 0 (SCI0)
6
MSTPB6
1
R/W
Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1)
5
MSTPB5
1
R/W
Serial communication interface 2 (SCI2)
4
MSTPB4*
MSTPB3*
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
R/W
1
MSTPB2*
MSTPB1*
1
R/W
0
MSTPB0*
1
R/W
3
2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 468 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
• MSTPCRC
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
1
R/W
6
MSTPC7*
MSTPC6*
1
R/W
5
MSTPC5*
1
R/W
4
MSTPC4
1
R/W
3
MSTPC3*
1
R/W
2
MSTPC2
1
R/W
1
MSTPC1*
MSTPC0*
1
R/W
1
R/W
0
Note:
20.2
*
Module
PC break controller (PBC)
Synchronous serial communication unit (SSU)
MSTPA7 is a readable/writable bit with an initial value of 0. The write value should
always be 0.
MSTPA2, MSTPB4 to MSTPB0, MSTPC7 to MSTPC5, MSTPC3, MSTPC1, and
MSTPC0 are readable/writable bits with an initial value of 1. The write value should
always be 1.
Medium-Speed Mode
When the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in SCKCR are set to 1, the operating mode changes to mediumspeed mode as soon as the current bus cycle ends. In medium-speed mode, the CPU operates on
the operating clock (φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, or φ/32) specified by the SCK2 to SCK0 bits. Bus masters
(DTC) other than the CPU also operate in medium-speed mode. On-chip peripheral modules other
than bus masters always operate on the high-speed clock (φ).
In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to
the bus master operating clock. For example, if φ/4 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip
memory is accessed in 4 states, and internal I/O registers in 8 states.
Medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing all of bits SCK2 to SCK0 to 0. A transition is made to
high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle.
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, a transition is
made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored.
When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SSBY bit = 1, operation shifts to the software
standby mode. When software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed
mode is restored.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 469 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
When the RES pin is set low and medium-speed mode is cancelled, operation shifts to the reset
state. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer.
When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
Figure 21.2 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode.
Medium-speed mode
φ,
peripheral module clock
Bus master clock
Internal address bus
SCKCR
SCKCR
Internal write signal
Figure 20.2 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing
20.3
Sleep Mode
20.3.1
Transition to Sleep Mode
If SLEEP instruction is executed when the SBYCR SSBY bit = 0, the CPU enters the sleep mode.
In sleep mode, CPU operation stops, however the contents of the CPU’s internal registers are
retained. Other peripheral modules do not stop.
20.3.2
Clearing Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is cleared by any interrupt, or signals at the RES, or STBY pins.
• Exiting Sleep Mode by Interrupts:
When an interrupt occurs, sleep mode is exited and interrupt exception processing starts. Sleep
mode is not exited if the interrupt is disabled, or if interrupts other than NMI are masked by the
CPU.
• Exiting Sleep Mode by RES pin:
Setting the RES pin low level selects the reset state. After the stipulated reset input duration,
driving the RES pin high level restart the CPU performing reset exception processing.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 470 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
• Exiting Sleep Mode by STBY Pin:
When the STBY pin level is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
20.4
Software Standby Mode
20.4.1
Transition to Software Standby Mode
A transition is made to software standby mode if the SLEEP instruction is executed when the
SBYCR SSBY bit is set to 1. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip peripheral modules, and oscillator,
all stop. However, the contents of the CPU’s internal registers, on-chip RAM data, and the states
of on-chip peripheral modules other than the SCI, SSU, A/D converter, and the states of I/O ports,
are retained. In this mode, the oscillator stops, and therefore power consumption is significantly
reduced.
20.4.2
Clearing Software Standby Mode
Software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI pin, or pins IRQ5 to IRQ0), or by
means of the RES pin or STBY pin.
• Clearing with an interrupt
When an NMI or IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and
after the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR has elapsed, stable clocks are supplied to the
entire chip, software standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started.
When clearing software standby mode with an IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt, set the corresponding
enable bit to 1 and ensure that no interrupt with a higher priority than interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0
is generated. Software standby mode cannot be cleared if the interrupt has been masked on the
CPU side or has been designated as a DTC activation source.
• Clearing with the RES pin
When the RES pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as clock
oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire chip. Note that the RES pin must be held low
until clock oscillation settles. When the RES pin goes high, the CPU begins reset exception
handling.
• Clearing with the STBY pin
When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 471 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
20.4.3
Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode
Bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below.
• Using a Crystal Oscillator:
Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is at least 8 ms (the oscillation settling time).
Table 21.3 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits
STS2 to STS0.
• Using an External Clock
The PLL circuit requires a time for settling. Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is
at least 2 ms(the oscillation settling time).
Table 20.3 Oscillation Stabilization Time Settings
STS2 STS1 STS0 Standby Time
20
16
12
10
8
6
4
MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz Unit
0
0
1
1
0
1
Note:
0
8,192 states
0.41 0.51
0.68 0.8
1.0
1.3
2.0
1
16,384 states
0.82 1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.7
4.1
0
32,768 states
1.6
2.0
2.7
3.3
4.1
5.5
8.2
1
65,536 states
3.3
4.1
5.5
6.6
8.2
10.9 16.4
8.2
10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8
ms
0
131,072 states
6.6
1
262,144 states
13.1 16.4 21.8 26.2
32.8 43.6 65.6
0
Reserved








1
16 states*
0.8
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
1.7
4.0
µs
: Recommended time setting
* Cannot be used in this LSI.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 472 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
20.4.4
Software Standby Mode Application Example
Figure 21.3 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at the
falling edge on the NMI pin, and software standby mode is cleared at the rising edge on the NMI
pin.
In this example, an NMI interrupt is accepted with the NMIEG bit in SYSCR cleared to 0 (falling
edge specification), then the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification), the SSBY bit is set
to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed, causing a transition to software standby mode.
Software standby mode is then cleared at the rising edge on the NMI pin.
Oscillator
φ
NMI
NMIEG
SSBY
Software standby mode
NMI exception
(power-down mode)
handling
NMIEG = 1
SSBY = 1
SLEEP instruction
NMI exception
handling
Oscillation
stabilization
time tOSC2
Figure 20.3 Software Standby Mode Application Example
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 473 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
20.5
Hardware Standby Mode
20.5.1
Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode from any mode.
In hardware standby mode, all functions enter the reset state and stop operation, resulting in a
significant reduction in power consumption. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, on-chip
RAM data is retained. I/O ports are set to the high-impedance state.
In order to retain on-chip RAM data, the RAME bit in SYSCR should be cleared to 0 before
driving the STBY pin low.
Do not change the state of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) while this LSI is in hardware standby
mode.
20.5.2
Clearing Hardware Standby Mode
Hardware standby mode is cleared by means of the STBY pin and the RES pin. When the STBY
pin is driven high while the RES pin is low, the reset state is set and clock oscillation is started.
Ensure that the RES pin is held low until the clock oscillator settles (at least 8 msthe oscillation
settling timewhen using a crystal oscillator). When the RES pin is subsequently driven high, a
transition is made to the program execution state via the reset exception handling state.
20.5.3
Hardware Standby Mode Timings
Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
1. To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit set to 1 in SYSCR
Drive the RES signal low at least 10 states before the STBY signal goes low, as shown in
figure 21.4. After STBY has gone low, RES has to wait for at least 0 ns before becoming high.
STBY
t1 ≥ 10 tcyc
t2 ≥ 0 ns
RES
Figure 20.4 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 474 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
2. To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit cleared to 0 in SYSCR, or when RAM contents
do not need to be retained
RES does not have to be driven low as in the above case.
Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode
Drive the RES signal low approximately 100 ns or more before STBY goes high to execute a
power-on reset.
STBY
t ≥ 100 ns
tOSC1
RES
Figure 20.5 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode
20.6
Module Stop Mode
Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip peripheral modules.
When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of
the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating
independently.
When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module
starts operating at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of modules
other than the SCI* and A/D converter are retained.
After reset clearance, all modules other than DTC are in module stop mode.
When an on-chip peripheral module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is
disabled.
Note: * The internal states of some SCI registers are retained.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 475 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
20.7
φ Clock Output Disabling Function
The output of the φ clock can be controlled by means of the PSTOP bit in SCKCR, and DDR for
the corresponding port. When the PSTOP bit is set to 1, the φ clock stops at the end of the bus
cycle, and φ output goes high. φ clock output is enabled when the PSTOP bit is cleared to 0. When
DDR for the corresponding port is cleared to 0, φ clock output is disabled and input port mode is
set. Table 21.4 shows the state of the φ pin in each processing state.
Table 20.4 φ Pin State in Each Processing State
Register Settings
DDR
PSTOP
Normal Mode
Sleep Mode
Software
Standby Mode
Hardware
Standby Mode
0
×
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
1
0
φ output
φ output
Fixed high
High impedance
1
1
Fixed high
Fixed high
Fixed high
High impedance
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 476 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
20.8
Usage Notes
20.8.1
I/O Port Status
In software standby mode, I/O port states are retained. Therefore, there is no reduction in current
consumption for the output current when a high-level signal is output.
20.8.2
Current Consumption during Oscillation Stabilization Wait Period
Current consumption increases during the oscillation settling wait period.
20.8.3
DTC Module Stop
Depending on the operating status of the DTC, MSTPA6 bit may not be set to 1. Setting of the
DTC module stop mode should be carried out only when the respective module is not activated.
For details, refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
20.8.4
On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupt
Relevant interrupt operations cannot be performed in module stop mode. Consequently, if module
stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU
interrupt source or the DTC activation source.
Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode.
20.8.5
Writing to MSTPCR
MSTPCR should only be written to by the CPU.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 477 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 20 Power-Down Modes
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 478 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Section 21 List of Registers
The register list gives information on the on-chip I/O register addresses, how the register bits are
configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown
below.
1.
•
•
•
•
2.
•
•
•
•
3.
•
•
Register addresses (address order)
Registers are listed in the order of ascending addresses.
For 16-bit registers, the addresses of MSB are shown.
Registers are classified according to functional modules.
The access size is indicated.
Register bits
Bit configurations of the registers are listed in the same order as the register addresses.
Reserved bits are indicated by “” in the bit name columns.
Registers for which bit numbers are shown are those operate as counters or hold data.
For 16-bit registers, bits in MSB are shown in the upper line and bits in LSB in the lower line.
Register states in each operating mode
Register states are listed in the same order as the register addresses.
The register states shown here are for the basic operating modes. If an on-chip module has its
own reset state, refer to the section on that on-chip module.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 479 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
21.1
Register Addresses (Address Order)
The data-bus width column indicates the number of bits. The access-state column shows the
number of states of the selected basic clock that is required for access to the register.
Register Name
Number
Abbreviation of Bits Address* Module
Data Access
Width State
SS control register H_0
SSCRH_0
8
H'FB00
SSU_0
16
3
SS control register L_0
SSCRL_0
8
H'FB01
SSU_0
16
3
SS mode register_0
SSMR_0
8
H'FB02
SSU_0
16
3
SS enable register_0
SSER_0
8
H'FB03
SSU_0
16
3
SS status register_0
SSSR_0
8
H'FB04
SSU_0
16
3
SS transmit data register 0_0
SSTDR0_0
8
H'FB06
SSU_0
16
3
SS transmit data register 1_0
SSTDR1_0
8
H'FB07
SSU_0
16
3
SS transmit data register 2_0
SSTDR2_0
8
H'FB08
SSU_0
16
3
SS transmit data register 3_0
SSTDR3_0
8
H'FB09
SSU_0
16
3
SS receive data register 0_0
SSRDR0_0
8
H'FB0A
SSU_0
16
3
SS receive data register 1_0
SSRDR1_0
8
H'FB0B
SSU_0
16
3
SS receive data register 2_0
SSRDR2_0
8
H'FB0C
SSU_0
16
3
SS receive data register 3_0
SSRDR3_0
8
H'FB0D
SSU_0
16
3
SS control register H_1
SSCRH_1
8
H'FB10
SSU_1
16
3
SS control register L_1
SSCRL_1
8
H'FB11
SSU_1
16
3
SS mode register_1
SSMR_1
8
H'FB12
SSU_1
16
3
SS enable register_1
SSER_1
8
H'FB13
SSU_1
16
3
SS status register_1
SSSR_1
8
H'FB14
SSU_1
16
3
SS transmit data register 0_1
SSTDR0_1
8
H'FB16
SSU_1
16
3
SS transmit data register 1_1
SSTDR1_1
8
H'FB17
SSU_1
16
3
SS transmit data register 2_1
SSTDR2_1
8
H'FB18
SSU_1
16
3
SS transmit data register 3_1
SSTDR3_1
8
H'FB19
SSU_1
16
3
SS receive data register 0_1
SSRDR0_1
8
H'FB1A
SSU_1
16
3
SS receive data register 1_1
SSRDR1_1
8
H'FB1B
SSU_1
16
3
SS receive data register 2_1
SSRDR2_1
8
H'FB1C
SSU_1
16
3
SS receive data register 3_1
SSRDR3_1
8
H'FB1D
SSU_1
16
3
8
H'FB40
PORT
16
3
Port D realtime input data register PDRTIDR
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 480 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register Name
Number
Abbreviation of Bits Address* Module
Data Access
Width State
Timer control register_2
TCR_2
8
H'FDC0
TMR_2
8
2
Timer control register_3
TCR_3
8
H'FDC1
TMR_3
8
2
Timer control/status register_2
TCSR_2
8
H'FDC2
TMR_2
8
2
Timer control/status register_3
TCSR_3
8
H'FDC3
TMR_3
8
2
Timer constant register A_2
TCORA_2
8
H'FDC4
TMR_2
8
2
Timer constant register A_3
TCORA_3
8
H'FDC5
TMR_3
8
2
Timer constant register B_2
TCORB_2
8
H'FDC6
TMR_2
8
2
Timer constant register B_3
TCORB_3
8
H'FDC7
TMR_3
8
2
Timer counter_2
TCNT_2
8
H'FDC8
TMR_2
8
2
Timer counter_3
TCNT_3
8
H'FDC9
TMR_3
8
2
Standby control register
SBYCR
8
H'FDE4
SYSTEM 8
2
System control register
SYSCR
8
H'FDE5
SYSTEM 8
2
System clock control register
SCKCR
8
H'FDE6
SYSTEM 8
2
Mode control register
MDCR
8
H'FDE7
SYSTEM 8
2
Module stop control register A
MSTPCRA
8
H'FDE8
SYSTEM 8
2
Module stop control register B
MSTPCRB
8
H'FDE9
SYSTEM 8
2
Module stop control register C
MSTPCRC
8
H'FDEA
SYSTEM 8
2
Low-power control register
LPWRCR
8
H'FDEC
SYSTEM 8
2
Break address register A
BARA
32
H'FE00
PBC
32
2
Break address register B
BARB
32
H'FE04
PBC
32
2
Break control register A
BCRA
8
H'FE08
PBC
8
2
Break control register B
BCRB
8
H'FE09
PBC
8
2
IRQ sense control register H
ISCRH
8
H'FE12
INT
8
2
IRQ sense control register L
ISCRL
8
H'FE13
INT
8
2
IRQ enable register
IER
8
H'FE14
INT
8
2
IRQ status register
ISR
8
H'FE15
INT
8
2
DTC enable register A
DTCERA
8
H'FE16
DTC
8
2
DTC enable register B
DTCERB
8
H'FE17
DTC
8
2
DTC enable register C
DTCERC
8
H'FE18
DTC
8
2
DTC enable register D
DTCERD
8
H'FE19
DTC
8
2
DTC enable register E
DTCERE
8
H'FE1A
DTC
8
2
DTC enable register F
DTCERF
8
H'FE1B
DTC
8
2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 481 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register Name
Number
Abbreviation of Bits Address* Module
Data Access
Width State
DTC enable register G
DTCERG
8
H'FE1C
DTC
8
2
DTC vector register
DTVECR
8
H'FE1F
DTC
8
2
PPG output control register
PCR
8
H'FE26
PPG
8
2
PPG output mode register
PMR
8
H'FE27
PPG
8
2
Next data enable register H
NDERH
8
H'FE28
PPG
8
2
Next data enable register L
NDERL
8
H'FE29
PPG
8
2
Output data register H
PODRH
8
H'FE2A
PPG
8
2
Output data register L
PODRL
8
H'FE2B
PPG
8
2
Next data register H
NDRH
8
H'FE2C
PPG
8
2
Next data register L
NDRL
8
H'FE2D
PPG
8
2
Next data register H
NDRH
8
H'FE2E
PPG
8
2
Next data register L
NDRL
8
H'FE2F
PPG
8
2
Port 1 data direction register
P1DDR
8
H'FE30
PORT
8
2
Port 3 data direction register
P3DDR
8
H'FE32
PORT
8
2
Port 7 data direction register
P7DDR
8
H'FE36
PORT
8
2
Port A data direction register
PADDR
8
H'FE39
PORT
8
2
Port B data direction register
PBDDR
8
H'FE3A
PORT
8
2
Port C data direction register
PCDDR
8
H'FE3B
PORT
8
2
Port D data direction register
PDDDR
8
H'FE3C
PORT
8
2
Port F data direction register
PFDDR
8
H'FE3E
PORT
8
2
Port A pull-up MOS control register PAPCR
8
H'FE40
PORT
8
2
Port B pull-up MOS control register PBPCR
8
H'FE41
PORT
8
2
Port C pull-up MOS control register PCPCR
8
H'FE42
PORT
8
2
Port D pull-up MOS control register PDPCR
8
H'FE43
PORT
8
2
Port 3 open drain control register
P3ODR
8
H'FE46
PORT
8
2
Port A open drain control register
PAODR
8
H'FE47
PORT
8
2
Port B open drain control register
PBODR
8
H'FE48
PORT
8
2
Port C open drain control register
PCODR
8
H'FE49
PORT
8
2
Timer control register_3
TCR_3
8
H'FE80
TPU_3
16
2
Timer mode register_3
TMDR_3
8
H'FE81
TPU_3
16
2
Timer I/O control register H_3
TIORH_3
8
H'FE82
TPU_3
16
2
Timer I/O control register L_3
TIORL_3
8
H'FE83
TPU_3
16
2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 482 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register Name
Number
Abbreviation of Bits Address* Module
Data Access
Width State
Timer interrupt enable register_3
TIER_3
8
H'FE84
TPU_3
16
2
Timer status register_3
TSR_3
8
H'FE85
TPU_3
16
2
Timer counter H_3
TCNTH_3
8
H'FE86
TPU_3
16
2
Timer counter L_3
TCNTL_3
8
H'FE87
TPU_3
16
2
Timer general register AH_3
TGRAH_3
8
H'FE88
TPU_3
16
2
Timer general register AL_3
TGRAL_3
8
H'FE89
TPU_3
16
2
Timer general register BH_3
TGRBH_3
8
H'FE8A
TPU_3
16
2
Timer general register BL_3
TGRBL_3
8
H'FE8B
TPU_3
16
2
Timer general register CH_3
TGRCH_3
8
H'FE8C
TPU_3
16
2
Timer general register CL_3
TGRCL_3
8
H'FE8D
TPU_3
16
2
Timer general register DH_3
TGRDH_3
8
H'FE8E
TPU_3
16
2
Timer general register DL_3
TGRDL_3
8
H'FE8F
TPU_3
16
2
Timer control register_4
TCR_4
8
H'FE90
TPU_4
16
2
Timer mode register_4
TMDR_4
8
H'FE91
TPU_4
16
2
Timer I/O control register_4
TIOR_4
8
H'FE92
TPU_4
16
2
Timer interrupt enable register_4
TIER_4
8
H'FE94
TPU_4
16
2
Timer status register_4
TSR_4
8
H'FE95
TPU_4
16
2
Timer counter H_4
TCNTH_4
8
H'FE96
TPU_4
16
2
Timer counter L_4
TCNTL_4
8
H'FE97
TPU_4
16
2
Timer general register AH_4
TGRAH_4
8
H'FE98
TPU_4
16
2
Timer general register AL_4
TGRAL_4
8
H'FE99
TPU_4
16
2
Timer general register BH_4
TGRBH_4
8
H'FE9A
TPU_4
16
2
Timer general register BL_4
TGRBL_4
8
H'FE9B
TPU_4
16
2
Timer control register_5
TCR_5
8
H'FEA0
TPU_5
16
2
Timer mode register_5
TMDR_5
8
H'FEA1
TPU_5
16
2
Timer I/O control register_5
TIOR_5
8
H'FEA2
TPU_5
16
2
Timer interrupt enable register_5
TIER_5
8
H'FEA4
TPU_5
16
2
Timer status register_5
TSR_5
8
H'FEA5
TPU_5
16
2
Timer counter H_5
TCNTH_5
8
H'FEA6
TPU_5
16
2
Timer counter L_5
TCNTL_5
8
H'FEA7
TPU_5
16
2
Timer general register AH_5
TGRAH_5
8
H'FEA8
TPU_5
16
2
Timer general register AL_5
TGRAL_5
8
H'FEA9
TPU_5
16
2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 483 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register Name
Number
Abbreviation of Bits Address* Module
Data Access
Width State
Timer general register BH_5
TGRBH_5
8
H'FEAA
TPU_5
16
2
Timer general register BL_5
TGRBL_5
8
H'FEAB
TPU_5
16
2
Timer start register
TSTR
8
H'FEB0
TPU
16
common
2
Timer synchro register
TSYR
8
H'FEB1
TPU
16
common
2
Interrupt priority register A
IPRA
8
H'FEC0
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register B
IPRB
8
H'FEC1
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register C
IPRC
8
H'FEC2
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register D
IPRD
8
H'FEC3
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register E
IPRE
8
H'FEC4
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register F
IPRF
8
H'FEC5
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register G
IPRG
8
H'FEC6
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register H
IPRH
8
H'FEC7
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register J
IPRJ
8
H'FEC9
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register K
IPRK
8
H'FECA
INT
8
2
Interrupt priority register M
IPRM
8
H'FECC
INT
8
2
RAM emulation register
RAMER
8
H'FEDB
ROM
8
2
Port 1 data register
P1DR
8
H'FF00
PORT
8
2
Port 3 data register
P3DR
8
H'FF02
PORT
8
2
Port 7 data register
P7DR
8
H'FF06
PORT
8
2
Port A data register
PADR
8
H'FF09
PORT
8
2
Port B data register
PBDR
8
H'FF0A
PORT
8
2
Port C data register
PCDR
8
H'FF0B
PORT
8
2
Port D data register
PDDR
8
H'FF0C
PORT
8
2
Port F data register
PFDR
8
H'FF0E
PORT
8
2
Timer control register_0
TCR_0
8
H'FF10
TPU_0
16
2
Timer mode register_0
TMDR_0
8
H'FF11
TPU_0
16
2
Timer I/O control register H_0
TIORH_0
8
H'FF12
TPU_0
16
2
Timer I/O control register L_0
TIORL_0
8
H'FF13
TPU_0
16
2
Timer interrupt enable register_0
TIER_0
8
H'FF14
TPU_0
16
2
Timer status register_0
TSR_0
8
H'FF15
TPU_0
16
2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 484 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register Name
Number
Abbreviation of Bits Address* Module
Data Access
Width State
Timer counter H_0
TCNTH_0
8
H'FF16
TPU_0
16
2
Timer counter L_0
TCNTL_0
8
H'FF17
TPU_0
16
2
Timer general register AH_0
TGRAH_0
8
H'FF18
TPU_0
16
2
Timer general register AL_0
TGRAL_0
8
H'FF19
TPU_0
16
2
Timer general register BH_0
TGRBH_0
8
H'FF1A
TPU_0
16
2
Timer general register BL_0
TGRBL_0
8
H'FF1B
TPU_0
16
2
Timer general register CH_0
TGRCH_0
8
H'FF1C
TPU_0
16
2
Timer general register CL_0
TGRCL_0
8
H'FF1D
TPU_0
16
2
Timer general register DH_0
TGRDH_0
8
H'FF1E
TPU_0
16
2
Timer general register DL_0
TGRDL_0
8
H'FF1F
TPU_0
16
2
Timer control register_1
TCR_1
8
H'FF20
TPU_1
16
2
Timer mode register_1
TMDR_1
8
H'FF21
TPU_1
16
2
Timer I/O control register_1
TIOR_1
8
H'FF22
TPU_1
16
2
Timer interrupt enable register_1
TIER_1
8
H'FF24
TPU_1
16
2
Timer status register_1
TSR_1
8
H'FF25
TPU_1
16
2
Timer counter H_1
TCNTH_1
8
H'FF26
TPU_1
16
2
Timer counter L_1
TCNTL_1
8
H'FF27
TPU_1
16
2
Timer general register AH_1
TGRAH_1
8
H'FF28
TPU_1
16
2
Timer general register AL_1
TGRAL_1
8
H'FF29
TPU_1
16
2
Timer general register BH_1
TGRBH_1
8
H'FF2A
TPU_1
16
2
Timer general register BL_1
TGRBL_1
8
H'FF2B
TPU_1
16
2
Timer control register_2
TCR_2
8
H'FF30
TPU_2
16
2
Timer mode register_2
TMDR_2
8
H'FF31
TPU_2
16
2
Timer I/O control register_2
TIOR_2
8
H'FF32
TPU_2
16
2
Timer interrupt enable register_2
TIER_2
8
H'FF34
TPU_2
16
2
Timer status register_2
TSR_2
8
H'FF35
TPU_2
16
2
Timer counterH_2
TCNTH_2
8
H'FF36
TPU_2
16
2
Timer counter L_2
TCNTL_2
8
H'FF37
TPU_2
16
2
Timer general register AH_2
TGRAH_2
8
H'FF38
TPU_2
16
2
Timer general register AL_2
TGRAL_2
8
H'FF39
TPU_2
16
2
Timer general register BH_2
TGRBH_2
8
H'FF3A
TPU_2
16
2
Timer general register BL_2
TGRBL_2
8
H'FF3B
TPU_2
16
2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 485 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register Name
Number
Abbreviation of Bits Address* Module
Data Access
Width State
Timer control register_0
TCR_0
8
H'FF68
TMR_0
8
2
Timer control register_1
TCR_1
8
H'FF69
TMR_1
8
2
Timer control/status register_0
TCSR_0
8
H'FF6A
TMR_0
8
2
Timer control/status register_1
TCSR_1
8
H'FF6B
TMR_1
8
2
Time constant register A_0
TCORA_0
8
H'FF6C
TMR_0
8
2
Time constant register A_1
TCORA_1
8
H'FF6D
TMR_1
8
2
Time constant register B_0
TCORB_0
8
H'FF6E
TMR_0
8
2
Time constant register B_1
TCORB_1
8
H'FF6F
TMR_1
8
2
Timer counter_0
TCNT_0
8
H'FF70
TMR_0
8
2
Timer counter_1
TCNT_1
8
H'FF71
TMR_1
8
2
Timer control/status register_0
TCSR_0
8
H'FF74
WDT_0
16
2
Timer counter_0
TCNT_0
8
H'FF75
WDT_0
16
2
Reset control/status register
RSTCSR
8
H'FF77
WDT
16
2
Serial mode register_0
SMR_0
8
H'FF78
SCI_0
8
2
Bit rate register_0
BRR_0
8
H'FF79
SCI_0
8
2
Serial control register_0
SCR_0
8
H'FF7A
SCI_0
8
2
Transmit data register_0
TDR_0
8
H'FF7B
SCI_0
8
2
Serial status register_0
SSR_0
8
H'FF7C
SCI_0
8
2
Receive data register_0
RDR_0
8
H'FF7D
SCI_0
8
2
Smart card mode register_0
SCMR_0
8
H'FF7E
SCI_0
8
2
Serial mode register_2
SMR_2
8
H'FF88
SCI_2
8
2
Bit rate register_2
BRR_2
8
H'FF89
SCI_2
8
2
Serial control register_2
SCR_2
8
H'FF8A
SCI_2
8
2
Transmit data register_2
TDR_2
8
H'FF8B
SCI_2
8
2
Serial status register_2
SSR_2
8
H'FF8C
SCI_2
8
2
Receive data register_2
RDR_2
8
H'FF8D
SCI_2
8
2
Smart card mode register_2
SCMR_2
8
H'FF8E
SCI_2
8
2
A/D data register AH
ADDRAH
8
H'FF90
A/D
8
2
A/D data register AL
ADDRAL
8
H'FF91
A/D
8
2
A/D data register BH
ADDRBH
8
H'FF92
A/D
8
2
A/D data register BL
ADDRBL
8
H'FF93
A/D
8
2
A/D data register CH
ADDRCH
8
H'FF94
A/D
8
2
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 486 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register Name
Number
Abbreviation of Bits Address* Module
Data Access
Width State
A/D data register CL
ADDRCL
8
H'FF95
A/D
8
2
A/D data register DH
ADDRDH
8
H'FF96
A/D
8
2
A/D data register DL
ADDRDL
8
H'FF97
A/D
8
2
A/D control/status register
ADCSR
8
H'FF98
A/D
8
2
A/D control register
ADCR
8
H'FF99
A/D
8
2
Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR1
8
H'FFA8
ROM
8
2
Flash memory control register 2
FLMCR2
8
H'FFA9
ROM
8
2
Erase block register 1
EBR1
8
H'FFAA
ROM
8
2
Erase block register 2
EBR2
8
H'FFAB
ROM
8
2
Port 1 register
PORT1
8
H'FFB0
PORT
8
2
Port 3 register
PORT3
8
H'FFB2
PORT
8
2
Port 4 register
PORT4
8
H'FFB3
PORT
8
2
Port 7 register
PORT7
8
H'FFB6
PORT
8
2
Port 9 register
PORT9
8
H'FFB8
PORT
8
2
Port A register
PORTA
8
H'FFB9
PORT
8
2
Port B register
PORTB
8
H'FFBA
PORT
8
2
Port C register
PORTC
8
H'FFBB
PORT
8
2
Port D register
PORTD
8
H'FFBC
PORT
8
2
Port F register
PORTF
8
H'FFBE
PORT
8
2
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 487 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
21.2
Register Bits
The bit names of the registers in the on-chip peripheral modules are listed below. The 16-bit
register is indicated in two rows, 8 bits for each row.
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
SSU_0
SSCRH
_0
MSS
BIDE

SOL
SOLP
SCKS
CSS1
CSS0
SSCRL
_0


SRES



DATS1
DATS0
SSMR
_0
MLS
CPOS
CPHS


CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
SSER
_0
TE
RE


TEIE
TIE
RIE
CEIE
SSSR
_0

ORER


TEND
TDRE
RDRF
CE
SSTDR0
_0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSTDR1
_0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSTDR2
_0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSTDR3
_0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSRDR0 Bit 7
_0
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSRDR1 Bit 7
_0
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSRDR2 Bit 7
_0
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSRDR3 Bit 7
_0
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 488 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
SSU_1
SSCRH
_1
MSS
BIDE

SOL
SOLP
SCKS
CSS1
CSS0
SSCRL
_1


SRES



DATS1
DATS0
SSMR_1 MLS
CPOS
CPHS


CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
SSER_1
TE
RE


TEIE
TIE
RIE
CEIE
SSSR_1

ORER


TEND
TDRE
RDRF
CE
SSTDR0
_1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSTDR1
_1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSTDR2
_1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSTDR3
_1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSRDR0 Bit 7
_1
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSRDR1 Bit 7
_1
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSRDR2 Bit 7
_1
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSRDR3 Bit 7
_1
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
PDRTIDR Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
PORT
TCR_2
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
TCR_3
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
TMR_2,
TMR_3
TCSR_2
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
ADTE
OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
TCSR_3
CMFB
CMFA
OVF

OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
TCORA
_2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCORA
_3
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 489 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
TMR_2,
TMR_3
TCORB
_2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCORB
_3
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCNT_2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCNT_3
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SBYCR
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0




SYSCR
MACS

INTM1
INTM0
NMIEG


RAME
SCKCR
PSTOP



STCS
SCK2
SCK1
SCK0
MDCR





MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
MSTP
CRA
MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0
MSTP
CRB
MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4 MSTPB3 MSTPB2 MSTPB1 MSTPB0
MSTP
CRC
MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0
LPWR
CR






STC1
STC0
BARA








BAA23
BAA22
BAA21
BAA20
BAA19
BAA18
BAA17
BAA16
BAA15
BAA14
BAA13
BAA12
BAA11
BAA10
BAA9
BAA8
BAA7
BAA6
BAA5
BAA4
BAA3
BAA2
BAA1
BAA0








BAB23
BAB22
BAB21
BAB20
BAB19
BAB18
BAB17
BAB16
BAB15
BAB14
BAB13
BAB12
BAB11
BAB10
BAB9
BAB8
BAB7
BAB6
BAB5
BAB4
BAB3
BAB2
BAB1
BAB0
BCRA
CMFA
CDA
BAMRA2 BAMRA1 BAMRA0 CSELA1
CSELA0
BIEA
BCRB
CMFB
CDB
BAMRB2 BAMRB1 BAMRB0 CSELB1
CSELB0
BIEB
ISCRH




IRQ5SCB
IRQ5SCA
IRQ4SCB
IRQ4SCA
ISCRL
IRQ3SCB
IRQ3SCA
IRQ2SCB
IRQ2SCA
IRQ1SCB
IRQ1SCA
IRQ0SCB
IRQ0SCA
IER


IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
ISR


IRQ5F
IRQ4F
IRQ3F
IRQ2F
IRQ1F
IRQ0F
BARB
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 490 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
SYSTEM
PBC
INT
Section 21 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
DTCERA DTCEA7
DTCEA6
DTCEA5
DTCEA4
DTCEA3
DTCEA2
DTCEA1
DTCEA0
DTC
DTCERB DTCEB7
DTCEB6
DTCEB5
DTCEB4
DTCEB3
DTCEB2
DTCEB1
DTCEB0
DTCERC DTCEC7 DTCEC6 DTCEC5 DTCEC4 DTCEC3 DTCEC2 DTCEC1 DTCEC0
DTCERD DTCED7 DTCED6 DTCED5 DTCED4 DTCED3 DTCED2 DTCED1 DTCED0
DTCERE DTCEE7
DTCEE6
DTCEE5
DTCEE4
DTCEE3
DTCEE2
DTCEE1
DTCEE0
DTCERF DTCEF7
DTCEF6
DTCEF5
DTCEF4
DTCEF3
DTCEF2
DTCEF1
DTCEF0
DTCERG DTCEG7 DTCEG6 DTCEG5 DTCEG4 DTCEG3 DTCEG2 DTCEG1 DTCEG0
DTVECR SWDTE
DTVEC6
DTVEC5
DTVEC4
DTVEC3
DTVEC2
DTVEC1
DTVEC0
PCR
G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 PPG
PMR
G3INV
G2INV


G3NOV
G2NOV


NDERH
NDER15
NDER14
NDER13
NDER12
NDER11
NDER10
NDER9
NDER8
NDERL
NDER7
NDER6
NDER5
NDER4
NDER3
NDER2
NDER1
NDER0
PODRH
POD15
POD14
POD13
POD12
POD11
POD10
POD9
POD8
PODRL
POD7
POD6
POD5
POD4
POD3
POD2
POD1
POD0
NDRH
NDR15
NDR14
NDR13
NDR12
NDR11
NDR10
NDR9
NDR8
NDRL
NDR7
NDR6
NDR5
NDR4
NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
NDRH




NDR11
NDR10
NDR9
NDR8
NDRL




NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
P1DDR
P17DDR
P16DDR
P15DDR
P14DDR
P13DDR
P12DDR
P11DDR
P10DDR
P3DDR
P37DDR
P36DDR
P35DDR
P34DDR
P33DDR
P32DDR
P31DDR
P30DDR
P7DDR
P77DDR
P76DDR
P75DDR
P74DDR
P73DDR
P72DDR
P71DDR
P70DDR
PADDR




PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR
PBDDR
PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR
PCDDR
PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR
PDDDR
PD7DDR PD6DDR PD5DDR PD4DDR PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR
PFDDR
PF7DDR PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR PF2DDR PF1DDR PF0DDR
PAPCR

PBPCR
PB7PCR PB6PCR PB5PCR PB4PCR PB3PCR PB2PCR PB1PCR PB0PCR
PCPCR
PC7PCR PC6PCR PC5PCR PC4PCR PC3PCR PC2PCR PC1PCR PC0PCR
PDPCR
PD7PCR PD6PCR PD5PCR PD4PCR PD3PCR PD2PCR PD1PCR PD0PCR



PORT
PA3PCR PA2PCR PA1PCR PA0PCR
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 491 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
P3ODR
P37ODR P36ODR P35ODR P34ODR P33ODR P32ODR P31ODR P30ODR PORT
PAODR

PBODR
PB7ODR PB6ODR PB5ODR PB4ODR PB3ODR PB2ODR PB1ODR PB0ODR
PCODR
PC7ODR PC6ODR PC5ODR PC4ODR PC3ODR PC2ODR PC1ODR PC0ODR
TCR_3
CCLR2



PA3ODR PA2ODR PA1ODR PA0ODR
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
TMDR_3 

BFB
BFA
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
TIORH_3 IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
TIORL_3 IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
TIER_3
TTGE


TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
TSR_3



TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
TGFA
TCNTH_3 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TCNTL_3 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRAH_3 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRAL_3 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRBH_3 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRBL_3 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRCH_3 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRCL_3 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRDH_3 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRDL_3 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCR_4

CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
TMDR_4 



MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
TIOR_4
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
TIER_4
TTGE

TCIEU
TCIEV


TGIEB
TGIEA
TSR_4
TCFD

TCFU
TCFV


TGFB
TGFA
TCNTH_4 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TCNTL_4 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRAH_4 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRAL_4 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRBH_4 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRBL_4 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 492 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
TPU_3
TPU_4
Section 21 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
TPU_5
TMDR_5 



MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
TIOR_5
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
TIER_5
TTGE

TCIEU
TCIEV


TGIEB
TGIEA
TSR_5
TCFD
TCR_5


TCFU
TCFV


TGFB
TGFA
TCNTH_5 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TCNTL_5 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRAH_5 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRAL_5 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRBH_5 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRBL_5 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

CST5
CST4
CST3
CST2
CST1
CST0
TSTR

TSYR


SYNC5
SYNC4
SYNC3
SYNC2
SYNC1
SYNC0
IPRA

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRB

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRC

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRD

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRE

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRF

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRG

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRH

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRJ

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRK

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
IPRM

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
RAMER




RAMS
RAM2
RAM1
RAM0
FLASH
(F-ZTAT
Version)
P1DR
P17DR
P16DR
P15DR
P14DR
P13DR
P12DR
P11DR
P10DR
PORT
P3DR
P37DR
P36DR
P35DR
P34DR
P33DR
P32DR
P31DR
P30DR
P7DR
P77DR
P76DR
P75DR
P74DR
P73DR
P72DR
P71DR
P70DR
PADR




PA3DR
PA2DR
PA1DR
PA0DR
TPU
common
INT
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 493 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
PBDR
PB7DR
PB6DR
PB5DR
PB4DR
PB3DR
PB2DR
PB1DR
PB0DR
PORT
PCDR
PC7DR
PC6DR
PC5DR
PC4DR
PC3DR
PC2DR
PC1DR
PC0DR
PDDR
PD7DR
PD6DR
PD5DR
PD4DR
PD3DR
PD2DR
PD1DR
PD0DR
PFDR
PF7DR
PF6DR
PF5DR
PF4DR
PF3DR
PF2DR
PF1DR
PF0DR
TCR_0
CCLR2
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
TMDR_0 

BFB
BFA
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
TIORH_0 IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
TIORL_0 IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
TIER_0
TTGE


TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
TSR_0



TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
TGFA
TCNTH_0 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TCNTL_0 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRAH_0 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRAL_0 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRBH_0 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRBL_0 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRCH_0
Bit 15
TGRCL_0 Bit 7
TGRDH_0
Bit 15
TGRDL_0 Bit 7
TCR_1

CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
TMDR_1 



MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
TIOR_1
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
TIER_1
TTGE

TCIEU
TCIEV


TGIEB
TGIEA
TSR_1
TCFD

TCFU
TCFV


TGFB
TGFA
TCNTH_1 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TCNTL_1 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRAH_1 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRAL_1 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRBH_1 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRBL_1 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 494 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
TPU_0
TPU_1
Section 21 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
TPU_2
TMDR_2 



MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
TIOR_2
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
TIER_2
TTGE

TCIEU
TCIEV


TGIEB
TGIEA
TSR_2
TCFD

TCR_2

TCFU
TCFV


TGFB
TGFA
TCNTH_2 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TCNTL_2 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRAH_2 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRAL_2 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TGRBH_2 Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
TGRBL_2 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCR_0
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
CMIEB
TCR_1
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
TCSR_0
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
ADTE
OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
TCSR_1
CMFB
CMFA
OVF

OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
TCORA_0 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCORA_1 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCORB_0 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCORB_1 Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCNT_0
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 7
TCNT_1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCSR_0
OVF
WT/IT
TME


CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
TCNT_0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
RSTCSR WOVF
RSTE
RSTS





SMR_0*
1
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
(SMR_0*2) (GM)
(BLK)
(PE)
(O/E)
(BCP1)
(BCP0)
(CKS1)
(CKS0)
BRR_0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCR_0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
TDR_0
SSR_0*
1
C/A
TMR_0,
TMR_1
WDT_0
SCI_0
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 495 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
(SSR_0* )
(TDRE)
(RDRF)
(ORER)
(ERS)
(PER)
(TEND)
(MPB)
(MPBT)
SCI_0
RDR_0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCMR_0 



SDIR
SINV

SMIF
1
SMR_2* C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
2
(SMR_2*2) (GM)
(BLK)
(PE)
(O/E)
(BCP1)
(BCP0)
(CKS1)
(CKS0)
BRR_2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCR_2
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SSR_2*
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
(SSR_2*2)
(TDRE)
(RDRF)
(ORER)
(ERS)
(PER)
(TEND)
(MPB)
(MPBT)
RDR_2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0



SDIR
SINV

SMIF
ADDRAH AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
ADDRAL AD1
AD0






ADDRBH AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
ADDRBL AD1
AD0






ADDRCH AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
ADDRCL AD1
AD0






ADDRDH AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
ADDRDL AD1
AD0






TDR_2
1
SCMR_2 
ADCSR
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
ADCR
TRGS1
TRGS0


CKS1
CKS0


FLMCR1 FWE
SWE
ESU1
PSU1
EV1
PV1
E1
P1
FLMCR2 FLER







EBR1
EB7
EB6
EB5
EB4
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
EBR2






EB9
EB8
PORT1
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
PORT3
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
PORT4
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
PORT7
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
PORT9
P97
P96
P95
P94
P93
P92
P91
P90
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 496 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
SCI_2
A/D
FLASH
(F-ZTAT
Version)
PORT
Section 21 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
PORT
PORTA




PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
PORTB
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
PORTC
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
PORTD
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
PORTF
PF7
PF6
PF5
PF4
PF3
PF2
PF1
PF0
Notes: 1. Normal serial communication interface mode.
2. Smart Card interface mode.
Some bit functions of SMR differ in normal serial communication interface mode and
Smart Card interface mode.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 497 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
21.3
Register States in Each Operating Mode
Register
Abbreviation Reset
High
Speed
Medium
Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby Module
SSCRH_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSCRL_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSMR_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSER_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSSR_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSTDR0_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSTDR1_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSTDR2_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSTDR3_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSRDR0_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSRDR1_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSRDR2_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSRDR3_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSCRH_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSCRL_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSMR_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSER_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSSR_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSTDR0_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSTDR1_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSTDR2_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSTDR3_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSRDR0_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSRDR1_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSRDR2_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSRDR3_1
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
PDRTIDR
Initialized





Initialized
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 498 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
SSU_0
SSU_1
SSU_1
PORT
Section 21 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Reset
High
Speed
Medium
Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby Module
TCR_2
Initialized





Initialized
TCR_3
Initialized





Initialized
TCSR_2
Initialized





Initialized
TCSR_3
Initialized





Initialized
TCORA_2
Initialized





Initialized
TCORA_3
Initialized





Initialized
TCORB_2
Initialized





Initialized
TCORB_3
Initialized





Initialized
TCNT_2
Initialized





Initialized
TCNT_3
Initialized





Initialized
SBYCR
Initialized






SYSCR
Initialized






SCKCR
Initialized






MDCR
Initialized






MSTPCRA
Initialized






MSTPCRB
Initialized






MSTPCRC
Initialized






LPWRCR
Initialized






BARA
Initialized





Initialized
BARB
Initialized





Initialized
BCRA
Initialized





Initialized
BCRB
Initialized





Initialized
ISCRH
Initialized





Initialized
ISCRL
Initialized





Initialized
IER
Initialized





Initialized
ISR
Initialized





Initialized
TMR_2,
TMR_3
SYSTEM
PBC
INT
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 499 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Reset
High
Speed
Medium
Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby Module
DTCERA
Initialized





Initialized
DTCERB
Initialized





Initialized
DTCERC
Initialized





Initialized
DTCERD
Initialized





Initialized
DTCERE
Initialized





Initialized
DTCERF
Initialized





Initialized
DTCERG
Initialized





Initialized
DTVECR
Initialized





Initialized
PCR
Initialized





Initialized
PMR
Initialized





Initialized
NDERH
Initialized





Initialized
NDERL
Initialized





Initialized
PODRH
Initialized





Initialized
PODRL
Initialized





Initialized
NDRH
Initialized





Initialized
NDRL
Initialized





Initialized
NDRH
Initialized





Initialized
NDRL
Initialized





Initialized
P1DDR
Initialized






P3DDR
Initialized






P7DDR
Initialized






PADDR
Initialized






PBDDR
Initialized






PCDDR
Initialized






PDDDR
Initialized






PFDDR
Initialized






PAPCR
Initialized






PBPCR
Initialized






PCPCR
Initialized






PDPCR
Initialized






Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 500 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
DTC
PPG
PORT
Section 21 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Reset
High
Speed
Medium
Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby Module
P3ODR
Initialized






PAODR
Initialized






PBODR
Initialized






PCODR
Initialized






TCR_3
Initialized





Initialized
TMDR_3
Initialized





Initialized
TIORH_3
Initialized





Initialized
TIORL_3
Initialized





Initialized
TIER_3
Initialized





Initialized
TSR_3
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTH_3
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTL_3
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAH_3
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAL_3
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBH_3
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBL_3
Initialized





Initialized
TGRCH_3
Initialized





Initialized
TGRCL_3
Initialized





Initialized
TGRDH_3
Initialized





Initialized
TGRDL_3
Initialized





Initialized
TCR_4
Initialized





Initialized
TMDR_4
Initialized





Initialized
TIOR_4
Initialized





Initialized
TIER_4
Initialized





Initialized
TSR_4
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTH_4
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTL_4
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAH_4
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAL_4
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBH_3
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBL_4
Initialized





Initialized
PORT
TPU_3
TPU_4
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 501 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Reset
High
Speed
Medium
Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby Module
TCR_5
Initialized





Initialized
TMDR_5
Initialized





Initialized
TIOR_5
Initialized





Initialized
TIER_5
Initialized





Initialized
TSR_5
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTH_5
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTL_5
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAH_5
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAL_5
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBH_5
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBL_5
Initialized





Initialized
TSTR
Initialized





Initialized
TSYR
Initialized





Initialized
IPRA
Initialized





Initialized
IPRB
Initialized





Initialized
IPRC
Initialized





Initialized
IPRD
Initialized





Initialized
IPRE
Initialized





Initialized
IPRF
Initialized





Initialized
IPRG
Initialized





Initialized
IPRH
Initialized





Initialized
IPRJ
Initialized





Initialized
IPRK
Initialized





Initialized
IPRM
Initialized





Initialized
RAMER
Initialized





Initialized
ROM
P1DR
Initialized






PORT
P3DR
Initialized






P7DR
Initialized






PADR
Initialized






PBDR
Initialized






Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 502 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
TPU_5
TPU
common
INT
Section 21 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Reset
High
Speed
Medium
Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby Module
PCDR
Initialized






PDDR
Initialized






PFDR
Initialized






TCR_0
Initialized





Initialized
TMDR_0
Initialized





Initialized
TIORH_0
Initialized





Initialized
TIORL_0
Initialized





Initialized
TIER_0
Initialized





Initialized
TSR_0
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTH_0
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTL_0
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAH_0
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAL_0
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBH_0
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBL_0
Initialized





Initialized
TGRCH_0
Initialized





Initialized
TGRCL_0
Initialized





Initialized
TGRDH_0
Initialized





Initialized
TGRDL_0
Initialized





Initialized
TCR_1
Initialized





Initialized
TMDR_1
Initialized





Initialized
TIOR_1
Initialized





Initialized
TIER_1
Initialized





Initialized
TSR_1
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTH_1
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTL_1
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAH_1
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAL_1
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBH_1
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBL_1
Initialized





Initialized
PORT
TPU_0
TPU_1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 503 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Reset
High
Speed
Medium
Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby Module
TCR_2
Initialized





Initialized
TMDR_2
Initialized





Initialized
TIOR_2
Initialized





Initialized
TIER_2
Initialized





Initialized
TSR_2
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTH_2
Initialized





Initialized
TCNTL_2
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAH_2
Initialized





Initialized
TGRAL_2
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBH_2
Initialized





Initialized
TGRBL_2
Initialized





Initialized
TCR_0
Initialized





Initialized
TCR_1
Initialized





Initialized
TCSR_0
Initialized





Initialized
TCSR_1
Initialized





Initialized
TCORA_0
Initialized





Initialized
TCORA_1
Initialized





Initialized
TCORB_0
Initialized





Initialized
TCORB_1
Initialized





Initialized
TCNT_0
Initialized





Initialized
TCNT_1
Initialized





Initialized
TCSR_0
Initialized





Initialized
TCNT_0
Initialized





Initialized
RSTCSR
Initialized





Initialized
SMR_0
Initialized





Initialized
BRR_0
Initialized





Initialized
SCR_0
Initialized





Initialized
TDR_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSR_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
RDR_0
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SCMR_0
Initialized





Initialized
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 504 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
TPU_2
TMR_0,
TMR_1
WDT_0
SCI_0
Section 21 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Reset
High
Speed
Medium
Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Software
Standby
Hardware
Standby Module
SMR_2
Initialized





Initialized
BRR_2
Initialized





Initialized
SCR_2
Initialized





Initialized
TDR_2
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SSR_2
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
RDR_2
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
SCMR_2
Initialized





Initialized
ADDRAH
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
ADDRAL
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
ADDRBH
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
ADDRBL
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
ADDRCH
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
ADDRCL
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
ADDRDH
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
ADDRDL
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
ADCSR
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
ADCR
Initialized



Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
FLMCR1
Initialized





Initialized
FLMCR2
Initialized





Initialized
EBR1
Initialized





Initialized
EBR2
Initialized





Initialized
PORT1
Initialized






PORT3
Initialized






PORT4
Initialized






PORT7
Initialized






PORT9
Initialized






PORTA
Initialized






PORTB
Initialized






PORTC
Initialized






PORTD
Initialized






PORTF
Initialized






SCI_2
A/D
ROM
PORT
Note:  is not initialized.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 505 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 21 List of Registers
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 506 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
22.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 22.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
Value
Power supply voltage
VCC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Input voltage (XTAL, EXTAL)
Vin
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
Input voltage (ports 4 and 9)
Vin
–0.3 to AVCC +0.3
V
Input voltage (except XTAL,
EXTAL, ports 4 and 9)
Vin
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
Analog power supply voltage
AVCC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Analog input voltage
VAN
–0.3 to AVCC +0.3
V
Operating temperature
Topr
Storage temperature
Tstg
Unit
Regular specifications: –20 to +75
°C
Wide-range specifications: –40 to +85
°C
–55 to +125
°C
Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum rating are exceeded.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 507 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
22.2
DC Characteristics
Table 22.2 lists the DC characteristics. Table 22.3 lists the permissible output currents.
Table 22.2 DC Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)*1
Item
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VCC × 0.2


V


VCC × 0.7
V
VCC × 0.05


V
RES, STBY, VIH
NMI,
MD2 to MD0,
FWE
VCC × 0.9

VCC + 0.3
V
EXTAL
VCC × 0.7

VCC + 0.3
V
Ports 7, 3, 1,
A to D, F
VCC × 0.7

VCC + 0.3
V
Ports 9, 4
AVCC × 0.7 
RES, STBY, VIL
NMI,
MD2 to MD0,
FWE
–0.3

VCC × 0.1
V
EXTAL
–0.3

VCC × 0.2
V
Ports 7, 3, 1,
A to D, F
–0.3

VCC × 0.2
V
Ports 9, 4
–0.3

AVCC × 0.2 V
Output high
voltage
All output pins VOH
VCC – 0.5


V
VCC – 1.0


V
IOH = –1 mA
Output low
voltage
All output pins VOL


0.4
V
IOL = 1.6 mA
Schmitt
trigger input
voltage
Symbol
IRQ5 to IRQ0 VT
–
VT
+
+
VT – VT
Input high
voltage
Input low
voltage
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 508 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
–
AVCC + 0.3 V
IOH = –200 µA
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Symbol
Typ
Max
Unit


1.0
µA


1.0
µA


1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 to
AVCC – 0.5 V
–IP
30

300
µA
Vin = 0 V
Cin
Input leakage RES
| Iin |
current
STBY, NMI,
MD2 to MD0,
FWE
Ports 9, 4
Input pull-up Ports A to D
MOS current
Input
capacitance
Supply
current*2
RES
Test
Conditions
Min
Vin = 0.5 to
VCC – 0.5 V


30
pF
Vin = 0 V
NMI


30
pF
f = 1 MHz
All input pins
except RES
and NMI


15
pF
Ta = 25°C

80
90
mA
VCC = 5.0 V VCC = 5.5 V
f = 20MHz
Sleep mode

60
70
mA
VCC = 5.0 V VCC = 5.5 V
f = 20MHz
All modules
stopped

55

mA
f = 20 MHz,
VCC = 5.0 V
(reference
values)
Mediumspeed mode
(φ/32)

65

mA
f = 20 MHz,
VCC = 5.0 V
(reference
values)
Standby
mode

2.0
5.0
µA
Ta ≤ 50°C


200
µA
50°C < Ta
1.0
2.0
mA
AVCC = 5.0 V
Normal
operation
ICC*3
Analog
During A/D
power supply conversion
current
Idle
AlCC



5.0
µA
Reference
During A/D
power supply conversion
current
Idle
AlCC

1.0
2.0
mA


5.0
µA
RAM standby voltage
VRAM
2.0


V
Vref = 5.0 V
Notes: 1. If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, Vref, and AVSS pins open. Apply a
voltage between 4.5 V and 5.5 V to the AVCC pin by connecting them to VCC, for
instance.
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 509 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
2. Supply current values are for VIH = VCC (EXTAL), AVCC (ports 4 and 9), or VCC (other), and
VIL = 0 V, with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up MOS transistors in the
off state.
3. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows:
ICC (max) = 27 + 0.435 × VCC × f (normal operation)
ICC (max) = 27 + 0.3 × VCC × f (sleep mode)
Table 22.3 Permissible Output Currents
Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)*
Item
Symbol Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Permissible output
low current (per pin)
All output
pins
VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V
IOL


10
mA
Permissible output
low current (total)
Total of all
output pins
VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V
∑ IOL


100
mA
Permissible output
All output
high current (per pin) pins
VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V
–IOH


2.0
mA
Permissible output
high current (total)
VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V
∑ –IOH


30
mA
Total of all
output pins
Note: * To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 22.3.
22.3
AC Characteristics
Figure 22.1 shows the test conditions for the AC characteristics.
5V
RL
LSI output pin
C
RH
C=30 pF
RL= 2.4 kΩ
RH=12 kΩ
Input/output timing measurement levels
• Low level : 0.8 V
• High level : 2.0 V
Figure 22.1 Output Load Circuit
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 510 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
22.3.1
Clock Timing
Table 22.4 lists the clock timing
Table 22.4 Clock Timing
Conditions : VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V,
φ = 4 MHz to 20 MHz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Clock cycle time
tcyc
50
250
ns
Figure 22.2
Clock high pulse width
tCH
12

ns
Clock low pulse width
tCL
12

ns
Clock rise time
tCr

13
ns
Clock fall time
tCf

13
ns
Oscillation settling time at reset
(crystal)
tOSC1
20

ms
Figure 22.3
Oscillation settling time in
software standby (crystal)
tOSC2
8

ms
Figure 20.3
External clock output settling
delay time
tDEXT
2

ms
Figure 22.3
tcyc
tCH
tCf
φ
tCL
tCr
Figure 22.2 System Clock Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 511 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
EXTAL
tDEXT
tDEXT
VCC
STBY
tOSC1
tOSC1
RES
φ
Figure 22.3 Oscillation Settling Timing
22.3.2
Control Signal Timing
Table 22.5 lists the control signal timing.
Table 22.5 Control Signal Timing
Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V,
φ = 4 MHz to 20 MHz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
RES setup time
tRESS
200

ns
Figure 22.4
RES pulse width
tRESW
20

tcyc
NMI setup time
tNMIS
150

ns
NMI hold time
tNMIH
10

ns
NMI pulse width (exiting
software standby mode)
tNMIW
200

ns
IRQ setup time
tIRQS
150

ns
IRQ hold time
tIRQH
10

ns
IRQ pulse width (exiting
software standby mode)
tIRQW
200

ns
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 512 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Figure 22.5
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
φ
tRESS
tRESS
RES
tRESW
Figure 22.4 Reset Input Timing
φ
tNMIS
tNMIH
NMI
tNMIW
IRQi
(i = 5 to 0)
tIRQW
tIRQS
tIRQH
IRQ
Edge input
tIRQS
IRQ
Level input
Figure 22.5 Interrupt Input Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 513 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
22.3.3
Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules
Table 22.6 lists the timing of on-chip peripheral modules.
Table 22.6 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules
Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0,
φ = 4 MHz to 20 Hz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
Output data delay time
tPWD

50
ns
Figure 22.6
Input data setup time
tPRS
30

Input data hold time
tPRH
30

Realtime input port data
hold time
tRTIPH
4

tcyc
Figure 22.7
Timer output delay time
tTOCD

50
ns
Figure 22.8
Timer input setup time
tTICS
30

Timer clock input setup
time
tTCKS
30

ns
Figure 22.9
Timer clock
pulse width
Single edge
tTCKWH
1.5

tcyc
Both edges
tTCKWL
2.5

Input clock
cycle
Asynchronous
tScyc
4

6

Item
I/O port
TPU
SCI
Synchronous
tcyc
Input clock pulse width
tSCKW
0.4
0.6
tScyc
Input clock rise time
tSCKr

1.5
tcyc
Input clock fall time
tSCKf

1.5
Transmit data delay time
tTXD

40
Receive data setup time
(synchronous)
tRXS
50

Receive data hold time
(synchronous)
tRXH
50

Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 514 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
ns
Figure 22.10
Figure 22.11
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
A/D
Trigger input setup time
converter
tTRGS
30

ns
Figure 22.12
PPG
Pulse output delay time
tPOD

50
ns
Figure 22.13
TMR
Timer output delay time
tTMOD

50
ns
Figure 22.14
Timer reset input setup
time
tTMRS
30

ns
Figure 22.16
Timer clock input setup
time
tTMCS
30

ns
Figure 22.15
Timer clock
pulse width
Single edge
tTMCWH
1.5

tCYC
Both edges
tTMCWL
2.5

Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 515 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
Table 22.7 Timing of SSU
Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 , φ = 4 MHz to 20 MHz,
Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
SSU
Clock cycle
Master
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
tSUCYC
2
256
tCYC
4
256
30

Figure 22.17
Figure 22.18
Figure 22.19
Figure 22.20
80

30

80

Slave
Clock high
level pulse
width
Master
Clock low
level pulse
width
Master
tHI
Slave
tLO
Slave
ns
ns
Clock rise time
tRISE

20
ns
Clock fall time
tFALL

20
ns
tSU
30

ns
30

10

10

1.5

1.5

Data input
setup time
Master
Data input
hold time
Master
SCS setup
time
Master
Slave
tH
Slave
tLEAD
Slave
SCS hold time Master
tLAG
Slave
Data output
delay time
Master
Data output
hold time
Master
tOD
Slave
tOH
Slave
1.5

1.5


40

40
30

30

1.5

1.5

ns
tCYC
tCYC
ns
ns
Continuous
Master
transmit delay Slave
time
tTD
Slave access time
tSA

1
tCYC
Slave out release time
tREL

1
tCYC
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 516 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
tCYC
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
T2
T1
φ
tPRS
tPRH
Ports 9, 7, 4, 3, 1,
A to D, F (read)
tPWD
Ports 7, 3, 1, A to D, F
(write)
Figure 22.6 I/O Port Input/Output Timing
φ
IRQ3
tRTIPH
Port D input
Figure 22.7 Realtime Input Port Data Input Timing
φ
tTOCD
Output compare
output*
tTICS
Input capture
input*
Note: * TIOCA5 to TIOCA0, TIOCB5 to TIOCB0, TIOCC3, TIOCC0, TIOCD3, TIOCD0
Figure 22.8 TPU Input/Output Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 517 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
φ
tTCKS
tTCKS
TCLKA to TCLKD
tTCKWL
tTCKWH
Figure 22.9 TPU Clock Input Timing
tSCKW
tSCKr
tSCKf
SCK2, SCK0
tScyc
Figure 22.10 SCK Clock Input Timing
SCK2, SCK0
tTXD
TxD2, TxD0
(transmit data)
tRXS
tRXH
RxD2, RxD0
(receive data)
Figure 22.11 SCI Input/Output Timing (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
φ
tTRGS
ADTRG
Figure 22.12 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 518 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
φ
tPOD
PO15 to 8
Figure 22.13 PPG Output Timing
φ
tTMOD
TMO3, TMO2
TMO1, TMO0
Figure 22.14 8-Bit Timer Output Timing
φ
tTMCS
tTMCS
TMCI23, TMCI01
tTMCWL
tTMCWH
Figure 22.15 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 519 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
φ
tTMRS
TMRI23, TMRI01
Figure 22.16 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing
SCS (output)
tTD
tLEAD
tHI
tFALL
tRISE
SSCK (output)
CPOS = 1
tLO
tHI
SSCK (output)
CPOS = 0
tSUCYC
tLO
SSO (output)
tOH
tOD
SSI (input)
tSU
tH
Figure 22.17 SSU Timing (Master, CPHS = 1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 520 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
tLAG
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
SCS (output)
tTD
tLEAD
tHI
tFALL
tRISE
tLAG
SSCK (output)
CPOS = 1
tLO
tHI
SSCK (output)
CPOS = 0
tSUCYC
tLO
SSO (output)
tOD
tOH
SSI (input)
tH
tSU
Figure 22.18 SSU Timing (Master, CPHS = 0)
SCS (input)
tLEAD
tHI
tFALL
tRISE
tLAG
tTD
SSCK (input)
CPOS = 1
tLO
tHI
SSCK (input)
CPOS = 0
tSUCYC
tLO
SSO (input)
tSU
tH
tREL
SSI (output)
tSA
tOH
tOD
Figure 22.19 SSU Timing (Slave, CPHS = 1)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 521 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
SCS (input)
tLEAD
tHI
tFALL
tRISE
tLAG
tTD
SSCK (input)
CPOS = 1
tLO
tHI
SSCK (input)
CPOS = 0
tSUCYC
tLO
SSO (input)
tSU
tH
tREL
SSI (output)
tSA
tOH
tOD
Figure 22.20 SSU Timing (Slave, CPHS = 0)
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 522 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
22.4
A/D Conversion Characteristics
Table 22.8 lists the A/D conversion characteristics.
Table 22.8 A/D Conversion Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0V,
φ = 4 MHz to 20 MHz, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Resolution
10
10
10
bits
Conversion time
10

200
µs
Analog input capacitance


20
pF
Permissible signal-source impedance


5
kΩ
Nonlinearity error


±3.5
LSB
Offset error


±3.5
LSB
Full-scale error


±3.5
LSB
Quantization

±0.5

LSB
Absolute accuracy


±4.0
LSB
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 523 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
22.5
Flash Memory Characteristics
Table 22.9 lists the flash memory characteristics.
Table 22.9 Flash Memory Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
VSS = PLLVSS = AVSS = 0 V,
Ta = 0 to +75°C (Programming/erasing operating temperature range)
Item
Symbol Min
1 2 4
Programming time* * *
tP
Erase time* * *
tE

100
1200
ms/block
Reprogramming count
NWEC


100
Times
1

µs
1 3 5
Programming
Max
Unit
10
200
ms/
128 bytes
Test Condition
Wait time after SWE bit setting*
1
Wait time after PSU1 bit setting*
tsswe
1
tspsu
50
50

µs
Wait time after P1 bit setting* *
tsp30
28
30
32
µs
Programming
time wait
tsp200
198
200
202
µs
Programming
time wait
tsp10
8
10
12
µs
Additionalprogramming
time wait
1
1 4
tcp
5
5

µs
1
Wait time after PSU1 bit clear*
tcpsu
5
5

µs
Wait time after PV1 bit setting*
tspv
4
4

µs
tspvr
2
2

µs
Wait time after P1 bit clear*
1
1
Wait time after H'FF dummy write*
1
Wait time after PV1 bit clear*
1
tcpv
2
2

µs
Wait time after SWE bit clear*
1 4
Maximum programming count* *
tcswe
100
100

µs
N


1000
Times
Wait time after SWE bit setting*
1
Wait time after ESU1 bit setting*
tsswe
1
1

µs
tsesu
100
100

µs
Wait time after E1 bit setting* *
1
Wait time after E1 bit clear*
tse
10
10
100
ms
tce
10
10

µs
Wait time after ESU1 bit clear*
1
Wait time after EV1 bit setting*
tcesu
10
10

µs
1
Erase

Typ
1
1 5
1
Wait time after H'FF dummy write*
1
Wait time after EV1 bit clear*
Wait time after SWE bit clear*
1 5
Maximum erase count* *
1
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 524 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
1
tsev
20
20

µs
tsevr
2
2

µs
tcev
4
4

µs
tcswe
100
100

µs
N
12

120
Times
Erase time wait
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
Notes: 1. Make each time setting in accordance with the program/program-verify flowchart or
erase/erase-verify flowchart.
2. Programming time per 128 bytes (shows the total period for which the P1 bit in the flash
memory control register (FLMCR1) is set. It does not include the programming
verification time.)
3. Block erase time (shows the total period for which the E1-bit FLMCR1 is set. It does not
include the erase verification time.)
4. To specify the maximum programming time value (tp (max)) in the 128-bytes
programming algorithm, set the max. value (1000) for the maximum programming
count (n).
The wait time after P1 bit setting should be changed as follows according to the value of
the programming counter (n).
Programming counter (n) = 1 to 6:
tsp30 = 30 µs
Programming counter (n) = 7 to 1000: tsp200 = 200 µs
[In additional programming]
Programming counter (n) = 1 to 6:
tsp10 = 10 µs
5. For the maximum erase time (tE (max)), the following relationship applies between the
wait time after E1 bit setting (tse) and the maximum erase count (N):
tE (max) = Wait time after E1 bit setting (tse) × maximum erase count (N)
To set the maximum erase time, the values of (tse) and (N) should be set so as to satisfy
the above formula.
Examples: When tse = 100 ms, N = 12 times
When tse = 10 ms, N = 120 times
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 525 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Section 22 Electrical Characteristics
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 526 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Appendix
Appendix
A.
I/O Port States in Each Pin State
Port Name
MCU
Operating
Mode
Reset
Hardware
Standby
Mode
Software
Standby Mode
Program Execution
State Sleep Mode
Port 1
7
T
T
Keep
I/O port
Port 3
7
T
T
Keep
I/O port
Port 4
7
T
T
T
Input port
Port 7
7
T
T
Keep
I/O port
Port 9
7
T
T
T
Input port
Port A
7
T
T
Keep
I/O port
Port B
7
T
T
Keep
I/O port
Port C
7
T
T
Keep
I/O port
Port D
7
T
T
Keep
I/O port
PF7
7
T
T
[DDR = 0]
[DDR = 0]
T
T
[DDR = 1]
[DDR = 1]
H
Clock output
Keep
I/O port
PF6
7
T
T
PF5
PF4
PF3
PF2
PF1
PF0
[Legend]
H:
High level
T:
High impedance
Keep: Input port becomes high-impedance, output port retains state
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 527 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Appendix
B.
Product Code Lineup
Product Type
H8S/2604
group
Product Code
F-ZTAT version HD64F2604
Mark Code
HD64F2604FA20
(Normal spec)
HD64F2604FA20W
(Wide Temperature
Range spec)
HD64F2604FA20V
(Normal spec)
HD64F2604FA20WV
(Wide Temperature
Range spec)
Masked ROM
version
HD6432604
HD6432604(***)FA
(Normal spec)
HD6432604(***)FAW
(Wide Temperature
Range spec)
HD6432604(***)FAV
(Normal spec)
HD6432604(***)FAWV
(Wide Temperature
Range spec)
HD6432603
HD6432603(***)FA
(Normal spec)
HD6432603(***)FAW
(Wide Temperature
Range spec)
HD6432603(***)FAV
(Normal spec)
HD6432603(***)FAWV
(Wide Temperature
Range spec)
[Legend]
(***): ROM code
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 528 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Package (Renesas
Package Code)
100-pin QFP
PRQP0100KB-A
(FP-100M/FP-100MV)
Appendix
C.
Package Dimensions
JEITA Package Code
P-QFP100-14x14-0.50
RENESAS Code
PRQP0100KB-A
Previous Code
FP-100M/FP-100MV
MASS[Typ.]
1.2g
NOTE)
1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2"
DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH
2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT
INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET.
HD
*1
D
75
51
76
50
bp
Reference
Symbol
Nom
Max
14
D
c
c1
HE
Dimension in Millimeters
Min
E
14
A2
2.70
*2
E
b1
ZE
Terminal cross section
1
25
16.0
15.8
16.0
A1
0.00
bp
0.17
A1
θ
L
L1
Detail F
*3
y
bp
x
M
θ
0.12
0.12
0.25
0.22
0.27
0.17
0°
8°
0.5
0.08
x
0.10
y
ZD
1.0
ZE
1.0
L
0.22
0.15
e
L1
16.2
0.20
c1
c
A
A2
c
F
16.2
3.05
b1
ZD
e
15.8
HE
A
26
100
HD
0.4
0.5
0.6
1.0
Figure C.1 Dimensions
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 529 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Appendix
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 530 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Index
Numerics
C
16-bit count mode................................... 269
16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) ................. 167
8-bit timers.............................................. 253
Cascaded connection............................... 269
Cascaded operation ................................. 217
Chain transfer.................................. 115, 121
Clock pulse generator ............................. 453
CMIA ...................................................... 270
CMIB ...................................................... 270
Compare-match count mode ................... 269
Condition field .......................................... 37
Condition-code register (CCR) ................. 22
Conversion time ...................................... 417
CPU operating modes ............................... 14
A
A/D converter ......................................... 409
A/D converter activation......................... 235
A/D trigger input .................................... 164
Absolute address....................................... 40
Activation by software............................ 119
Address map ............................................. 51
Address space ........................................... 18
Addressing modes..................................... 38
ADI ......................................................... 419
Advanced mode ........................................ 15
Arithmetic operations instructions............ 30
Asynchronous mode ............................... 334
B
Bcc...................................................... 27, 35
Bit manipulation instructions.................... 33
Bit rate .................................................... 327
Block data transfer instructions ................ 37
Block transfer mode................................ 113
Boot mode .............................................. 440
Branch instructions ................................... 35
Break....................................................... 375
Break address...................................... 87, 90
Break conditions ....................................... 90
Buffer operation...................................... 212
Bus arbitration .......................................... 98
Bus cycle .................................................. 95
Bus masters............................................... 98
D
Data direction register............................. 125
Data register............................................ 125
Data transfer controller ............................. 99
Data transfer instructions .......................... 29
DTC vector table..................................... 107
E
Effective address................................. 38, 42
Effective address extension....................... 37
Emulation................................................ 444
Erase/erase-verify ................................... 448
Erasing units ........................................... 434
Exception handling ................................... 53
Extended control register (EXR)............... 21
External trigger ....................................... 419
F
Flash memory ......................................... 429
Framing error .......................................... 341
Free-running count operation.................. 206
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 531 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
G
O
General registers ....................................... 20
On-board programming .......................... 439
Open-drain control register ..................... 125
Operating mode selection ......................... 47
Operation field .......................................... 37
Output trigger.......................................... 284
Overrun error .......................................... 341
OVI ......................................................... 270
I
Immediate ................................................. 41
Input capture........................................... 209
Input pull-up MOS ................................. 125
Instruction set ........................................... 27
Interrupt control modes ............................ 76
Interrupt controller.................................... 63
Interrupt exception handling
vector table ............................................... 72
Interrupt mask bit ..................................... 22
Interrupt mask level .................................. 21
Interrupt priority register (IPR) ................ 63
Interrupts .................................................. 59
Interval timer mode ................................ 304
L
Logic operations instructions.................... 32
M
MAC instruction....................................... 49
Mark state ............................................... 375
Memory cycle........................................... 95
Memory indirect ....................................... 41
Multiply-accumulate register (MAC) ....... 23
P
Parity error .............................................. 341
PC break controller ................................... 87
Periodic count operation ......................... 206
Phase counting mode .............................. 225
Pin assignment ............................................ 3
PLL circuit .............................................. 459
Port register............................................. 125
Program counter (PC) ............................... 21
Program/erase protection ........................ 450
Program/program-verify ......................... 446
Program-counter relative .......................... 41
Programmable pulse generator ............... 277
Programmer mode................................... 451
Programming units.................................. 434
Programming/erasing in user
program mode ......................................... 442
Pulse output ............................................ 264
PWM modes ........................................... 219
R
N
NMI .......................................................... 71
Non-overlapping pulse output ................ 290
Normal mode ............................ 14, 111, 120
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 532 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
Register direct ........................................... 39
Register field............................................. 37
Register indirect........................................ 39
Register indirect with displacement.......... 39
Register indirect with post-increment ....... 40
Register indirect with pre-decrement........ 40
Register information ............................... 107
Registers
ADCR ......................... 415, 487, 496, 505
ADCSR....................... 413, 487, 496, 505
ADDR......................... 412, 486, 496, 505
BARA ........................... 88, 481, 490, 499
BARB ........................... 89, 481, 490, 499
BCRA ........................... 89, 481, 490, 499
BCRB ........................... 90, 481, 490, 499
BRR ............................ 327, 486, 495, 504
CRA.................................................... 103
CRB .................................................... 104
DAR.................................................... 103
DTCER ....................... 104, 481, 491, 500
DTVECR .................... 105, 482, 491, 500
EBR1 .......................... 437, 487, 496, 505
EBR2 .......................... 438, 487, 496, 505
FLMCR1..................... 435, 487, 496, 505
FLMCR2..................... 437, 487, 496, 505
IER................................ 67, 481, 490, 499
IPR................................ 66, 484, 493, 502
ISCR ............................. 68, 481, 490, 499
ISR................................ 70, 481, 490, 499
LPWRCR.................... 455, 481, 490, 499
MDCR .......................... 48, 481, 490, 499
MRA ................................................... 102
MRB ................................................... 103
MSTPCR .................... 468, 481, 490, 499
NDER ......................... 280, 482, 491, 500
NDR............................ 282, 482, 491, 500
P1DDR ....................... 129, 482, 491, 500
P1DR .......................... 130, 484, 493, 502
PADDR....................... 144, 482, 491, 500
PADR ......................... 145, 484, 493, 502
PAODR....................... 146, 482, 492, 501
PAPCR ....................... 146, 482, 491, 500
PBDDR....................... 148, 482, 491, 500
PBDR.......................... 149, 484, 494, 502
PBODR....................... 150, 482, 492, 501
PBPCR........................ 150, 482, 491, 500
PCDDR....................... 153, 482, 491, 500
PCDR .......................... 154, 484, 494, 503
PCODR ....................... 155, 482, 492, 501
PCPCR ........................ 155, 482, 491, 500
PCR............................. 284, 482, 491, 500
PDDDR....................... 159, 482, 491, 500
PDDR.......................... 160, 484, 494, 503
PDPCR........................ 161, 482, 491, 500
PFDDR........................ 162, 482, 491, 500
PFDR .......................... 163, 484, 494, 503
PMR ............................ 285, 482, 491, 500
PODR.......................... 281, 482, 491, 500
PORT1 ........................ 130, 487, 496, 505
PORT4 ........................ 138, 487, 496, 505
PORT9 ........................ 143, 487, 496, 505
PORTA ....................... 145, 487, 497, 505
PORTB........................ 149, 487, 497, 505
PORTC........................ 154, 487, 497, 505
PORTD ....................... 160, 487, 497, 505
PORTF ........................ 163, 487, 497, 505
RAMER ...................... 438, 484, 493, 502
RDR ............................ 312, 486, 496, 504
RSR..................................................... 312
RSTCSR...................... 303, 486, 495, 504
SAR..................................................... 103
SBYCR ....................... 466, 481, 490, 499
SCKCR ....................... 454, 481, 490, 499
SCMR ......................... 326, 486, 496, 504
SCR............................. 317, 486, 495, 504
SMR ............................ 313, 486, 495, 504
SSR ............................. 320, 486, 495, 504
SYSCR.......................... 49, 481, 490, 499
TCNT ......................... 203, 256, 300, 485,
.................................... 486, 492, 495, 504
TCNTH ............................................... 494
TCOR.......................... 256, 481, 489, 499
TCR............................. 257, 481, 489, 499
TCSR .......................... 259, 481, 489, 499
TDR ............................ 312, 486, 495, 504
TGR ............................ 213, 483, 492, 501
TIER............................ 198, 483, 492, 501
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 533 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
TIOR............................181, 482, 492, 501
TMDR .........................179, 482, 492, 501
TSR..............................312, 483, 492, 501
TSTR ...........................203, 484, 493, 502
TSYR...........................204, 484, 493, 502
Repeat mode ........................................... 112
Reset ......................................................... 55
Reset exception handling.......................... 55
S
Scan mode .............................................. 416
Serial communication interface .............. 309
Shift instructions....................................... 32
Single mode ............................................ 416
Software activation ......................... 116, 122
Stack pointer (SP)..................................... 20
Stack status ............................................... 61
SWDTEND............................................. 116
Synchronous operation ........................... 210
System control instructions ...................... 36
T
TCIU_1................................................... 234
TCIU_2................................................... 234
TCIU_4................................................... 234
TCIU_5................................................... 234
TCIV_0................................................... 234
TCIV_1................................................... 234
TCIV_2................................................... 234
TCIV_3................................................... 234
TCIV_4................................................... 234
TCIV_5................................................... 234
Rev. 1.00 Jan. 24, 2008 Page 534 of 534
REJ09B0426-0100
TCNT incrementation timing.................. 265
TGIA_0................................................... 234
TGIA_1................................................... 234
TGIA_2................................................... 234
TGIA_3................................................... 234
TGIA_4................................................... 234
TGIA_5................................................... 234
TGIB_0 ................................................... 234
TGIB_1 ................................................... 234
TGIB_2 ................................................... 234
TGIB_3 ................................................... 234
TGIB_4 ................................................... 234
TGIB_5 ................................................... 234
TGIC_0 ................................................... 234
TGIC_3 ................................................... 234
TGID_0................................................... 234
TGID_3................................................... 234
Toggle output.................................. 207, 273
Trace bit .................................................... 21
Traces........................................................ 58
Trap instruction......................................... 60
TRAPA instruction ............................. 41, 60
V
Vector number for the software activation
interrupt................................................... 105
W
Watchdog timer....................................... 299
Waveform output by compare match...... 207
WOVI ..................................................... 305
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
Hardware Manual
H8S/2604 Group
Publication Date: Rev.1.00, Jan. 24, 2008
Published by:
Sales Strategic Planning Div.
Renesas Technology Corp.
Edited by:
Customer Support Department
Global Strategic Communication Div.
Renesas Solutions Corp.
 2008. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
Sales Strategic Planning Div.
Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan
RENESAS SALES OFFICES
http://www.renesas.com
Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information.
Renesas Technology America, Inc.
450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A
Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501
Renesas Technology Europe Limited
Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K.
Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900
Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120
Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7858/7898
Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd.
7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2377-3473
Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd.
10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 3518-3399
Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd.
1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001
Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd.
Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea
Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145
Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd
Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jln Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510
Colophon 6.2
H8S/2604 Group
Hardware Manual